TELEDYNE

INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation, Inc
A Teledyne Technologies Company

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Chemiluminescence
Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer
Model 200E

© TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS

ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION

(T-API)
6565 NANCY RIDGE DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-2251, USA

Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190

Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
 INSTRUCTION MANUAL

MODEL 200E
NITROGEN OXIDES ANALYZER

© Teledyne Instruments
ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION
(T-API)
6565 NANCY RIDGE DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-2251
USA

Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190

Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

044100102
Rev. A
Copyright 2001 T-API Inc. 19-March-2003
M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

SAFETY MESSAGES
Your safety and the safety of others is very important. We have provided many important
safety messages in this manual. Please read these messages carefully.

A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety
message is associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual
and inside the instrument. The definition of these symbols is described below:

GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD: Refer to the instructions for

details on the specific hazard.

CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning.

CAUTION: Electrical Shock Hazard.

TECHNICIAN SYMBOL: All operations marked with this symbol

are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.

CAUTION
The analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in
this manual. If you use the analyzer in a manner other than that for which it was
intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous
consequences.

This analyzer is for indoor use only and for altitudes up to 2000 m (6500 ft).

ii 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY MESSAGES ...............................................................................................................II
TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................................................... III
LIST OF FIGURES................................................................................................................. IX
LIST OF TABLES ................................................................................................................... XI
LIST OF APPENDICES ....................................................................................................... XIII
1. M200E DOCUMENTATION...................................................................................................1
1.1. Available Documentation ...............................................................................................1
1.2. Manual Structure..........................................................................................................1
1.3. How to use this Instruction Manual .................................................................................3
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND WARRANTY ...............................................................5
2.1. M200E Operating Specifications ......................................................................................5
2.2. EPA Equivalency Designation..........................................................................................6
2.3. CE Mark Compliance .....................................................................................................7
2.4. Warranty.....................................................................................................................7
3. GETTING STARTED.............................................................................................................9
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup ...........................................................................................9
3.2. M200E Layout ............................................................................................................ 11
3.3. Pneumatic Connections ............................................................................................... 13
3.3.1. Span Gas Defined ................................................................................................ 14
3.3.2. Zero Gas Defined ................................................................................................. 15
3.4. Electrical Connections ................................................................................................. 17
3.4.1. Power Connection ................................................................................................ 17
3.4.2. Analog Output Connections ................................................................................... 17
3.4.3. Ethernet Connection and Configuration.................................................................... 20
3.5. Initial Operation ......................................................................................................... 20
3.5.1. Startup............................................................................................................... 20
3.5.2. Warm-Up ............................................................................................................ 21
3.5.3. Warning Messages ............................................................................................... 21
3.5.4. Functional Check.................................................................................................. 23
3.6. First Calibration.......................................................................................................... 26
3.6.1. Basic Calibration Procedure ................................................................................... 26
3.6.2. Interferences for NOX Measurements....................................................................... 27
4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS & GLOSSARY................................................................29
4.1. Frequently Asked Questions ......................................................................................... 29
4.2. Glossary ................................................................................................................... 30
5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE ..........................................................................33
5.1. External Pumps (Option 10) ......................................................................................... 33
5.2. Rack Mount Kits (Options 20-23) .................................................................................. 33
5.3. Current Loop Analog Outputs (Option 41) ...................................................................... 33
5.4. Particulate Filter Kit (Option 42A) ................................................................................. 34
5.5. Calibration Valve Options............................................................................................. 34
5.5.1. Zero/Span Valves (Option 50)................................................................................ 34
5.5.2. Internal Zero/Span (IZS) (Option 51) ..................................................................... 35
5.5.3. IZS Permeation Tubes (Options 53 & 55)................................................................. 36
5.6. Scrubbers and Expendables ......................................................................................... 37
5.6.1. Charcoal Scrubber (Option 64A) ............................................................................. 37
5.6.2. Charcoal Refill Kit (Part# 00596) ............................................................................ 37
5.6.3. Zero Air Scrubber (Option 64B).............................................................................. 37
5.6.4. Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit (Option 43)......................................................... 37
5.6.5. M200E Expendables Kit (Option 42) ........................................................................ 38
5.6.6. M200E Spare Parts Kit (Option 43) ......................................................................... 38
5.7. Communication Options .............................................................................................. 38
5.7.1. RS232 Modem Cables (Options 60 and 60A) ............................................................ 38
5.7.2. RS-232 Multidrop (Option 62) ................................................................................ 38
5.7.3. Ethernet (Option 63) ............................................................................................ 38
5.8. Sample Gas Conditioners (Options 86 & 88) ................................................................... 39
5.9. Manual on CD (Part number 044100200) ....................................................................... 40

044100102 Rev A iii

M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

5.10. Extended Warranty (Options 92 & 93)..........................................................................40

6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................... 41
6.1. Overview of Operating Modes .......................................................................................41
6.2. Sample Mode .............................................................................................................42
6.2.1. Test Functions .....................................................................................................42
6.2.2. Warning Messages................................................................................................44
6.2.3. Calibration Functions ............................................................................................44
6.3. Calibration Mode.........................................................................................................45
6.4. Setup Mode ...............................................................................................................45
6.4.1. Password (PASS)..................................................................................................45
6.4.2. Configuration Information (CFG).............................................................................47
6.4.3. Clock (CLK) .........................................................................................................47
6.5. Setup - Range Configuration (RNGE) .............................................................................48
6.5.1. Physical and Analog Output Ranges.........................................................................49
6.5.2. Reporting Range Modes.........................................................................................49
6.5.3. Single Range mode (SNGL)....................................................................................50
6.5.4. Independent Range Mode (IND) .............................................................................50
6.5.5. Auto Range Mode (AUTO) ......................................................................................52
6.5.6. Range Units.........................................................................................................52
6.5.7. Dilution Ratio.......................................................................................................53
6.6. Setup - Internal Variables (VARS) .................................................................................55
6.7. Setup - Diagnostics (DIAG) ..........................................................................................57
6.7.1. Signal I/O ...........................................................................................................58
6.7.2. Analog Output Step Test........................................................................................59
6.7.3. Analog I/O Configuration .......................................................................................60
6.7.3.1. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection .................................................61
6.7.3.2. Analog Output Calibration Mode .......................................................................62
6.7.3.3. Manual Analog Output Calibration.....................................................................64
6.7.3.4. Analog Output Offset Adjustment .....................................................................65
6.7.3.5. Current Loop Output Adjustment ......................................................................66
6.7.3.6. AIN Calibration ..............................................................................................68
6.7.4. Test Channel Output .............................................................................................68
6.7.5. Optic Test ...........................................................................................................70
6.7.6. Electrical Test ......................................................................................................70
6.7.7. Ozone Generator Override .....................................................................................71
6.7.8. Flow Calibration ...................................................................................................72
6.8. Digital Inputs and Outputs ...........................................................................................72
6.8.1. Status Outputs.....................................................................................................72
6.8.2. Control Inputs......................................................................................................73
6.9. Setup - Communication Ports (COMM) ...........................................................................74
6.9.1. Analyzer ID .........................................................................................................75
6.9.2. COM Port Default Settings .....................................................................................75
6.9.3. COM Port Cable Connections ..................................................................................76
6.9.4. COM2 Configuration..............................................................................................76
6.9.5. DTE and DCE Communication.................................................................................77
6.9.6. COM Port Communication Modes ............................................................................77
6.9.7. COM Port Baud Rate .............................................................................................80
6.9.8. COM Port Testing .................................................................................................80
6.9.9. Ethernet Port Configuration....................................................................................81
6.9.10. Hessen Mode Configuration ..................................................................................84
6.10. Setup - Data Acquisition System (DAS) ........................................................................85
6.10.1. iDAS Structure ...................................................................................................86
6.10.1.1. iDAS Channels .............................................................................................86
6.10.1.2. iDAS Parameters ..........................................................................................87
6.10.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events..................................................................................88
6.10.2. Configuring the iDAS ...........................................................................................89
6.10.2.1. Default M200E iDAS Configuration ..................................................................89
6.10.2.2. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings .....................................................................91
6.10.2.3. Editing iDAS Data Channels ...........................................................................92
6.10.2.4. Trigger Events .............................................................................................93

iv 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

6.10.2.5. Editing iDAS Parameters ............................................................................... 94

6.10.2.6. Sample Period and Report Period ................................................................... 95
6.10.2.7. Number of Records ...................................................................................... 97
6.10.2.8. RS-232 Report Function ................................................................................ 98
6.10.2.9. Compact Report........................................................................................... 99
6.10.2.10. Starting Date............................................................................................. 99
6.10.2.11. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels................................................................. 99
6.10.2.12. HOLDOFF Feature..................................................................................... 100
6.10.3. Remote iDAS Configuration................................................................................ 101
6.11. Remote Operation of the Analyzer ............................................................................. 102
6.11.1. Basic Operation................................................................................................ 102
6.11.1.1. Terminal Operating Modes........................................................................... 102
6.11.1.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode................................................................ 103
6.11.1.3. Command Syntax ...................................................................................... 103
6.11.1.4. Data Types ............................................................................................... 104
6.11.2. Status Reporting .............................................................................................. 105
6.11.3. Remote Access by Modem ................................................................................. 105
6.11.4. COM Port Password Security .............................................................................. 106
6.11.5. APICOM Remote Control Program ....................................................................... 107
6.11.6. Additional Communications Documentation .......................................................... 108
7. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ..........................................................................................109
7.1. Calibration Preparations ............................................................................................ 109
7.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables .................................................... 109
7.1.2. Zero Air ............................................................................................................ 109
7.1.3. Span Gas Standards ........................................................................................... 109
7.1.4. NO2 Permeation Tubes ........................................................................................ 110
7.1.5. Calibration Gas Traceability ................................................................................. 110
7.1.6. Data Recording Devices ...................................................................................... 110
7.1.7. NO2 Conversion Efficiency ................................................................................... 110
7.2. Manual Calibration.................................................................................................... 112
7.2.1. Connect Zero Air and Span Gases to the Analyzer ................................................... 113
7.2.2. Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations................................................ 113
7.2.3. Perform Zero/Span Calibration:............................................................................ 114
7.3. Calibration Checks .................................................................................................... 115
7.4. Calibration with Zero/Span Valves .............................................................................. 115
7.5. Calibration with IZS Option ........................................................................................ 117
7.6. Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero/Span Valves .......................................................... 119
7.7. Calibration With Independent or AUTO Ranges.............................................................. 120
7.7.1. Calibration in AUTO Range Mode .......................................................................... 120
7.7.2. Independent Range Mode.................................................................................... 121
7.7.3. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures ............................................................. 121
7.8. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal).................................................................................. 122
7.9. Calibration Quality Analysis........................................................................................ 124
8. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION .......................................................................................127
8.1. Calibration of Equipment ........................................................................................... 127
8.2. Gas Phase Titration (GPT).......................................................................................... 129
8.2.1. GPT Principle of Operation ................................................................................... 129
8.2.2. GPT Calibrator Check Procedure ........................................................................... 129
8.2.3. Example GPT Calculation ..................................................................................... 131
8.3. Multipoint Calibration Procedure ................................................................................. 132
8.3.1. Zero Calibration ................................................................................................. 133
8.3.2. Span Calibration ................................................................................................ 133
8.3.3. GPT NO2 Calibration ........................................................................................... 134
8.4. Calibration Frequency ............................................................................................... 135
8.5. Other Quality Assurance Procedures............................................................................ 135
8.6. Summary of Quality Assurance Checks ........................................................................ 137
8.7. Short Calibration Checks ........................................................................................... 137
8.7.1. Zero/Span Check Procedures ............................................................................... 138
8.7.2. Precision Check ................................................................................................. 138
8.7.3. Precision Check Procedure ................................................................................... 138

044100102 Rev A v
M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

8.8. Certification of Working Standards .............................................................................. 138

8.8.1. Certification Procedures of Working Standards ........................................................ 139
8.8.1.1. Other Methods of Establishing Traceability ....................................................... 139
8.9. References............................................................................................................... 139
9. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................ 141
9.1. Maintenance Schedule ............................................................................................... 141
9.2. Predictive Diagnostics................................................................................................ 143
9.3. Maintenance Procedures ............................................................................................ 143
9.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter .................................................................. 144
9.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter................................................................. 145
9.3.3. Changing the Ozone Filter Chemical ...................................................................... 146
9.3.4. Rebuilding the External Sample Pump ................................................................... 147
9.3.5. Changing the Pump and IZS Dust Filters ................................................................ 148
9.3.6. Changing the IZS Permeation Tube ....................................................................... 148
9.3.7. Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber ............................................................... 149
9.3.8. Changing the NO2 converter................................................................................. 150
9.3.9. Cleaning the Reaction Cell ................................................................................... 151
9.3.10. Cleaning or Changing Critical Flow Orifices ........................................................... 153
9.3.11. Checking for Light Leaks .................................................................................... 154
10. THEORY OF OPERATION .............................................................................................. 155
10.1. Measurement Principle ............................................................................................. 155
10.1.1. Chemiluminescence .......................................................................................... 155
10.1.2. NOX and NO2 Determination................................................................................ 156
10.1.3. Chemiluminescence Detection ............................................................................ 157
10.1.3.1. The Photo Multiplier Tube ............................................................................ 157
10.1.3.2. Optical Filter.............................................................................................. 158
10.1.4. Auto Zero ........................................................................................................ 158
10.1.5. Measurement Interferences................................................................................ 159
10.1.5.1. Direct Interference ..................................................................................... 159
10.1.5.2. Third Body Quenching ................................................................................. 159
10.1.5.3. Light Leaks................................................................................................ 161
10.2. Pneumatic Operation ............................................................................................... 161
10.2.1. Pump and Exhaust Manifold ............................................................................... 161
10.2.2. Sample Gas Flow .............................................................................................. 162
10.2.3. Sample Particulate Filter .................................................................................... 163
10.2.4. Ozone Gas Air Flow ........................................................................................... 164
10.2.5. O3 Generator ................................................................................................... 164
10.2.6. Perma Pure® Dryer ........................................................................................... 165
10.2.7. Ozone Supply Air Filter ...................................................................................... 166
10.2.8. Ozone Scrubber................................................................................................ 167
10.2.9. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices .............................................................. 167
10.2.10. Pneumatic Sensors.......................................................................................... 170
10.2.10.1. Sample Pressure Sensor ............................................................................ 170
10.2.10.2. Vacuum Pressure Sensor ........................................................................... 170
10.2.10.3. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor ......................................................................... 170
10.3. Electronic Operation ................................................................................................ 171
10.3.1. CPU ................................................................................................................ 172
10.3.1.1. Disk On Chip ............................................................................................. 173
10.3.1.2. Flash Chip ................................................................................................. 173
10.3.2. Sensor Module, Reaction Cell & PMT .................................................................... 173
10.3.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit ........................................................................ 173
10.3.2.2. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) ......................................................................... 174
10.3.2.3. PMT Cooling System ................................................................................... 174
10.3.2.4. TEC Control Board ...................................................................................... 175
10.3.2.5. PMT Preamplifier ........................................................................................ 175
10.3.3. Pneumatic Sensor Board .................................................................................... 176
10.3.4. Relay Board ..................................................................................................... 177
10.3.4.1. Heater Control ........................................................................................... 177
10.3.4.2. Valve Control............................................................................................. 177
10.3.4.3. Status LEDs............................................................................................... 177

vi 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

10.3.5. Motherboard.................................................................................................... 178

10.3.5.1. A to D Conversion ...................................................................................... 178
10.3.5.2. Sensor Inputs............................................................................................ 178
10.3.5.3. Thermistor Interface................................................................................... 179
10.3.5.4. Analog Outputs.......................................................................................... 179
10.3.5.5. External Digital I/O .................................................................................... 180
10.3.5.6. I2C Data Bus ............................................................................................. 180
10.3.5.7. Power-up Circuit ........................................................................................ 180
10.3.6. Power Supply/ Circuit Breaker ............................................................................ 180
10.3.7. Communications Interface ................................................................................. 181
10.3.7.1. Front Panel ............................................................................................... 182
10.3.7.2. Display ..................................................................................................... 182
10.3.7.3. Keypad..................................................................................................... 183
10.3.7.4. Front Panel States LED’s ............................................................................. 183
10.3.7.5. Display / Keyboard Interface Electronics........................................................ 183
10.4. Software Operation ................................................................................................. 184
10.4.1. Adaptive Filter ................................................................................................. 184
10.4.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset............................................................................. 185
10.4.3. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) ......................................................... 186
10.4.4. NO2 Converter Efficiency Compensation ............................................................... 187
10.4.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (iDAS) .............................................................. 187
11. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR ....................................................................................189
11.1. General Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 189
11.1.1. Warning Messages............................................................................................ 190
11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions..................................................................... 190
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function.............................................................. 191
11.1.4. Status LED’s .................................................................................................... 192
11.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog) ..................................................... 192
11.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator .................................................................................. 193
11.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs....................................................................... 193
11.2. Gas Flow Problems.................................................................................................. 195
11.2.1. Zero or Low Flow Problems ................................................................................ 196
11.2.1.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low ......................................................................... 196
11.2.1.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low .......................................................................... 197
11.2.2. High Flow........................................................................................................ 198
11.2.3. Sample Flow is Zero or Low But Analyzer Reports Correct Flow ............................... 198
11.3. Calibration Problems ............................................................................................... 198
11.3.1. Negative Concentrations.................................................................................... 198
11.3.2. No Response ................................................................................................... 199
11.3.3. Unstable Zero and Span .................................................................................... 200
11.3.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Key ......................................................................... 200
11.3.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Key.......................................................................... 201
11.3.6. Non-Linear Response ........................................................................................ 201
11.3.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display .................................................. 202
11.3.8. Discrepancy between NO and NOX slopes ............................................................. 202
11.4. Other Performance Problems .................................................................................... 202
11.4.1. Excessive noise ................................................................................................ 203
11.4.2. Slow Response................................................................................................. 203
11.4.3. Auto-zero Warnings .......................................................................................... 203
11.5. Subsystem Checkout............................................................................................... 204
11.5.1. Simple Vacuum Leak and Pump Check................................................................. 204
11.5.2. Detailed Pressure Leak Check............................................................................. 204
11.5.3. Performing a Sample Flow Check ........................................................................ 205
11.5.4. AC Power Configuration..................................................................................... 206
11.5.5. DC Power Supply.............................................................................................. 206
11.5.6. I2C Bus ........................................................................................................... 207
11.5.7. Keyboard / Display Interface.............................................................................. 207
11.5.8. Relay Board..................................................................................................... 208
11.5.9. Motherboard.................................................................................................... 208
11.5.9.1. A/D functions ............................................................................................ 208

044100102 Rev A vii

M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

11.5.9.2. Analog Output Voltages............................................................................... 208

11.5.9.3. Status Outputs........................................................................................... 209
11.5.9.4. Control Inputs ........................................................................................... 209
11.5.10. CPU .............................................................................................................. 210
11.5.11. RS-232 Communication ................................................................................... 210
11.5.11.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting................................................................. 210
11.5.11.2. Modem or Terminal Operation .................................................................... 211
11.5.12. PMT Sensor.................................................................................................... 211
11.5.13. PMT Preamplifier Board .................................................................................... 211
11.5.14. High Voltage Power Supply............................................................................... 212
11.5.15. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly ............................................................................. 212
11.5.15.1. Reaction Cell Pressure ............................................................................... 213
11.5.15.2. Sample Pressure ...................................................................................... 213
11.5.15.3. Ozone Flow.............................................................................................. 214
11.5.16. NO2 Converter ................................................................................................ 214
11.5.17. O3 Generator.................................................................................................. 216
11.5.18. IZS Option ..................................................................................................... 216
11.5.19. Box Temperature ............................................................................................ 216
11.5.20. PMT Temperature............................................................................................ 217
11.6. Repair Procedures ................................................................................................... 217
11.6.1. Disk-on-Chip Replacement ................................................................................. 217
11.6.2. Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade .................................................................... 218
11.6.3. O3 Generator Replacement................................................................................. 218
11.6.4. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement ................................................................ 219
11.6.5. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration........................................................................ 219
11.6.6. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC ......................................................................... 221
11.7. Technical Assistance ................................................................................................ 223

viii 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1: Location of Shipping Screws and Power Configuration Plug ............................... 10
Figure 3-2: M200E Layout............................................................................................ 11
Figure 3-3: M200E Rear Panel Layout ............................................................................ 12
Figure 3-4: M200E Front Panel Layout ........................................................................... 12
Figure 3-5: Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units Without Valve Options........................... 14
Figure 3-6: Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units With Valve Options ............................... 16
Figure 3-7: Analog Output Connector ............................................................................ 17
Figure 3-8: Status Output Connector ............................................................................. 18
Figure 3-9: Control Input Connector.............................................................................. 19
Figure 3-10: Front Panel Display During Startup Sequence ................................................. 21
Figure 3-11: M200E Pneumatic Diagram In Standard Configuration ..................................... 24
Figure 3-12: M200E Pneumatic Diagram With Options Installed .......................................... 25
Figure 5-1: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .......................................... 34
Figure 5-2: M200E Ethernet Card and Rear Panel With Ethernet Installed ........................... 39
Figure 6-1: Analog Output Connector Key ...................................................................... 48
Figure 6-2: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs ............................................................ 64
Figure 6-3: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs ........................................................... 67
Figure 6-4: Status Output Connector ............................................................................. 73
Figure 6-5: Control Inputs with Local and External 5 V Power Supply ................................. 74
Figure 6-6: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the iDAS ..............................101
Figure 6-7: iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program.............................102
Figure 6-8: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface...................................................107
Figure 7-1: Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency ....................111
Figure 7-2: Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option..........................113
Figure 7-3: Pneumatic Connections for Manual Calibration Checks with IZS........................117
Figure 7-4: Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z/S Valve or IZS Option.....................119
Figure 8-1: GPT Calibration System..............................................................................133
Figure 9-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly ..............................................................144
Figure 9-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer............................................................145
Figure 9-3: 04419 Ozone Filter Unit .............................................................................146
Figure 9-4: Zero Air Scrubber Assembly........................................................................150
Figure 9-5: NO2 Converter Assembly ............................................................................151
Figure 9-6: Reaction Cell Assembly ..............................................................................152
Figure 9-7: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly......................................................................153
Figure 10-1: M200E Sensitivity Spectrum .......................................................................156
Figure 10-2: NO2 Conversion Principle ............................................................................157
Figure 10-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube .......................................................................158
Figure 10-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle.......................................................159
Figure 10-5: External Pump Pack...................................................................................162
Figure 10-6: Ozone Generator Principle ..........................................................................164
Figure 10-7: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process...................................................165
Figure 10-8: M200E Perma Pure® Dryer..........................................................................166
Figure 10-9: Location of Flow Control Assemblies.............................................................168
Figure 10-10: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice ................................................168
Figure 10-11: M200E Electronic Block Diagram..................................................................171
Figure 10-12: M200E CPU Board Annotated ......................................................................172
Figure 10-13: Schematic of Basic PMT Design and Functionality...........................................174
Figure 10-14: PMT Preamp Block Diagram ........................................................................176
Figure 10-15: Power Distribution Block Diagram ................................................................181
Figure 10-16: M200E Electronic Interface Block Diagram ....................................................182
Figure 10-17: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram..............................................184

044100102 Rev A ix
M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 10-18: Schematic of Basic Software Operation ........................................................185

Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages ......................................................190
Figure 11-2: Switching Signal I/O Functions....................................................................192
Figure 11-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator .......................................................193
Figure 11-4: Relay Board PCA .......................................................................................194
Figure 11-5: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly ................................................................214
Figure 11-6: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout .........................................................................220
Figure 11-7: M200E Sensor Assembly ............................................................................222
Figure A-1: Basic Sample Display Menu ........................................................................226
Figure A-2: Sample Display Menu - Units with Z/S Valve or IZS Option installed .................227
Figure A-3: Primary Setup Menu (Except iDAS)..............................................................228
Figure A-4: Secondary Setup Menu (COMM & VARS).......................................................229
Figure A-5: Secondary Setup Menu (DIAG) ...................................................................230
Figure A-6: Internal Data Acquisition (iDAS) Menu .........................................................231

x 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1: Model 200E Basic Unit Specifications............................................................... 5
Table 3-1: Inlet / Outlet Connector Nomenclature .......................................................... 13
Table 3-2: Analog Output Pin-Outs............................................................................... 18
Table 3-3: Status Output Signals ................................................................................. 18
Table 3-4: Control Input Signals .................................................................................. 19
Table 3-5: Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up ................................................. 21
Table 3-6: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up ......................................................... 22
Table 5-1: IZS or Z/S Valve States .............................................................................. 35
Table 5-2: Available Permeation Source Options ............................................................ 36
Table 5-3: Contents of Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit ............................................... 37
Table 5-4: Dryer and NH3 Removal Options ................................................................... 39
Table 6-1: Analyzer Operating modes........................................................................... 41
Table 6-2: Test Functions Defined................................................................................ 43
Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages Revision C.4 .......................................................... 44
Table 6-4: Password Levels......................................................................................... 45
Table 6-5: Variable Names (VARS) Revision C.4............................................................. 55
Table 6-6: M200E Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions .............................................................. 57
Table 6-7: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions........................................................................ 60
Table 6-8: Analog Output Voltage Ranges ..................................................................... 60
Table 6-9: Analog Output Current Loop Range ............................................................... 61
Table 6-10: Analog Output Pin Assignments.................................................................... 61
Table 6-11: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration............................................ 64
Table 6-12: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor ................................................ 68
Table 6-13: Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4 ............................................. 69
Table 6-14: Status Output Pin Assignments .................................................................... 73
Table 6-15: Control Input Pin Assignments ..................................................................... 74
Table 6-16: COM1 and COM2 DB-9 Pin Assignments ........................................................ 77
Table 6-17: COM Port Communication Modes .................................................................. 78
Table 6-18: Ethernet Status Indicators........................................................................... 81
Table 6-19: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS .................................................... 85
Table 6-20: iDAS Data Channel Properties ...................................................................... 87
Table 6-21: iDAS Data Parameter Functions.................................................................... 88
Table 6-22: M200E Default iDAS Configuration, Revision C.7. ............................................ 90
Table 6-23: Terminal Mode Software Commands ............................................................103
Table 6-24: Command Types .......................................................................................104
Table 6-25: Serial Interface Documents ........................................................................108
Table 7-1: IZS Option Valve States with CAL_ON_NO2 Turned ON ...................................117
Table 7-2: AutoCal Modes..........................................................................................122
Table 7-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters.............................................................122
Table 7-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence .......................................................................123
Table 7-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation ..............................................................125
Table 8-1: Activity Matrix for EPA Calibration Equipment and Supplies .............................128
Table 8-2: Activity Matrix for Calibration Procedure .......................................................128
Table 8-3: Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks..................................136
Table 8-4: Activity Matrix for Data Quality ...................................................................137
Table 9-1: M200E Preventive Maintenance Schedule......................................................141
Table 9-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions................................................................143
Table 10-1: List of Interferents ....................................................................................160
Table 10-2: M200E Valve Cycle Phases..........................................................................163
Table 10-3: M200E Gas Flow Rates ...............................................................................169
Table 10-4: Front Panel Status LED’s ............................................................................183

044100102 Rev A xi
M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 11-1: Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values ..............................191
Table 11-2: Relay Board Status LEDs ............................................................................195
Table 11-3: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code ..................................................206
Table 11-4: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels .............................................................207
Table 11-5: Relay Board Control Devices .......................................................................208
Table 11-6: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values ..............................................209
Table 11-7: Status Outputs Check ................................................................................209

xii 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION............................................................225
APPENDIX A-1: M200E Software Menu Trees and Index, Revision C.8 ............................... 226
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision C.8 ............................................ 232
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements, Revision C.8 ...................................... 241
APPENDIX A-4: M200E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision C.8 ............................................. 243
APPENDIX A-5: M200E Trigger Events and iDAS Functions, Revision C.8 ........................... 246
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision C.8 ......................................... 248
APPENDIX B: SPARE PARTS AND EXPENDABLES .....................................................251
APPENDIX C: REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - M200E.....................................................257
APPENDIX D: DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS............................................................259

044100102 Rev A xiii

M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

xiv 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

1. M200E DOCUMENTATION

1.1. Available Documentation

Thank you for purchasing the Model 200E Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer! The documentation for
this instrument is available in different formats:

• Printed format, part number 044100100

• Electronic format on a CD-ROM, part number 044100200
The electronic manual is in Adobe® Systems Inc. “Portable Document Format” (PDF). The
Adobe® Acrobat Reader® software, which is necessary to view these files, can be
downloaded for free from the internet at http://www.adobe.com/.

The electronic version of the manual has many advantages:

• Keyword and phrase search feature

• Figures, tables and internet addresses are linked so that clicking on the item will
display the associated feature or open the website.
• A list of chapters and sections as well as thumbnails of each page are displayed to
the left of the text.
• Entries in the table of contents are linked to the corresponding locations in the
manual.
• Ability to print sections (or all) of the manual
Additional documentation for the Model 200E Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is available from T-
API’s website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/

• APICOM software manual, part number 03945

• Multi-drop manual, part number 02179
• DAS manual, part number 02837.
• Ethernet configuration document, part number 04324.
Other documentation may be added to the website in the future.

1.2. Manual Structure

1.0 Table of Contents:

Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented. This is a good
overview of the topics covered in the manual. There is also a list of appendices, figures and
tables. In the electronic version of the manual, clicking on a any of these table entries
automatically views that section.

044100102 Rev A 1
M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

2.0 Specifications and Warranty

A list of the analyzer’s performance specifications, a description of the conditions and

configuration under which EPA equivalency was approved and T-API’s warranty statement.

3.0 Getting Started

Concise instructions for setting up, installing and running your analyzer for the first time.

4.0 FAQ & Glossary:

Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the analyzer and a
glossary of acronyms and technical terms.

5.0 Optional Hardware & Software

A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your analyzer.

6.0 Operation Instructions

Step by step instructions for operating the analyzer.

7.0 Calibration Procedures

General information and step by step instructions for calibrating your analyzer.

8.0 EPA Protocol Calibration

Specific information regarding calibration requirements for analyzers used in EPA-regulated

monitoring applications.

9.0 Instrument Maintenance

Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on

you instrument to assure good operating condition. This includes information on using the
iDAS to predict possible component failures before they happen.

10.0 Theory of Operation

An in-depth look at the various principals by which your analyzer operates as well as a
description of how the various electronic, mechanical and pneumatic components of the
instrument work and interact with each other. A close reading of this section is invaluable
for understanding the instrument’s operation.

11.0 Troubleshooting & Repair

This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the instrument,
such as excessive noise or drift, as well as instructions on performing repairs of the
instrument’s major subsystems.

Appendices

For easier access and better updating, some information has been separated out of the
manual and placed in a series of appendices at the end of this manual. These include

2 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual M200E Documentation

version-specific software menu trees, warning messages, definitions of iDAS & serial I/O
variables as well as spare part listings, repair questionnaire, interconnect drawing, detailed
pneumatic and electronic schematics.

1.3. How to use this Instruction Manual

Throughout this manual, words printed in capital, bold letters, such as SETUP or ENTR
represent messages as they appear on the analyzer’s front panel display.

The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display
during the described operations. These representations are not necessarily exact and may
differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.

NOTE:
Warnings and special notes are called out in bold,
centered frames such as this one.

Cautionary notes with special symbols such as this one may appear
throughout the manual indicating hazardous operations requiring
either trained, technical personnel or particular attention.

044100102 Rev A 3
M200E Documentation Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

4 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Specifications, Approvals and Warranty

2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND

WARRANTY

2.1. M200E Operating Specifications

Table 2-1: Model 200E Basic Unit Specifications
Min/Max Range Min: 0-50 ppb
(Physical Analog Output) Max: 0-20 ppm
Measurement Units ppb, ppm, µg/m3, mg/m3 (user selectable)
1
Zero Noise 0.2 ppb (RMS)
1
Span Noise <0.5% of reading above 50 ppb or 0.2 ppm, whichever is greater
Lower Detectable Limit2 0.4 ppb
Zero Drift (24 hours) <0.5 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)
Zero Drift (7 days) 1 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)
Span Drift (7 Days) <0.5% of full Scale (at constant temperature and voltage.)
Linearity 1% of full scale
Precision 0.5% of reading
Temperature Coefficient < 0.1% per °C
Voltage Coefficient < 0.1% per V
Lag Time1 20 s
1
Rise/Fall Time 95% in <60 s
Sample Flow Rate 500 cm3/min. ± 10%
Temperature Range 5 - 40 °C operating and EPA equivalency
Humidity Range 0-95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions H x W x D 18 cm x 43 cm x 61 cm (7" x 17" x 23.6")
Weight, Analyzer 18 kg (40 lbs)
Weight, Ext Pump Pack 7 kg (16 lbs)
AC Power Rating 100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A);
115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)
Power, Ext Pump 100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A); 115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)
Environmental Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2
Analog Outputs 4 outputs
Analog Output Ranges All Outputs: 0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V (user selectable)
Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop.
All Ranges with 5% under/over range
Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)
Status Outputs 8 Status outputs from opto-isolators, 7 defined, 1 spare
Control Inputs 6 Control inputs, 4 defined, 2 spare
Serial I/O 1 RS-232; 1 RS-485 or RS-232 (configurable)
Communication speed: 300 - 115200 baud (user selectable)
Certifications USEPA: Reference Method Number RFNA 1194-099
CE: EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section
15.107 Class A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548
(w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.
1
As defined by the USEPA.
2
Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA.

044100102 Rev A 5
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty Model 200E Instruction Manual

2.2. EPA Equivalency Designation

The Model 200E Analyzer is designated as Reference Method Number RFNA-1194-099
(same designation as model M200A) as per 40 CFR Part 53 when operated under the
following conditions:

• Range: Any full-scale range between 0-0.05 and 0-1.0 ppm (parts per million).
• Ambient temperature range of 5 to 40 oC.
• Line voltage range of 105-125 VAC or 220-240 VAC, at 50 or 60 Hz.
• Equipped with PTFE filter element in the internal filter assembly.
• Equipped with ozone supply air filter
External vacuum pump capable of 10 in-Hg-A at 2 standard liters per minute (slpm) or
better.

Software settings:

Dynamic span OFF

Dynamic zero OFF
Cal-on-NO2 OFF
Dilution factor OFF
Temp/Pressure compensation ON
AutoCal ON or OFF
Independent range ON or OFF
Auto-range ON or OFF
Converter efficiency Acceptable values of 0.96 to 1.02

Under the designation, the analyzer may be operated with or without the following optional
equipment:
• Rack mount with or without slides.
• Rack mount for external pump.
• Zero/span valve options.
• Nafion-type permeation sample gas conditioner
• Internal zero/span (IZS) option with:
• NO2 permeation tube - 0.4ppm at 0.7 liter per minute; certified/uncertified.
• NO2 permeation tube - 0.8 ppm at 0.7 liter per minute; certified/uncertified.
Under the designation, the IZS option cannot be used as the source of calibration.

• 4-20mA isolated analog outputs.

• Status outputs.
• Control inputs.
• RS-232 output.
• Ethernet communications option

6 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Specifications, Approvals and Warranty

2.3. CE Mark Compliance

The Teledyne-Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers M200E,
M200EH and M200EM were tested and found to be fully compliant with:

EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A,
ICES-003 Class A (ANSI C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.

Tested on January 02-06, 2003 at CKC Laboratories, Inc., Report Number CE03-005.

The Teledyne-Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers M200E,

M200EH and M200EM were tested and found to be fully compliant with:

EN61010-1 (2001)

Tested on January 27-20, 2003.

2.4. Warranty
Warranty Policy (02024C)

Prior to shipment, T-API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment
failure occur, T-API assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.

Coverage

After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, T-API stands ready to
provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufactur-
ers in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting is to be
performed by the customer.

Non-API Manufactured Equipment

Equipment provided but not manufactured by T-API is warranted and will be repaired to the
extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment
manufacturers warranty.

General

T-API warrants each product manufactured by T-API to be free from defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of
delivery. All replacement parts and repairs are warranted for 90 days after the purchase.

If a product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, T-API shall
correct such defect by, in T-API's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective product or
refunding the purchase price of such product.

The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any
product: (i) that has been altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii)
that has been used in any manner other than in accordance with the instruction provided by
T-API or (iii) not properly maintained.

044100102 Rev A 7
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty Model 200E Instruction Manual

THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE
EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED. THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN. T-API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS
AGREEMENT OF T-API'S PERFORMANCE HEREUNDER, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.

Terms and Conditions

All units or components returned to T-API should be properly packed for handling and
returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the
equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.

8 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

3. GETTING STARTED

3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup

CAUTION
The M200E weighs about 17 kg (40 pounds) without options installed. To avoid
personal injury, we recommend to use two persons to lift and carry the analyzer.

Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please advise the
shipper first, then T-API.

Included with your analyzer is a printed record (Form number 04490) of the final perform-
ance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory. This record is an
important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed
in the quality records file for this instrument.

• Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping
damage.
• Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel.
• Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (four per side).
• Lift the cover straight up.

CAUTION
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCA) are static sensitive. Electrostatic discharges, too
small to be felt by humans, are large enough to destroy sensitive circuits.

Before touching a PCA, fasten a properly installed grounding strap to your wrist or
touch a bare metal part of the chassis to discharge any electrostatic potentials.

Never disconnect electronic circuit boards, wiring harnesses or electronic

subassemblies while the unit is under power.

Do not position the equipment so that it is difficult to operate the disconnecting

device.

• Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other
components are in good shape and properly seated.
• Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses
to make sure they are firmly and properly seated.
• Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed.
These are checked on the paperwork (Form 04490) accompanying the analyzer.
• Once you have determined that no shipping damage exists and the unit includes all
expected hardware options, remove three, red colored shipping screws from the
bottom of the chassis, shown in Figure 3-1.

044100102 Rev A 9
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 3-1: Location of Shipping Screws and Power Configuration Plug

NOTE
Save these shipping screws and re-install them whenever the unit is shipped.

A certain ventilation clearance is required for the operation of the analyzer:

Area Minimum required clearance

Back of the instrument 10 cm / 4 inches
Sides of the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch
Above and below the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch

Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer. See Chapter 5 of this manual for
more information.

10 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

3.2. M200E Layout

Figure 3-2 shows a top-down view of the analyzer. The shown configuration includes the
Ethernet board, IZS option, zero-air scrubber and an additional sample dryer. See
Chapter 5 for optional equipment. Figure 3-3 shows the rear panel configuration with
optional zero-air scrubber mounted to it and two optional fittings for the IZS option. Figure
3-4, finally shows the front panel layout of the analyzer.

Figure 3-2: M200E Layout

044100102 Rev A 11
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 3-3: M200E Rear Panel Layout

Figure 3-4: M200E Front Panel Layout

12 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

3.3. Pneumatic Connections

Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE (Teflon), FEP, glass
or stainless steel materials. Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 illustrate the most common
configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the Model 200E Analyzer. Appendix D
contains more detailed pneumatic flow diagrams for the analyzer and its various
(pneumatically related) options.

CAUTION
To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer, it was shipped with small plugs
inserted into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel. Make sure that all
dust plugs are removed before attaching exhaust and supply gas lines.

Please refer to Figure 3-3 for pneumatic connections at the rear panel and Table 3-1 for
nomenclature.

Table 3-1: Inlet / Outlet Connector Nomenclature

Rear Panel Label Function

Connects the sample gas to the analyzer. When operating the analyzer
Sample
without zero span option, this is also the inlet for any calibration gases.
Exhaust Connects the exhaust of the analyzer with the external vacuum pump.
On Units with zero/span valve or IZS option installed, this port
Span
connects the external calibration gas to the analyzer.
On Units with zero/span valve or IZS option installed, this port
Zero Air
connects the zero air gas or the zero air cartridge to the analyzer.

• Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. Ideally, the pressure of the
sample gas should be equal to ambient atmospheric pressure.
• In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent
must be provided to equalize the sample gas with ambient atmospheric pressure
before it enters the analyzer. The vented gas needs to be routed outside the imme-
diate area or shelter surrounding the instrument.

CAUTION
Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-Hg
above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.

CAUTION
The exhaust from the external pump needs to be vented outside the
immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument using a
maximum of 10 meters of 1/4” PTFE tubing.

044100102 Rev A 13
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Attach the 1/4" exhaust line to the exhaust port of the analyzer and to the inlet port
of the pump.
• Attach zero air and span gas supply lines as appropriate (Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6)
to the rear panel (Figure 3-3). For this type of analyzer, zero air and span gas are
defined as follows.

3.3.1. Span Gas Defined

Span gas is defined as a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the
type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. To
measure NOX with the M200E NOX Analyzer, it is recommended that you use a span gas
with an NO concentration equal to 80% of the measurement range for your application.

No Valve Options Installed

Calibrated
NO gas
(high MODEL 700 Gas Source of
concentration)
Dilution SAMPLE gas
Calibrator removed
(with Ozone generator during
calibration
option)

MODEL 701 VENT

Zero Air Sample
Generator

Pump
Exhaust
MODEL
Span
200E
Zero Air

OR

Calibrated
NO gas
(At span gas Source of
concentration) SAMPLE gas
removed
during
calibration
Needle valve to
control flow

Valve
MODEL 701
Sample
Zero Air
Generator
VENT
Exhaust
MODEL
Span
200E
Pump
Zero Air

Figure 3-5: Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units Without Valve Options

14 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

For example, if the measurement is NOX in ambient air between 0 and 500 ppb, an
appropriate span gas would be NO in air at 400 ppb NO concentration (80% of maximum
range). Even though NO gas in nitrogen could be used as a span gas, the matrix of the
balance gas is different and may cause interference problems or yield incorrect calibrations.
The same applies to gases that contain high concentrations of other compounds (for
example, CO2 or H2O). The span gas should match all concentrations of all gases of the
measured medium as closely as possible.

Cylinders of calibrated NO gas traceable to NIST-standard reference materials specifications

(also referred to as EPA protocol calibration gases) are commercially available.

Some applications, such as EPA monitoring, require a multipoint calibration where span
gases of different concentrations are needed. We recommend using an NO gas of higher
concentration combined with a gas dilution calibrator such as a T-API Model 700. This type
of calibrator mixes a high concentration gas with zero air (both supplied externally) to
accurately produce span gas of the desired concentration. Linearity profiles can be
automated with this model and run unattended overnight. The dynamic range of the M700
is about 0.1 to 0.001 times the original span concentration.

If a dynamic dilution system such as the T-API model 700 is used to dilute high concentra-
tion gas standards to low, ambient concentrations, ensure that the NO concentration of the
reference gas matches the dilution range of the calibrator. Choose the NO gas concentration
such that the dynamic dilution system operates in its mid-range and not at the extremes of
its dilution capabilities. For example, a dilution calibrator with 10-10000 dilution ratio will
not be able to accurately dilute a 5000 ppm NO gas to a final concentration of 500 ppb, as
this would operate at the very extreme dilution setting. A 100 ppm NO gas in nitrogen is
much more suitable to calibrate the M200E analyzer (dilution ratio of 222, in the mid-range
of the system’s capabilities).

3.3.2. Zero Gas Defined

Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical composition to
the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer, in this case NO
and NO2. If your analyzer is equipped with an IZS or external zero air scrubber option, it is
capable of creating zero air from ambient air. However, if your application is not a
measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas should be matched to the matrix of
the measured medium. Pure nitrogen could be used as a zero gas for applications where
NOX is measured in nitrogen.

For analyzers without zero air options, a zero air generator such as the T-API Model 701 can
be used. Please visit the company website for more information.

If your analyzer is equiped with either the zero/span valve option (Option 50) or the
internal zero/span option (Option 51), the pneumatic connections should be made as shown
in Figure 3-6 (see also Appendix D for detailed diagram).

044100102 Rev A 15
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

Zero/Span Valves – Option 50

MODEL 700 Source of
Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE Gas
(with O3 generator option) VENT if input is pressurized

Sample
VENT

Pump
Exhaust
MODEL
Span
200E
External Zero
Air Scrubber Zero Air
MODEL 701
Calibrated Zero Air Filter
NO gas Generator
(high
concentration)

Internal Zero/Span Option (IZS) – Option 51

Source of
SAMPLE Gas VENT if input is pressurized

Sample

Pump
Exhaust
MODEL
Span
200E
External Zero
Air Scrubber Zero Air

Particulate
Filter

Figure 3-6: Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units With Valve Options

Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings
for leaks using the procedures defined in Section 11.5.

WARNING
Gas flow must be maintained at all times for units with IZS Options installed. The
IZS option includes a permeation tube which emits NO2. Insufficient gas flow can
build up NO2 to levels that will damage the instrument. Remove the permeation
device when taking the analyzer out of operation.

16 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

3.4. Electrical Connections

Refer to Figure 3-3 for the location of the rear panel electrical and pneumatic connections.

3.4.1. Power Connection

Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at
least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth
ground.

The M200E analyzer can be configured for both 100-130 V and 210-240 V at either 50 or 60
Hz., To avoid damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches the
voltage indicated on the rear panel serial number label and that the frequency is between
47 and 63 Hz. Refer to Figure 3-1 to locate and identify the power configuration plug if
necessary.

If you need to reconfigure your analyzer for one of the other voltage ranges, contact the
factory for an optional power configuration jumper (shown in Figure 3-1)

CAUTION
The correct voltage and frequency needs to be supplied to the analyzer
as listed on the label on the rear panel of the instrument .
Power connections must have a functioning ground connection.

3.4.2. Analog Output Connections

Attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate contacts of the analog
output connecter on the rear panel of the analyzer.

ANALOG OUT
A1 A2 A3 A4
+ - + - + - + -

Figure 3-7: Analog Output Connector

Output channels A1, A2 and A3 are assigned to the NOX, NO and NO2 concentration
signals of the analyzer. The output labeled A4 can be set by the user for output of any test
parameter accessible through the <TST TST> keys on the front panel display. Section 6.7.4
describes how to change that setting.

Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3. Pin-outs for
the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are listed in Table 3-2.

The default analog output voltage setting of the M200E is 0 - 5 VDC with a range of
0-500 ppb. To change these settings, see Sections 6.5 and 6.7.3.

044100102 Rev A 17
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 3-2: Analog Output Pin-Outs

Pin Analog Output Data Type Voltage Signal Current Signal

1 A1 NOX V Out I Out +
2 Ground I Out -
3 A2 NO V Out I Out +
4 Ground I Out -
5 A3 NO2 V Out I Out +
6 Ground I Out -
7 A4 Test Channel V Out not available
8 Ground not available

If you wish to utilize the analyzer’s status outputs to interface with a device that accepts
logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controller (PLC) chips, you can access
them through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS.

STATUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
EMITTER BUS
FOR PINS 1-8
SYSTEM OK

CONC VALID

HIGH RANGE

DIAGNOSTIC
MODE
LOW SPAN
ZERO CAL

SPAN CAL

Figure 3-8: Status Output Connector

Table 3-3: Status Output Signals

Pin # Status Condition (ON = Conducting)

1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present.
2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement (NO, NO2 or NOx) is valid.
OFF any time the hold-off feature is active.
3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of the Auto Range Mode.
4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO point calibration mode.
5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN point calibration mode.
6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in diagnostic mode.
7 Unused
8 Unused
D EMITTER BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are tied together.
Unused
+ DC POWER + 5 VDC, 300 mA (combined rating with Control Output, if used).
Digital The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies
Ground

18 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes,
several digital control inputs are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN
on the analyzer’s rear panel.

There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from
the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an
external 5 VDC power supply should be used.

CONTROL IN CONTROL IN

A B C D E F U + A B C D E F U +
ZERO CAL

ZERO CAL
LOW SPAN

LOW SPAN
SPAN CAL

SPAN CAL
5 VDC Power
- Supply +
Local Power Connections External Power Connections

Figure 3-9: Control Input Connector

Table 3-4: Control Input Signals

Input # Status Definition ON Condition

A The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field
REMOTE ZERO CAL
of the display will read ZERO CAL R.
B The analyzer is placed in low span calibration mode as part of
REMOTE
performing a low span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of
LO SPAN CAL
the display will read LO CAL R.
C REMOTE The analyzer is placed in Span Calibration mode. The mode field
SPAN CAL of the display will read SPAN CAL R.
D SPARE
E SPARE
F SPARE

The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies

Digital Ground
(same as chassis ground).

U External Power
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A - F.
input
+ 5 VDC output Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A - F,
place a jumper between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum
amperage through this port is 300 mA (combined with the
analog output supply, if used).

If you wish to utilize one of the analyzer’s two serial ports, attach the serial cable that is
included with the analyzer to the COM1 serial port on the rear panel. Connect the other end

044100102 Rev A 19
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

to a serial port on your computer and set the computer serial port to 115000 baud transfer
speed, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and Xon/Xoff flow control. Use the APICOM remote
control software that was included with the analyzer to connect to the instrument or use
any terminal emulation program. Refer to Section 6.9 of this manual for instructions on
configuration and usage of the serial port, Section 6.11 for remote operation of the
analyzer.

3.4.3. Ethernet Connection and Configuration

If your M200E is equipped with an Ethernet option (described in Section 5.7.3), the
analyzer needs to be configured to match the network settings of your internal network.
Please change the first three of the following parameters to configure the Ethernet
functionality:

• (IP) A static IP address (default value is 000.000.000.000).

• (GTWY) A static network gateway IP address (default value is
000.000.000.000).
• (SNET) A subnet mask (default is 255.255.255.0).
• (PORT) A TCP/IP port number (default is 3000, does not need to be changed).
Note that the M200E currently does not support DHCP or dynamic IP addresses. All of the
above settings can be changed by following the procedure described in Section 6.9.9 of this
manual. To do this quickly, press the following keys on the analyzer’s front panel: SETUP
– MORE – COMM – INET and configure the individual items shown on the menu and listed
above.

3.5. Initial Operation

If you are unfamiliar with the theory of operation of the M200E analyzer, we recommend
that you read Chapter 10 before proceeding. For information on navigating the analyzer’s
software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A.1.

3.5.1. Startup
After electrical and pneumatic connections are made, turn on the instrument and supply
power to the external pump. The exhaust and PMT cooler fans should start. The display
should immediately display a single, horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display.
This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system. Once the
CPU has completed this activity, it will begin loading the analyzer firmware and configura-
tion data. During this process, a string of messages will appear on the analyzer’s front panel
display as shown in Figure 3-10. The analyzer should automatically switch to SAMPLE
mode after completing the boot-up sequence and start monitoring NOX, NO, NO2 gases.

20 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

SELECT DESIRED FUNCTION : 3 System waits 3 seconds then

automatically begins its initialization
START . routine. No action required.

CHECKING FLASH STATUS : 1 System is checking the format of

the instrument’s flash memory chip.

STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE : 1 If at this point,

**FLASH FORMAT INVALID**
appears, contact T–API customer
service

STARTING INSTRUMENT W/FLASH : 1 The instrument is loading

configuration and calibration data
from the flash chip

M200E NOX ANALYZER The instrument is loading the

analyzer firmware.
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXX 50%_ _ _ _ _]

SOFTWARE REVISION C.4 The revision level of the firmware

installed in your analyzer is briefly
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXXXXX 80% _ _] displayed

SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX=X.X

Firmware
TEST CAL CLR SETUP
fully booted

Press CLR to clear initial warning messages.

(see Section 3.2.3)

Figure 3-10: Front Panel Display During Startup Sequence

3.5.2. Warm-Up
The M200E requires about 30 minutes warm-up time before reliable NOX, NO and NO2
measurements can be taken. During that time, various portions of the instrument’s front
panel will behave as follows. See Figure 3-4 for locations.

Table 3-5: Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up

Name Color Behavior Significance

Concentra- Switches between
N/A This is normal operation.
tion Field NOX, NO and NO2
Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the
Displays blinking
Mode Field N/A process of warming up (hold-off period is
“SAMPLE”
active).
STATUS LEDs
Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel
Sample Green On
display is continuously updated.
Cal Yellow Off The instrument’s calibration is not enabled.
The analyzer is warming up and out of
Fault Red Blinking
specification for a fault-free reading.

3.5.3. Warning Messages

During warm-up, internal temperatures and other parameters may be outside of specified
limits. The software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up.

044100102 Rev A 21
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

The following table includes a brief description of the various warning messages that may
appear after the warm-up time. If warning messages persist after 30 minutes, investigate
their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Chapter 11. To view and clear warning
messages, use the following key strokes:

SAMPLE HVPS WARNING NOX = 0.0

TEST deactivates warning
messages TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP

SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NO = 0.0 MSG activates warning

messages.
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP <TST TST> keys replaced with
TEST key

SAMPLE HVPS WARNING NOX = 0.0 Press CLR to clear the current
message.
NOTE: TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
If more than one warning is active, the
If the warning message persists next message will take its place
after several attempts to clear it,
the message may indicate a Once the last warning has been
real problem and not an artifact Make sure warning messages are cleared, the analyzer returns to
of the warm-up period SAMPLE mode
not due to real problems.

Table 3-6: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up

Message Definition
ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument’s A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not
calibrated.
AZERO WRN XXX.X MV The reading taken during the auto-zero cycle is outside of specified limits.
The value XXX.X indicates the auto-zero reading at the time of the
warning.
BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the M200E chassis is outside the specified limits.
CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was ON
CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was ON.
CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.
CONV TEMP WARNING NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits.
DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data and settings were erased.
HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.
IZS TEMP WARNING On units with IZS options installed: The permeation tube temperature is
outside of specified limits.
OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow is outside of specified limits.
OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off, which is intentional for the warm-up period. This
is the only warning message that automatically clears itself after warmup.
PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.
RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits.
RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits.
REAR BOARD NOT DET The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SYSTEM RESET This message appears every time the analyzer was powered up.

22 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

3.5.4. Functional Check

After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the
software properly supports any hardware options that were installed.

Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters.
Appendix A and C include a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel as
well as their expected values. These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing perform-
ance problems with your analyzer (Chapter 11). The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data
Sheet (part number 04490) lists these values before the instrument left the factory. To
view the current values of these test functions press the <TST TST> keys:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX = X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

RANGE
NOX STB
SAMP FLW
Toggle <TST TST> keys to
OZONE FL
scroll through list of functions
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
HVPS
RCELL TEMP Refer to
BOX TEMP Section
PMT TEM 6.2.1 for
IZS TEMP1 definitions
MOLY TEMP of these
RCEL test
SAMP functions.
1
Only appears if IZS option is NOX SLOPE
installed. NOX OFFS
2
Only appears if analyzer is set NO SLOPE
to display NO, NO2, NOx NO OFFS
simultaneously in message NO22
field. NOX2
3
Only appears if analog autput NO2
A4 is actively reporting a test TEST3
function TIME

Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the analyzer flow diagrams without and with options
installed. Refer to these diagrams whenever troubleshooting or a thorough understanding of
the analyzer operation is required. Note that valve options for zero/span valves or IZS are
principally the same, except that the span gas stream is connected differently in the
zero/span option.

More detailed pneumatic diagrams for all configurations (base, zero/span valves, IZS,
sample dryer) can be found in Appendix D, diagram number 04574.

044100102 Rev A 23
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 3-11: M200E Pneumatic Diagram In Standard Configuration

24 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

Figure 3-12: M200E Pneumatic Diagram With Options Installed

044100102 Rev A 25
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

3.6. First Calibration

3.6.1. Basic Calibration Procedure

The initial calibration should be carried out using the 500 ppb range, a span gas with about
400 ppb NO and with the unit set for SINGLE range, which will enable you to compare your
calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation Data
Sheet. The following three-step procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any
of the available zero/span (Z/S) valve options installed. Chapter 7 contains instructions for
calibrating instruments with Z/S valve options, Chapter 8 for EPA protocol calibration.

Set the analog output range of the M200E:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU

MODE SET UNIT EXIT

Press this button to set Press this button to select the
the analyzer for SNGL concentration units of measure:
DUAL or IND ranges PPB, PPM, UGM, MGM

SETUP X.X RANGE: 500.0 CONC

0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and

To change the value of the returns to the RANGE CONTROL
reporting range span, enter the MENU.
number by pressing the key under ENTR accepts the new setting and
SETUP X.X RANGE: 500.0 Conc returns to the
each digit until the expected value
appears. RANGE CONTROL MENU.
0 0 0 5 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. If you supply NO gas to the
analyzer, the values for expected NO and NOx need to be identical.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected NO and NOx
span concentration.
M-P CAL RANGE = 500.0 PPB NO = X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC: 400.0 Conc

0 0 0 4 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The NOx & NO span concentration

values automatically default to EXIT ignores the new setting and
400.0 Conc. M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU
returns to the CONCENTRATION
To change this value to the actual MENU.
concentration of the span gas, enter NOX NO CONV EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and
the number by pressing the key returns to the
under each digit until the expected CONCENTRATION MENU..
value appears. M-P CAL NO SPAN CONC: 400.0 Conc

0 0 0 4 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

26 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Getting Started

Perform the zero/span calibration procedure:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X

Set the Display to show the
NOX STB test function.
< TST TST > CAL SETUP This function calculates the
stability of the NO/NOx
measurement

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO = X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppb.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO2= X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX= X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

Analyzer
continues to cycle
through NOx, NO, M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO = X.X Press ENTR to changes the
and NO2 OFFSET & SLOPE values for both
measurements . the NO and NOx measurements.
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.

ACTION:
Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.

The value of
NOX STB may jump
significantly.
Wait until it falls back
below 0.5 ppb.
The SPAN key now M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO2= X.X This may take several
appears during the minutes.
transition from zero to
span. < TST TST > SPAN CONC EXIT
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or Press ENTR to change the
SPAN buttons fail to OFFSET & SLOPE values for both
M-P CAL RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX = X.X
appear see Section 11 the NO and NOx measurements.
for troubleshooting tips.
< TST TST > ENTR SPAN CONC EXIT Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.

M-P CAL RANGE = 500.0 PPB 03 =

EXIT returns to the main
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT SAMPLE display

The Model 200E analyzer is now ready for operation.

3.6.2. Interferences for NOX Measurements

The chemiluminescence method for detecting NOX is subject to interference from a number
of sources including water vapor (H2O), ammonia (NH3), sulfur dioxide (SO2) and carbon
dioxide (CO2) but the Model 200E has been designed to reject most of these interferences.
Section 10.1.5 contains more detailed information on interferences.

044100102 Rev A 27
Getting Started Model 200E Instruction Manual

Ammonia is the most common interferent, which is converted to NO in the analyzer’s NO2
converter and creates a NOX signal artifact. If the Model 200E is installed in an environment
with high ammonia, steps should be taken to remove the interferent from the sample gas
before it enters the reaction cell. T-API offers a sample gas conditioning option to remove
ammonia and water vapor (Section 5.7).

Carbon dioxide diminishes the NOX signal when present in high concentrations. If the
analyzer is used in an application with excess CO2, contact T-API customer service for
possible solutions. Excess water vapor can be removed with one of the dryer options
described in Section 5.7. In ambient air applications, SO2 interference is usually negligible.

NOTE
Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out the quality
questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to T-API.
This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service
and our products. Thank you.

28 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary

4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS &

GLOSSARY

4.1. Frequently Asked Questions

The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the
Model 200E NOx Analyzer.

Q: Why is the ZERO or SPAN key not displayed during calibration?

A: The M200E disables certain keys whenever the chosen value is out of range for that
particular parameter. In this case, the expected span or zero value is too different from the
actually measured value and the instrument does not allow to span or zero to that point. If,
for example, the span set point is 400 ppb and the measurement response is only 50 ppb,
the SPAN button will not appear to prevent the user from spanning to an out-of-range
response curve. Chapter 11 describes this in detail.

Q: Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display?
A: Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of
the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00
or a range to less than 10 or more than 20000 ppb. Once you adjust the setting to an
allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.

Q: Why does the analyzer not respond to span gas?

A: There are several reasons why this can happen. Section 11.3.2 has some possible
answers to this question.

Q: Can I automate the calibration of my analyzer?

A: Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated using
the instrument’s AutoCal feature.

Q: Can I use the IZS option to calibrate the analyzer?

A: Yes. However, the accuracy of the IZS option’s permeation tube is only ±5%. Whereas
this may be acceptable for basic calibration checks, the IZS option is not permitted as a
calibration source in applications following US EPA protocols. To achieve highest accuracy, it
is recommended to use cylinders of calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air
source. T-API offers a zero air generator Model 701 and a gas dilution calibrator Model 700
for this purpose.

Q: What do I do if the concentration on the instrument's front panel display does not match
the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly
calibrated?
A: This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: (1) a difference in circuit
ground between the analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem; (2) a scale problem
with the input to the data logger. The analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually
calibrated to compensate for either or both of these effects, see Section 6.7; analog outputs
are not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade (Section 6.7.3.2).

Q: How do I measure the sample flow?

A: Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet port
when the instrument is operating. The sample flow should be 500 cm³/min ±10%.
Chapter 11 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the sample gas flow.

044100102 Rev A 29
Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary Model 200E Instruction Manual

Q: How often do I need to change the particulate filter?

A: Once per week. Table 9-1 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most important,
regular maintenance tasks. Highly polluted sample air may require more frequent changes.

Q: How long does the sample pump last?

A: The sample pump should last one to two years and the pump head should be replaced
when necessary. Use the RCEL pressure indicator on the front panel to see if the pump
needs replacement. If this value goes above 10 in-Hg-A, on average, the pump head needs
to be rebuild.

Q: Do I need a strip chart recorder or external data logger?

A: No, the M200E is equipped with a very powerful internal data acquisition system (iDAS).
Section 6.9.10 describes the setup and operation in detail.

Q: Why does my RS-232 serial connection not work?

A: There are many possible reasons: 1) the wrong cable, please use the provided or a
generic “straight-through” cable (do not use a “null-modem” type cable), 2) The DCE/DTE
switch on the back of the analyzer is not set properly; make sure that both green and red
lights are on, 3) the baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does not match that of the serial
port of your computer/data logger. See Section 11.5.11 more trouble-shooting information.

4.2. Glossary
Acronym – A short form or abbreviation for a longer term. Often artificially made up of the
first letters of the phrase’s words.

APICOM – Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers

ASSY - Acronym for Assembly.

Chemical formulas used in this document:

• NOX – nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2

• NO – nitric oxide
• NO2 – nitrogen dioxide
• NOY – nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen, the sum of NO, NO2 (NOX) plus
other compounds such as HNO3. Definitions vary widely and may include nitrate
(NO3-), PAN, N2O and other compounds.
• NH3 – ammonia
• H2O – water vapor
• CO2 – carbon dioxide
• SO2 – sulfur dioxide
• HNO3 – nitric acid
DAS - Acronym for Data Acquisition System, the old acronym of iDAS

DIAG - Acronym for diagnostics, the diagnostic menu or settings of the analyzer

DOC – Acronym for Disk On Chip, the analyzer’s central storage area for analyzer operating
system, firmware, and data. This is a solid state device (! IC) without mechanical, moving

30 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary

parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive under ! DOS with disk drive label “C”. DOC
chips come with 8 mb space in the E-series analyzer standard configuration but are
available in larger sizes

DOS - Disk Operating System, the operating system underlying the M200E firmware. The E-
series analyzers use DR DOS.

EEPROM - Also referred to as a FLASH chip. Used to store the analyzer configuration and
internally labeled and handled as “disk drive B:”

FEP - Acronym for Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that
du Pont markets as Teflon® (along with !PFA and !PTFE).

FLASH - Flash PFA is used as tubing material in the M200E.memory is non-volatile, solid-
state memory

I2C bus – read: I-square-C bus. A serial, clocked serial bus for communication between
individual analyzer components

IC – Acronym for Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain
many basic components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized
package used in electronic assemblies.

iDAS - Acronym for Internal Data Acquisition System, previously referred to as DAS.

LED - Acronym for Light Emitting Diode.

PCA - Acronym for Printed Circuit Assembly, this is the ! PCB with electronic components
installed and ready to use

PCB - Acronym for printed circuit board, the bare circuit board without components

PLC – Acronym for programmable logic controller, a device that is used to control
instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer

PFA – Acronym for Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer. One of the polymers that du Pont
markets as Teflon® (along with !FEP and !PTFE).

PTFE – Acronym for Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to

handle gases that may react on other surfaces. One of the polymers that du Pont markets
as Teflon® (along with !PFA and !FEP). PTFE is used as the material for the ozone air filter
as well as the sample gas filter.

PVC – Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing in the
M200E.

RS-232 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port

RS-485 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port

TCP/IP - Acronym for Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communi-
cations protocol for Ethernet devices and the Internet

VARS - Acronym for variables, the variables menu or settings of the analyzer

044100102 Rev A 31
Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

32 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software

5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

This section includes a descriptions of the hardware and software options available for the
Model 200E Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer. For assistance with ordering these options please
contact the sales department of Teledyne - Advanced Pollution Instruments at:

TOLL-FREE: 800-324-5190
TEL: +1 858-657-9800
FAX: +1 858-657-9816
E-MAIL: [email protected]
WEB SITE: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

5.1. External Pumps (Option 10)

The M200E comes equipped with an external pump specified upon ordering. Whereas the
analyzer can be re-configured for other voltages, operation at other than the original
voltage/frequency may require a different external pump. A variety of external pumps are
available for the M200E series analyzers. The range of available pump options meets all
typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting the same pneumatic performance.

T-API Part No. Description

009810300 External pump for 115 VAC / 60 Hz power supply
009810400 External pump for 230 VAC / 50 Hz power supply
009810500 External pump for 110 VAC / 50 Hz power supply
009810600 External pump for 100 VAC / 50 Hz power supply
009810700 External pump for 220-240 VAC / 50-60 Hz power supply

5.2. Rack Mount Kits (Options 20-23)

There are several options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks.

Option Number Description

OPT 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in. chassis slides.
OPT 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in. chassis slides.
OPT 21 Rack mount brackets only
OPT 23 Rack mount for external pump (no slides).

5.3. Current Loop Analog Outputs (Option 41)

This option adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog
outputs. This option may be ordered separately for the first three of the analog outputs and
can be installed at the factory or added later. Call T-API sales for pricing and availability.

The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA (for
example 0-20, 2-20 or 4-20 mA). Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can
be found in Section 6.7.6.

044100102 Rev A 33
Optional Hardware and Software Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 5-1: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard

5.4. Particulate Filter Kit (Option 42A)

This option includes a one-year supply of 50 replacement, Teflon membrane, particulate
filters, 47 mm in diameter, 1 micrometer pore size.

5.5. Calibration Valve Options

5.5.1. Zero/Span Valves (Option 50)

The Model 200E NOx analyzer can be equipped with a zero/span valve option for controlling
the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources. This option contains two
solenoid valves located inside the analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero, span or
sample gas to the instrument’s sensor. The user can control these valves from the front
panel keyboard either manually or by activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features
(Section 7.8). The valves may also be opened and closed remotely through the serial ports
(Section 6.9) or through the external, digital control inputs (Section 6.8).

This option also includes a two-stage, external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all
NO and NO2 from the zero air source (ambient air). The scrubber is filled with 50% Purafil
Chemisorbant® (for conversion of NO to NO2) and 50% activated charcoal (for removal of
NO2). This assembly also includes a small particle filter to prevent scrubber particles to
enter the analyzer as well as two more rear panel fittings so each gas can enter the
analyzer separately.

Figure 3-12 shows the internal, pneumatic connections for a Model 200E with the zero/span
valve option installed. Table 5-1 describes the state of each valve during the analyzer’s
various operational modes.

34 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software

Table 5-1: IZS or Z/S Valve States

Mode Valve Condition Valve Port Connection

NO = normally open port
NC = normally closed port
COM = common port
SAMPLE Sample/Cal Open to sample gas inlet NO ! COM
Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet NO ! COM
ZERO CAL Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated) NC ! COM
Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet NO ! COM
SPAN CAL Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated) NC ! COM
Zero/Span Open to span gas inlet / IZS gas (activated) NC ! COM

The state of the IZS valves can also be controlled:

• Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located
under the DIAG Menu (Section 6.8.1),
• By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 7.8),
• Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.9), or
• Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 6.9.10).
Sources of zero and span gas flow must be capable of supplying at least 600 cm3/min as
the analyzer draws about 500±50 cm³/min into the instrument. Both supply lines should be
vented outside of the analyzer’s enclosure. In order to prevent back-diffusion and pressure
drop effects, these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length.

5.5.2. Internal Zero/Span (IZS) (Option 51)

The M200E can be equipped with an internal zero air and span gas generator system (IZS).
This option includes a heated enclosure for a NO2 permeation tube, an external scrubber for
producing zero air and two valves for switching between the sample gas inlet and the
output of the zero/span subsystem, functionally identical to the zero/span valve option.

The IZS option includes a two stage, external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all
NO & NO2 from the zero air source. The scrubber is filled with 50% Purafil Chemisorbant®
(for conversion of NO to NO2) and 50% activated charcoal (for removal of NO2). This
assembly also includes a small particle filter.

Span gas is created by passing zero air over a NO2 permeation tube. This tube contains
liquid NO2, which slowly permeates through a permeable membrane into the surrounding
air. The concentration of the NO2 span gas is determined by three factors:

• Size of the membrane: The larger the area of the membrane, the more permeation
occurs.
• Temperature of the NO2: Increasing the temperature of the permeation tube
increases the pressure inside the tube and therefore increases the rate of
permeation.

044100102 Rev A 35
Optional Hardware and Software Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Flow rate of the zero air: If the previous two variables are constant, the permeation
rate of the NO2 into the zero air stream will be constant. Therefore, a lower flow rate
of zero air produces higher concentrations of NO2.
In order to keep the permeation rate constant, the IZS enclosure is heated by a PID
(Proportional/Integral/Derivative) temperature control loop to a constant 50° C (10° above
the maximum operating temperature of the instrument). A thermistor measures the actual
temperature and reports it to the CPU for control feedback. The flow rate across the IZS
oven is controlled with a critical flow orifice to 60±5 cm³/min.

Please note, that the IZS option does not contain the actual permeation tube, which needs
to be ordered separately. See next option for description.

CAUTION
Gas flow must be maintained at all times for units with a permeation tube
installed. Insufficient gas flow allows NO2 gas to build up to levels that will
severely contaminate the instrument.

Figure 3-12 shows the internal pneumatic connections for a Model 200E with IZS option
installed. Table 5-1 shows the operational state of the valves associated with the IZS option
during the analyzer’s various operational modes. SPAN gas on the zero/span valve option is
equivalent with the permeation tube NO2 gas stream on the IZS option.

The state of the IZS valves can also be controlled:

• Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located
under the DIAG Menu (Section 6.8.1),
• By activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features (Section 7.8),
• Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.9), or
• Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 6.9.10).

5.5.3. IZS Permeation Tubes (Options 53 & 55)

One IZS permeation tube is necessary to operate the IZS option (Option 51). Two different
NO2 permeation tubes are available, they are identical in size and shape but are designed to
have different permeation rates.

Table 5-2: Available Permeation Source Options

Option Permeation Rate Approximate NO2

(± 25%) Concentration
OPT 53 421 ng/min 300 - 500 ppb
OPT 55 842 ng/min 600 - 1000 ppb

Each tube is shipped with a calibration certificate, traceable to a NIST standard, specifying
its actual NO2 permeation rate to within ±5%. The calibration is performed at a tube
temperature of 50°C and a flow rate of 0.56 liters per minute.

36 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software

5.6. Scrubbers and Expendables

5.6.1. Charcoal Scrubber (Option 64A)

This kit includes a charcoal scrubber cartridge, which is used to remove NO2 from an
exhaust port. Applications include, but are not limited to, the removal of NO2 from the
pump exhaust if that exhaust cannot be vented outside the analyzer shelter or if the vent
line is not far enough away from the analyzer inlet port (in which case the exhaust would be
measured again by the analyzer). The kit does not include any mounting clips, filters or
tubing. To order a refill for this cartridge, specify the refill kit listed below.

Older models of the nitrogen oxides analyzer used this type of charcoal scrubber to remove
both NO2 and excess ozone from the exhaust. However, we do not recommend this
particular application because of the potentially explosive nature of the mixture.

5.6.2. Charcoal Refill Kit (Part# 00596)

This refill kit contains two plastic bottles with a total of 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) charcoal, which
lasts for about five refills of Option 64A.

5.6.3. Zero Air Scrubber (Option 64B)

This kit includes a zero air scrubber cartridge, which can be used to produce and supply
zero air to the analyzer’s ZERO inlet port. The cartridge mounts to the outside rear panel by
means of two rubberized clips and contains two chemicals, 50% volume of Purafil Chemi-
sorbant to convert NO to NO2, followed 50% volume of charcoal to absorb NO2.

The zero air scrubber exit contains a particle filter that retains any dust coming from the
cartridge and connects with a 0.25” PVC tubing to the ZERO inlet port. The chemicals need
to be exchanged periodically (use Option 43) to prevent saturation and break-through of
NOX into the zero air stream. This kit is recommended if no other zero air source is available
and if the analyzer is equipped with the zero/span valve option (Section 5.5.1). The kit is
included in the IZS option but not in the zero/span valve option.

5.6.4. Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit (Option 43)

This kit includes the items needed to refurbish the external zero air scrubber.

Table 5-3: Contents of Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit

T-API Part No. Description

005960000 Activated charcoal refill
059700000 Purafil Chemisorbant® refill
1
FL0000001 Sintered filter for critical orifice port
FL0000003 Replacement particulate filter for zero air inlet fitting
1
OR0000001 O-Ring (qty:2) for critical orifice port
1 These items are required for units with IZS option only. They are used for rebuilding the
IZS-exhaust critical flow orifice on the analyzer’s exhaust manifold.

044100102 Rev A 37
Optional Hardware and Software Model 200E Instruction Manual

5.6.5. M200E Expendables Kit (Option 42)

This kit includes a recommended set of expendables for one year of operation of the M200E.
See Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents.

5.6.6. M200E Spare Parts Kit (Option 43)

This kit includes a recommended set of spare parts for 2-3 years of operation of the M200E.
It includes items such as the orifice holder, a spare PMT and other items that are
recommended as backups to minimize down-time in case of component failures. See
Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents.

5.7. Communication Options

5.7.1. RS232 Modem Cables (Options 60 and 60A)

The analyzer is shipped with a standard, shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of
about 1.8 m length, which should fit most computers of recent build. An additional cable of
this type can be ordered as Option 60.

Option 60A consists of a shielded, straight-through serial cable of about 1.8 m length to
connect the analyzer’s COM1 port to a computer, a code activated switch or any other
communications device that is equipped with a DB-25 female connector. The cable is
terminated with one DB-9 female connector and one DB-25 male connector. The DB-9
connector fits the analyzer’s COM1 port.

5.7.2. RS-232 Multidrop (Option 62)

The multidrop option is used with any of the RS-232 serial ports to enable communications
of several analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables. The option
consists of a small box, which can be attached to the analyzer, with a termination switch, a
power connector and two serial ports, one incoming from the analyzer (cable supplied) and
one outgoing port to the next analyzer’s multi-drop box (requires additional cable
Option 60). One Option 62 is required per analyzer. The first incoming port on the first box
connects to the host computer and the outgoing port on the last multi-drop box needs to be
terminated. Setup and user instructions are covered in the T-API Multidrop Manual, part
number 021790000, available for download from the company website.

5.7.3. Ethernet (Option 63)

The Ethernet option allows the analyzer to be connected to any 10BaseT local area network.
When installed, this option is electronically connected to the instrument’s COM2 serial port
making that port no longer available for RS-232/RS-485 communications through the COM2
connector on the rear panel. The option consists of a T-API designed Ethernet card
(Figure 5-2), which is mechanically attached to the instrument’s rear panel. A 2 m long,
CAT-5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ-45 connectors is included as
well (part number WR0000067). Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS-232
port to 115.2 kbaud. See Section 6.9.9 for configuration.

38 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software

Figure 5-2: M200E Ethernet Card and Rear Panel With Ethernet Installed

5.8. Sample Gas Conditioners (Options 86 & 88)

Several permeation devices using Nafion® permeation gas exchange tubes are available for
applications with high moisture and/or moderate levels of NH3 in the sample gas. This type
of sample conditioner is part of the standard M200E equipment to remove H2O and NH3
from the ozone generator supply gas stream but can be purchased for the sample gas
stream as well. All gas conditioners remove water vapor to a dew point of about –20° C
(~600 ppm H2O) and effectively remove concentrations of ammonia up to about 1 ppm.
More information about these dryers and their performance is available at
http://www.permapure.com/.

The following options include the hardware required to install the dryers.

Table 5-4: Dryer and NH3 Removal Options

Option Number Description

Standard Equipment Single gas conditioner (dryer / NH3 removal) for ozone generator supply gas
stream only. Includes mounting bracket for two dryers (Option 86 mounts on
the back).
OPT 86 Single gas conditioner (dryer / NH3 removal) for sample gas stream only.
Mounts on the back of the existing dryer bracket. Converts analyzer to dual-
conditioner instrument.
OPT 88 Single combination gas conditioner (dryer / NH3 removal) for both the
sample gas and ozone supply air. Replaces the standard dryer for O3 air and
comes with mounting bracket.

The combination conditioner is a low-cost option for drying both the sample gas and ozone
supply air with one dryer. However, this dryer can only be used in applications where both
sample and calibration gases (after dilution) are at or near ambient and constant concen-
trations of oxygen (about 20%), because the ozone generator needs a high and constant
amount of oxygen to generate ozone properly. Stack applications or industrial applications

044100102 Rev A 39
Optional Hardware and Software Model 200E Instruction Manual

in which the sample gas has a significantly reduced or highly variable concentration of
oxygen need to use the separate dryer option 86. The combination conditioner needs to be
specified upon ordering the analyzer.

5.9. Manual on CD (Part number 044100200)

This operators manual is also available on CD. The electronic document is stored in Adobe
Systems Inc. Portable Document Format (PDF) and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader®
software, which can be downloaded for free at http://www.adobe.com/

The PDF version of the manual has many advantages:

• Fully searchable text.

• Hypertext links for figures, tables, table of contents and embedded references for
quick access of individual manual portions.
• A list of thumbnails, chapters and sections displayed at the left of the text, all linked
to their respective location.
• Internet links embedded in the manual will open the corresponding web sites in an
internet browser (requires an internet connection).

5.10. Extended Warranty (Options 92 & 93)

Two options are available for extending the standard manufacturer’s warranty
(Section 2.3). Both options have to be specified upon ordering the analyzer.

Option Number Description

Extends warranty to cover a two (2) year period from the
OPT 92
date of purchase.
Extends warranty to cover a five (5) year period from the
OPT 93
date of purchase.

40 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in
Appendix A of this manual along with an index of software commands and references to the
respective manual sections.

NOTE
The flow charts appearing in this section contain typical representations of the
analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These
representations may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.

6.1. Overview of Operating Modes

The M200E software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer will be
operating in SAMPLE mode, in which sample gases are measured and a continuous read-
out of the gas concentration is displayed. Test and warning functions can be examined and
data can be viewed or downloaded.

Table 6-1: Analyzer Operating modes

Mode Explanation
SAMPLE Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.
M-P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by
pressing the CAL key.
SETUP X.#2 SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas measurement
will continue during this process.
SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated.
1
ZERO CAL M Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user.
1
ZERO CAL A Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the
AUTOCAL feature.
ZERO CAL R1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the
COM ports or digital control inputs.
LO CAL A Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated automatically by
the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.
LO CAL R Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely through
the COM ports or digital control inputs.
SPAN CAL M1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.
1
SPAN CAL A Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s
AUTOCAL feature.
SPAN CAL R1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports
or digital control inputs.
DIAG One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (Section 6.8).
1
Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.
2
The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP C.4.

044100102 Rev A 41
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

The second operating mode is the SETUP mode. This mode is used for configuring various
features and functions of the analyzer, such as the iDAS system, the analog output ranges,
or the COM port settings. The SETUP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic
tests during troubleshooting.

The third operating mode is the CAL mode, which allows calibration of the analyzer in
various ways. Because of its importance, this mode is described separately in Chapter 7.
The mode field (upper left corner) of the front panel display indicates the current operating
mode (refer to Figure 3-4 for front panel features). In addition to the three main modes,
there are mode variations, which are summarized in Table 6-1.

6.2. Sample Mode

This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode, the instrument is analyzing
NO and NOX and calculating NO2 concentrations.

6.2.1. Test Functions

A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE
mode. These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the
instrument and are useful during troubleshooting (Section 11.1). They can also be recorded
in one of the iDAS channels (Section 6.10.1.1) for data analysis. To view the test functions,
press one of the <TST TST> keys repeatedly in either direction.

NOTE
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-
range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it.

NOTE
All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure.
Absolute, atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1
in-Hg per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and
passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.

42 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

Table 6-2: Test Functions Defined

Display Parameter Units Description

The full scale limit to which the analyzer’s analog outputs are
currently set. This is not the physical range of the instrument. If
PPB, PPM,
RANGE RANGE the Auto range mode has been selected, two RANGE functions
UGM, MGM
will appear. If the IND (independent) range mode has been
selected, three RANGE functions will appear:
The stability is a standard deviation of the NOX concentration
PPB, PPM,
NOX STB STABILITY over 25 samples, each recorded every 10 seconds. A low nox
UGM, MGM
stb value indicates low variability in NOX.
cm³/min The flow rate of the sample gas through the reaction cell. This
SAMP FLW SAMPLE FLOW
(cc/m) value is not measured but calculated from the sample pressure.
cm³/min
OZONE FL OZONE FLOW Flow rate of the O3 gas stream as measured with a flow meter
(cc/m)
PMT PMT Signal MV The raw output voltage of the PMT.
NORM NORMALIZED The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for auto-zero
MV
PMT PMT Signal offset and temperature/pressure compensation (if activated).
The PMT signal with zero NOX, which is usually slightly different
AZERO AUTO-ZERO MV from 0 V. This offset is subtracted from the PMT signal and
adjusts for variations in the zero signal.
HVPS HVPS V The PMT high voltage power supply.
RCELL REACTION CELL
°C The current temperature of the reaction cell.
TEMP TEMP
BOX
BOX TEMP °C The ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case.
TEMPERATURE
PMT
PMT TEMP °C The current temperature of the PMT.
TEMPERATURE
IZS The current temperature of the internal zero/span option. Only
IZS TEMP °C
TEMPERATURE1 appears when IZS option is enabled.
MOLY CONV
°C The current temperature of the NO2 converter.
TEMP TEMPERATURE
The current gas pressure of the reaction cell as measured at the
REACTION CELL
RCEL in-Hg-A vacuum manifold. This is the vacuum pressure created by the
PRESSURE
external pump.
SAMPLE The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the reaction
SAMP in-Hg-A
PRESSURE cell, measured between the NO/NOx and Auto-Zero valves.
NOX The slope of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a
NOx SLOPE --
SLOPE linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.
The offset of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a
NOX OFFS NOx OFFSET MV
linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.
The slope of the current NO calibration as calculated from a
NO SLOPE NO SLOPE --
linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.
The offset of the current NO calibration as calculated from a
NO OFFS NO OFFSET MV
linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.
NO2 PPB, PPM,
NO2 The current NO2 concentration in the chosen unit.
concentration UGM, MGM
NOx PPB, PPM,
NOX The current NOx concentration in the chosen unit.
concentration UGM, MGM
PPB, PPM,
NO NO concentration The current NO concentration in the chosen unit.
UGM, MGM
TEST TEST SIGNAL2 MV Signal of a user-defined test function on output channel A4.
TIME CLOCK TIME hh:mm:ss The current day time for iDAS records and calibration events.

044100102 Rev A 43
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.2.2. Warning Messages

The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s front
panel and through the COM ports. Section 11.1 explains how to use these messages to
troubleshoot problems. Section 3.5.3 shows how to view and clear warning messages.
Table 6-3 lists all warning messages of firmware C.4.

Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages Revision C.4

Message Meaning
ANALOG CAL The instruments analog-to-digital converter (A/D) circuitry or one of the
WARNING analog outputs are not calibrated.
The reading taken during the Auto-zero cycle is outside the specified limits.
AZERO WRN XXX.X MV The value shown here as “XXX.X” indicates the actual auto-zero reading at
the time of the warning.
BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the M200E chassis is outside the specified limits.
CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was ON.
CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was ON.
CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or was erased.
CONV TEMP WARNING NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits.
DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data storage was erased.
HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.
On units with IZS option installed: The IZS temperature is outside of
IZS TEMP WARNING
specified limits.
OZONE FLOW Ozone flow is outside of specified limits.
WARNING
Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that automatically
OZONE GEN OFF
clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on.
PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.
RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits.
RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits.
REAR BOARD NOT DET The firmware is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SYSTEM RESET The computer rebooted or was powered up.

6.2.3. Calibration Functions

Pressing the CAL key switches the M200E into calibration mode. In this mode, the user can
calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases.

If the instrument includes either the zero/span valve option or IZS option, the display will
also include CALZ and CALS keys. Pressing either of these keys also puts the instrument
into multipoint calibration mode.

The CALZ key is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point.

44 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

The CALS key is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is recommended that
this span calibration is about 80-90% of full scale of the analyzer’s operating range.

Chapter 7 details all calibration operations, Chapter 1 describes the zero/span valve and
IZS options.

6.3. Calibration Mode

Owing to its importance, calibration is described separately in Chapter 7, EPA protocol
calibration in Chapter 8.

6.4. Setup Mode

The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s
hardware and software features and to read or configure the internal data acquisition
system (iDAS). For a visual representation of the software menu trees, refer to
Appendix A-1.

NOTE
Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR Key is pressed

If the EXIT key is pressed before the ENTR key, the analyzer will beep, alerting the user
that the newly entered value has not been accepted.

Some of the functions of the SETUP mode are described in separate sections following this
section. In particular, the RNGE function can be found in Section 6.5, the ACAL function in
Section 7.8.

6.4.1. Password (PASS)

The M200E provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent
unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu
item, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password-protected
function is requested.

There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance,
and configuration functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous
level.

Table 6-4: Password Levels

Password Level Menu Access Allowed

No password Operator TEST, MSG, CLR
101 Maintenance CAL, CALZ, CALS
818 Configuration SETUP, VARS, DIAG

044100102 Rev A 45
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

To enable or disable passwords, press the following keystroke sequence:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOx =XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU Exit returns to

SAMPLE
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT display

SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT Disable

or enable
passwords
SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: ON

ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: ON ENTR enables

the password
feature
ON ENTR EXIT

Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following keypad sequence would be required to
enter the SETUP menu:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX =XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

prompts for SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS: 0

password
number
0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

Example: this
Press individual SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
password enables the
keys to set
SETUP mode
numbers 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

Note that the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG
menus, even if passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon
entering these menus. The user only has to press ENTR to access the password protected
menus but does not have to enter the required number code.

46 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.4.2. Configuration Information (CFG)

Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information. This display lists
the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, operating
system and other information. Use this information to identify the software and hardware
when contacting customer service. Special instrument or software features or installed
options may also be listed here.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SAMPLE PRIMARY SETUP MENU Press EXIT at

any time to
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT return to the
SAMPLE display

SAMPLE M200E NOX ANALYZER Press EXIT at

any time to
NEXT PREV EXIT return to
SETUP menu

Press NEXT of PREV to move through the

list of configuration information.

6.4.3. Clock (CLK)

The M200E has a built-in clock for the AutoCal timer, Time TEST function, and time stamps
on COM port messages and iDAS data entries. To set the time-of-day, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

Enter Current Enter Current
Time-of-Day Date-of-Year
TIME DATE EXIT

SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00 SETUP X.X DATE: 01-JAN-02

1 2 :0 0 ENTR EXIT 0 1 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X3 TIME: 12:00 SETUP X.X DATE: 01-JAN-02

1 2 :0 0 ENTR EXIT 0 1 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

TIME DATE EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU EXIT returns

to the main
SAMPLE display
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

044100102 Rev A 47
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow, there is a variable to speed
up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day. To change this variable, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX =XXX.X SETUPX.X 1 )TPC_ENABLE= ON

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

Continue to press NEXT until …
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X 8) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Day

SETUP X.X ENTER VARS PASS: 818
+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Enter sign and number of seconds per

day the clock gains (-) or loses (+).

SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes SETUP X.X 8) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

3x EXIT returns
to the main SAMPLE display

6.5. Setup - Range Configuration (RNGE)

The analyzer has four analog output signals, accessible through a connector on the rear
panel.

ANALOG OUT
A1 A2 A3 A4
+ - + - + - + -

Figure 6-1: Analog Output Connector Key

All of these outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale
outputs of 0.1 V, 1V, 5V or 10V. Additionally A1, A2 andA3 may be equipped with optional
0-20 mA current loop drivers and configured for any current output within that range
(e.g. 0-20, 2-20, 4-20, etc.).

Channels A1, A2 and A3 report analog signals that are proportional to the NOx, NO and
NO2 concentrations of the sample gas, respectively. Analog output voltage or current can be
scaled independently. Here is one configuration example for independent ranges:

48 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

A1 OUTPUT (NOx): Output Signal = 0-5 V

A2 OUTPUT (NO): Output Signal = 4-20 mA (with current loop option)

A3 OUTPUT(NO2): Output Signal = 0 - 1 V

Output A4 can be set by the user to report one of many of the parameters accessible
through the <TST> keys of the unit’s SAMPLE mode display. A4 is not available for the
current loop option.

6.5.1. Physical and Analog Output Ranges

Functionally, the model 200E NOx analyzer has two physical ranges for determining NOx, NO
and NO2 concentrations. The difference between the two physical ranges is the resolution of
the output signals from the preamplifier board. Internally, the analyzer’s signal resolution is
about 16-bit or 72000 counts per 5 V PMT signal. The low range spans 0 to 2000 ppb NOX
(2000 ppb = 5 V) whereas the high range spans 0-20000 ppb NOX (20000 ppb = 5 V). Both
ranges need to be calibrated independently to the same span gases in order to allow
switching back and forth between high and low ranges. Once properly calibrated, the
analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations between 0 and 20000 ppb,
regardless of the selected analog range. To switch between physical ranges, the user has to
specify an appropriate analog output range from the front panel. Any analog range between
0 and 2000 ppb will cause the analyzer to remain in the low physical range. Any upper
analog range limit between 2001 and 20000 ppb will cause the instrument to operate in its
high physical range.

For applications using chart recorders or other analog recording devices, such a wide range
can usually not be resolved on the output. For example, in an application where the
expected concentrations of NO, NO2 and NOx are typically less than 500 ppb, the full scale
of expected values is only 0.25% of the instrument’s 20000 ppb physical range. The
corresponding output signal would then only be recorded across 0.25% of the range of the
recording device.

The M200E solves this problem by allowing the user to select a reporting range for the
analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range that covers the specific
application. Note that only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled, the physical
ranges of the analyzer remain unaltered with the exception of the 2000/2001 ppb split. This
increases the reliability and accuracy of the analyzer by avoiding additional gain-amplifica-
tion circuitry. If properly calibrated, both the iDAS values and the concentration values on
the front panel are also unaffected by any change in analog output ranges.

6.5.2. Reporting Range Modes

The M200E provides three analog output range modes to choose from.

• Single range mode (SNGL) sets all measured gases to the same output reporting
range.
• Independent range mode (IND) allows the reporting ranges for all gases to be
different.

044100102 Rev A 49
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Automatic range mode (AUTO) gives the analyzer the ability to report data through
a low range and high range by automatically switching into the appropriate range as
the concentrations change.
Only one of the above range modes can be active at any time. To select output range types,
use the following key sequences.

6.5.3. Single Range mode (SNGL)

The default range mode for the analyzer is single range, in which all analog concentration
outputs (usually A1, A2 and A3) are set to the same reporting range. This reporting range
can be set to any value between 100 ppb and 20000 ppb. However, the electronic signal
ranges of the analog outputs may still be configured for different values (e.g., 0-10 V and
0-0.1 V).

To select SNGLE range mode and to set the upper limit of the range, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X SETUP C.3 RANGE MODE: SNGL

< TST TST > CAL SETUP SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT

SETUP C.3 PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP C.3 RANGE CONTROL MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT MODE SET UNIT EXIT

NOTE
If a value <100.0 or
SETUP C.3 RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP C.3 RANGE: 500.0 Conc >20.000 is entered,
the ENTR key will
MODE SET UNIT EXIT disappear
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

SETUP C.3 RANGE MODE: SNGL SETUP C.3 RANGE CONTROL MENU EXIT x 2 returns
to the main
SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT MODE SET UNIT EXIT SAMPLE display

6.5.4. Independent Range Mode (IND)

The independent range mode allows the concentration outputs A1, A2 and A3 to be
configured with a different range value. In IND range mode the RANGE test function
displayed on the front panel will then be replaced by three separate functions:

• RANGE1: Range value for output A1 (NOx), e.g., 0-10 V for 0-1500 ppm NOX.
• RANGE2: Range value for output A2 (NO), e.g., 0-10 V for 0-1000 ppm NO.
• RANGE3: Range value for output A3 (NO2), e.g., 0-10 V for 0-500 ppm NO2.

50 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

Setting analog range limits to different values does not affect the instrument’s calibration.
To select the IND range mode, press the following keys:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU

MODE SET UNIT EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE MODE: SNGL

SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the

SETUP X.X RANGE MODE: IND RANGE CONTROL MENU.
ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the
SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT RANGE CONTROL MENU.

To set the range value for each independent range, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU

MODE SET UNIT EXIT

SETUP X.X NOX RANGE: 500.0 Conc

0 1 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

Press the
SETUP X.X NO RANGE: 500.0 Conc
numeral keys to
set range value
0 1 0 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the

SETUP X.X NO2 RANGE: 500.0 Conc RANGE CONTROL MENU.
ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT RANGE CONTROL MENU.

044100102 Rev A 51
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.5.5. Auto Range Mode (AUTO)

In AUTO range mode, the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two
user-defined ranges (low and high). The same low and high span settings are applied
equally to NO, NO2 and NOX readings. The unit will switch from low range to high range
when either the NO, or NOX concentration exceeds 98% of the low range span. The unit will
return from high range back to low range once both the NO and NOX concentrations fall
below 75% of the low range span.

In AUTO range mode the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced
by two separate functions:

• RANGE1: The LOW range setting for all analog outputs.

• RANGE2: The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs.
The high/low range status is also reported through the external, digital status bits
(Section 6.9.1). To set individual ranges press the following keystroke sequence.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X SETUP X.X RANGE MODE: AUTO

< TST TST > CAL SETUP SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU
EXIT x 2 returns
to the main
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT MODE SET UNIT EXIT SAMPLE display

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP X.X LOW RANGE: 500.0 Conc
Toggle the numeral
MODE SET UNIT EXIT 0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT keys to set the
LOW and HIGH
range value.
ENTR accepts the
new setting, EXIT
ignores the new
SETUP X.X RANGE MODE: SNGL SETUP X.X HIGH RANGE: 500.0 Conc
setting.

SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT 0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

NOTE
Low and high ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing the NO and
NOx concentrations. Hence, the two ranges must be calibrated independently.

6.5.6. Range Units

The M200E can display concentrations in parts per billion (109 mols per mol, PPB), parts per
million (106 mols per mol, PPM), micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3, UG) or milligrams per
cubic meter (mg/m3, MG). Changing units affects all of the display, COM port and iDAS
values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer’s range mode. To change the
concentration units:

52 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU

EXIT returns
MODE SET UNIT EXIT to the main menu.

SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: PPM

Select the preferred

concentration unit. PPM PPB UGM MGM ENTER EXIT

ENTR accepts
the new unit,
SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: UGM EXIT returns
to the SETUP
PPM PPB UGM MGM ENTER EXIT menu.

Conversion factors from volumetric to mass units used in the M200E:

NO: ppb x 1.34 = µg/m3; ppm x 1.34 = mg/m3

NO2: ppb x 2.05 = µg/m3; ppm x 2.05 = mg/m3

Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and µg/m3 use 0° C and 760 Torr as standard
temperature and pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your
agency. EPA protocol applications, for example, use 25° C as the reference temperature.
Changing the units may cause a bias in the measurements if standard temperature and
pressure other than 0°C and 760 Torr are used. This problem can be avoided by recalibrat-
ing the analyzer after any change from a volumetric to a mass unit or vice versa.

CAUTION
In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be recalibrated
after every change in reporting units.

6.5.7. Dilution Ratio

The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of
the sample gas before it enters the sample inlet. Using the dilution ratio option is a 4-step
process:

• Select concentration units: Follow the procedure in Section 6.5.6.

• Select the range: Use the procedures in Section 6.6. Make sure that the SPAN value
entered is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted calibration gas and
that the span gas is either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the
sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration. For example, with a

044100102 Rev A 53
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

dilution set to 100, a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100 ppm sample gas if
the span gas is not routed through the dilution system. On the other hand, if a
100 ppm span gas is used, it needs to pass through the same dilution steps as the
sample gas.
• Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1
part of sample gas):
SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP C.3 PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

DIL only appears SETUP C.3 RANGE CONTROL MENU

if the dilution ratio
option has been
MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT
installed

EXIT ignores the

SETUP C.3 DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN new setting.

Toggle these keys to set the dilution ENTR accepts the

0 0 0 1 .0 ENTR EXIT
factor. new setting.

This is the number by which the

analyzer will multiply the NO, NO2
and NOx concentrations of the gas SETUP C.3 DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN
passing through the reaction cell.

0 0 2 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and
displays the result.

Calibrate the analyzer. Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs to
be recalibrated using one of the methods discussed in Chapter 7.

54 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.6. Setup - Internal Variables (VARS)

The M200E has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain operational
parameters. Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware,
but can be manually re-defined using the VARS menu. Table 6-5 lists all variables that are
available within the 818 password protected level. See Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of
all of the M200E variables that are accessible through the remote interface.

Table 6-5: Variable Names (VARS) Revision C.4

Variable Description Allowed Values

DAS_HOLD_OFF Duration of no data storage in the iDAS. This is the time Can be between 0.5
when the analyzer returns from one of its calibration and 20 minutes
modes to the SAMPLE mode. The DAS_HOLD_OFF can be Default=15 min.
disabled in each iDAS channel.
TPC_ENABLE Enables or disables the temperature and pressure ON/OFF
compensation (TPC) feature (Section 10.4.3). Default=ON
DYN_ZERO Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of ON/OFF
the NO and NOX response when performing a zero point Default=OFF
calibration during an AutoCal (Chapter 7).
DYN_SPAN Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and ON/OFF
slopes of the NO and NOx response when performing a Default=OFF
zero point calibration during an AutoCal (Chapter 7).
Note that the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not
allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency.
SFLOW_SET Adjusts the displayed value of the sample flow rate to the 0-1000 cm³/min
actual flow rate, which was measured by the user. Default=
Changing this value does not alter the actual sample gas 500 cm³/min
flow rate!
OFLOW_SET Adjusts the displayed value of the ozone flow rate to its 10-1000 cm³/min
actual flow rate, which was measured by the user. Default=
Changing this value does not alter the actual ozone gas 80 cm³/min
flow rate!
IZS_SET Sets the IZS oven temperature. Increasing or decreasing 30°C - 70°C
this temperature will increase or decrease the NO2 Default= 50°C
permeation rate of the IZS source (Section 5.5.3).
CONC_PRECISION Allows to set the number of decimal points of the AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4
concentration and stability parameters displayed on the Default=AUTO
front panel.
CLOCK_ADJ Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the + -60 to +60 s/day
sign if the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock Default=0
is too fast.
CAL_ON_NO2 Allows to turn ON and OFF the ability to span the ON or OFF
analyzer with NO2, in which case the instrument acts as if Default=OFF
NO and NOX are spanned, even though it is supplied with
NO2. The NO2 concentration is then zero by default.
This feature is not permitted for EPA protocol
applications.

044100102 Rev A 55
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following key sequence:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

EXIT ignores the new setting.

SETUP X.X ENTER VARS PASS: 818
ENTR accepts the new setting.
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

SETUP X.X DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
1 5 .0 ENTR EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting

SETUP X.X 1 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X 1 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON

ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 2 ) DYN_ZERO=ON Toggle this keys to change setting

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X 2 ) DYN_ZERO=ON

ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 3) DYN_SPAN=ON Toggle this keys to change setting

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X 3 ) DYN_SPAN=ON

ON ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X 4) SFLOW_SET=500.0 cc/m

Toggle this keys to change setting

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X 5) OFLOW_SET=80.0 cc/m DO NOT change

theses set-points
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT unless
specifically
instructed to by
T-API Customer
SETUP X.X 6) IZS_SET=80.0 cc/m
Service.

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

SETUP X.X CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting

SETUP X.X 8) CAL_ON_NO2 = OFF
SETUP X.X 8) CAL_ON_NO2 = ON
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
ON ENTR EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting

56 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.7. Setup - Diagnostics (DIAG)

A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP-MORE-DIAG menu. As
these parameters are dependent on firmware revision, the menu trees are listed in detail in
Appendix A. The individual parameters, however, are explained in more detail in the
following section, indicated in Table 6-6. These tools can be used in a variety of trouble-
shooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance
and trouble-shooting sections.

Table 6-6: M200E Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions

Diagnostic Function and Meaning Front Panel Section

Mode Indicator
SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in DIAG I/O 6.7.1
the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and
heaters to be toggled ON and OFF.
ANALOG I/O: When entered, the analyzer performs an analog output DIAG AOUT 6.7.2
step test. This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the
analog output accuracy.
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: Analog input/output parameters DIAG AIO 6.7.3
are available for viewing and configuration.
TEST CHAN OUTPUT: Configures the A4 analog output channel. DIAG TCHN 6.7.2
OPTIC TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an optic test, DIAG OPTIC 6.7.5
which turns on an LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT
(Fig. 10-15). This diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without
having to supply span gas.
ELECTRICAL TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an DIAG ELEC 6.7.6
electric test, which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT
output to verify the signal handling and conditioning of the PMT
preamp board.
OZONE GEN OVERRIDE: Allows the user to manually turn the O3 DIAG OZONE 6.7.7
generator on or off. This setting is retained when exiting DIAG.
FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the gas flow DIAG FCAL 6.7.8
output signals of sample gas and ozone supply. These settings are
retained when exiting DIAG.

044100102 Rev A 57
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

To access the DIAG functions press the following keys:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

< TST TST > CAL SETUP PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT

EXIT returns SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
to the main
SAMPLE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
display CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

EXIT returns DIAG OPTIC TEST

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
to the PRIMARY
SETUP MENU PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST

From this point SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
forward, EXIT returns
to the PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SECONDARY 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP MENU

DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

DIAG SIGNAL I / O

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

6.7.1. Signal I/O

The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows to review and change the digital and analog
input/output functions of the analyzer. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the
parameters available for review under this menu.

NOTE
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O
menu is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor
calibration, which remain as entered when exiting.

58 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To enter the signal I/O test mode, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X DIAG SIGNAL I / O Use the NEXT & PREV
keys to move between
< TST TST > CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT signal types.

Use the JUMP key to

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG I / O Test Signals Displayed Here go directly to a
specific signal
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
EXIT returns available SIGNALS
to the main
SAMPLE display EXAMPLE

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG I / O JUMP TO: 5 Enter 05 to Jump
to Signal 5:
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT 0 5 ENTR EXIT (CAL_LED)

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 DIAG I / O CAL_LED = ON Exit to return
to the
= 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT DIAG menu

Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be
captured with a computer or other output device.

6.7.2. Analog Output Step Test

This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs.
The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100%
of the full scale range in 20% increments. This test is useful to verify the operation of the
data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.

To begin the Analog Output Step Test press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X DIAG SIGNAL I / O

< TST TST > CAL SETUP NEXT ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT Performs

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
analog output
0% EXIT step test.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
0% - 100%

Exit-Exit
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT returns to the
DIAG menu
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT [0%] EXIT

Pressing the key under “0%” while performing the test will
pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around
the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again
will resume the test.

044100102 Rev A 59
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.7.3. Analog I/O Configuration

Table 6-7 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the M200E.

Table 6-7: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions

Sub Menu Function

AOUTS CALIBRATED: Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a
calibration of all analog output channels.
CONC_OUT_1 Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 analog output (NOX) .
There are three options:
Range: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale
level of the output.
REC_OFS: Allows to set a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is
set to CURRent loop.
Auto_CAL: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on
this one channel only.
NOTE: Any change to RANGE or REC_OFS requires recalibration of this
output.
CONC_OUT_2 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (NO)
CONC_OUT_3 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2)
TEST OUTPUT Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 (TEST)
Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the
AIN CALIBRATED
analog to digital converter circuit on the motherboard.

To configure the analyzer’s four analog outputs, set the electronic signal type of each
channel and calibrate the outputs. This consists of:

Selecting an output type (voltage or current, if an optional current output driver has been
installed) and the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device
attached to the channel.

Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each
channel, see Sections 6.7.4 through 6.7.8.

Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal, if required (Section 6.7.5).

In its standard configuration, the analyzer’s outputs can be set for the following DC
voltages. Each range is usable from -5% to + 5% of the nominal range.

Table 6-8: Analog Output Voltage Ranges

Range Minimum Output Maximum Output

0-0.1 V -5 mV +105 mV
0-1 V -0.05 V +1.05 V
0-5 V -0.25 V +5.25 V
0-10 V -0.5 V +10.5 V
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.

60 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

The following DC current output limits apply to the current loop modules:

Table 6-9: Analog Output Current Loop Range

Range Minimum Output Maximum Output

0-20 mA 0 mA 20 mA
These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20
mA for the lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option. The
default offset for all ranges is 0 mA.

Pin assignments for the ANALOG output connector at the rear panel of the instrument:

Table 6-10: Analog Output Pin Assignments

Pin Analog VOLTAGE CURRENT

output Signal Signal
1 V Out I Out +
A1
2 Ground I Out -
3 V Out I Out +
A2
4 Ground I Out -
5 V Out I Out +
A3
6 Ground I Out -
7 V Out not available
A4
8 Ground not available

See Figure 6-1 for a visual representation and location of the analog output connector.

6.7.3.1. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection

To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel
press SETUP - MORE - DIAG - ENTR - NEXT - NEXT and then:

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

Press SET> to select the

< SET SET> CAL EXIT
analog output channel to be
configured. Press EDIT to
continue
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

Pressing ENTR records the new setting
These keys set and returns to the previous menu.
the signal level DIAG AIO OUTPUT RANGE: 5V
Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and
and type of the returns to the previous menu.
selected channel 0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT

044100102 Rev A 61
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.7.3.2. Analog Output Calibration Mode

The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or manually. In its default mode, the
instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all channels. Manual calibration should
be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the
characteristics of the recording device. Outputs configured for automatic calibration can be
calibrated as a group or individually. Analog calibration needs to be carried out on first
startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or
whenever re-calibration is required.

To calibrate the outputs as a group press SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR-NEXT-NEXT and

then the following keys:

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

Exit at any time

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
to return to the
main DIAG
menu
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

If AutoCal has been

< SET SET> CAL EXIT turned off for any
channel, the message
for that channel will be
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_1 similar to:
AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2 NOT AUTO CAL
… CONC_OUT_1
If any of the channels have AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT
not been calibrated this
message will read NO.
Exit to return to
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES the I/O
configuration
menu
< SET SET> CAL EXIT

To automatically calibrate an analog channel, press SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR-NEXT-NEXT

and then the following keys:

62 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

EXIT to Return
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT to the main
Sample Display

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

< SET> CAL EXIT

Press SET> to select the
Analog Output channel to
be configured. Then Press
EDIT to continue

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO
SET> EDIT EXIT
<SET CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV

DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT <SET CAL EXIT

To select manual output calibration for a particular channel press SETUP-MORE-DIAG-

ENTR-NEXT-NEXT and then the following keys:

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV

Exit to return to
the main
sample display PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT < SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON

< SET SET> CAL EXIT

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Press SET> to select the analog output channel to

be configured. Then press EDIT to continue
DIAG AIO AOUT AUTO CAL: ON

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL ON ENTR EXIT

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Toggles the ENTR accepts the new setting
auto cal mode and returns to the previous menu.
ON/ OFF for EXIT ignores the new setting and
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
this analog returns to the previous menu.
output channel
SET> EDIT EXIT only.

Now the analog output channels should either be automatically calibrated or they should be
set to manual calibration, which is described next.

044100102 Rev A 63
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.7.3.3. Manual Analog Output Calibration

For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated. Note
that outputs configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated manually. Calibration
is done through the instrument software with a voltmeter connected across the output
terminals (Figure 6-3). Adjustments are made using the front panel keys by setting the
zero-point first and then the span-point (Table 6-11). The software allows this adjustment
to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.

Table 6-11: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration

Full Scale Zero Tolerance Span Voltage Span Tolerance

0.1 VDC ±0.0005V 90 mV ±0.001V
1 VDC ±0.001V 900 mV ±0.001V
5 VDC ±0.002V 4500 mV ±0.003V
10 VDC ±0.004V 4500 mV ±0.006V

See Table 3-1 for

pin assignments V
of Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel
+DC Gnd

V OUT + V IN +

V OUT - V IN -

Recording
ANALYZER Device

Figure 6-2: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs

To make these adjustments, the AOUT auto-calibration feature must be turned off
(Section 6.7.3). Then press SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR-NEXT-NEXT and the following keys:

64 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

FROM ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 RANGE: 5V
DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
SET> EDIT EXIT
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 REC OFS: 0 mV

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET> EDIT EXIT
< SET SET> CAL EXIT If AutoCal is ON, go to
Section 6.7.3

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 AUTO CAL: OFF

Press SET> to select the analog output channel to be configured:
DISPLAYED AS = CHANNEL < SET SET> EDIT EXIT
CONC_OUT_1 = A1
CONC_OUT_2 = A2
CONC_OUT_3 = A3
TEST OUTPUT = A4 DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO

< SET CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 :5V, NO CAL

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 VOLT–Z : 0 mV

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

These keys increase / decrease the analog

output by 100, 10 or 1 counts. Continue
adjustments until the voltage measured at the EXIT ignores the
output of the analyzer and/or the input of the DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 VOLT–S : 4500 mV new setting.
recording device matches the value in the upper ENTR accepts the
right hand corner of the display to the tolerance U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT new setting.
listed in Table 6-10.
The concentration display will not change. Only
the voltage reading of your voltmeter will change.

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 CALIBRATED: YES

< SET CAL EXIT

6.7.3.4. Analog Output Offset Adjustment

Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the
baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the
zero point. This can be achieved in the M200E by defining a zero offset, a small voltage
(e.g., 10% of span), which can be added to the signal of individual output channels by
pressing SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR-NEXT-NEXT and the following keys:

044100102 Rev A 65
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

FROM ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

< SET SET> CAL EXIT Press SET> to select the

analog output channel to
be configured. Then press
EDIT to continue

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT Pressing ENTR accepts the

new setting and returns to the
previous menu.
Set the recorder Pressing EXIT ignores the new
offset (in mV) of DIAG AIO RECORD OFFSET: 0 MV setting and returns to the
the selected previous menu.
channel
+ 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

6.7.3.5. Current Loop Output Adjustment

A current loop option is available and can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog
outputs of the analyzer (Section 5.3). This option converts the DC voltage analog output to
a current signal with 0-20 mA output current. The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits
within that 0-20 mA range. However, most current loop applications call for either 2-20 mA
or 4-20 mA range. All current loop outputs have a +5% over-range. Ranges with the lower
limit set to more than 1 mA (e.g., 2-20 or 4-20 mA) also have a -5% under-range.

To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop, follow the instructions in
Section 6.7.1 and select CURR from the list of options on the “Output Range” menu.

Adjusting the signal zero and span values of the current loop output is done by raising or
lowering the voltage of the respective analog output. This proportionally raises or lowers
the current produced by the current loop option.

Similar to the voltage calibration, the software allows this current adjustment to be made in
100, 10 or 1 count increments. Since the exact current increment per voltage count varies
from output to output and from instrument to instrument, you will need to measure the
change in the current with a current meter placed in series with the output circuit
(Figure 6-4).

66 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

See Table 3-2 for

pin assignments of mA
the Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel.
IN OUT

V OUT + I IN +

V OUT - I IN -

Analyzer Recording
Device

Figure 6-3: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs

CAUTION
Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground.

To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, press SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR-
NEXT-NEXT and then:

FROM ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO

< SET CAL EXIT

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 0 mV

Increase or decrease the current
DIAG AIO AIN A/C FREQUENCY: 60 HZ U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT output by 100, 10 or 1 counts. The
resulting change in output voltage is
SET> EDIT EXIT displayed in the upper line.
EXAMPLE Continue adjustments until the correct
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 27 mV
current is measured with the current
DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO meter.
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO AOUT CALIBRATED: NO

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 SPAN: 10000 mV ENTR returns
< SET SET> CAL EXIT to the previous
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT menu.

Press SET> to select the analog output channel

to be configured:. Then press EDIT to continue EXAMPLE
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 9731 mV EXIT ignores the
new setting, ENTR
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_CURR, NO CAL accepts the new
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
setting.
< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT < SET CAL EXIT

If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the current loop
outputs is to connect a 250 Ω ±1% resistor across the current loop output. Using a
voltmeter, connected across the resistor, follow the procedure above but adjust the output
to the following values:

044100102 Rev A 67
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 6-12: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor

Voltage for 2-20 mA Voltage for 4-20 mA

Full scale
(measured across resistor) (measured across resistor)
0% 0.5 V 1.0 V
100% 5.0 V 5.0 V

6.7.3.6. AIN Calibration

This is the sub-menu to conduct the analog input calibration. This calibration should only be
necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies.

STARTING FROM ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION MENU

DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION Exit at any time to

return to the main
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG menu

DIAG AIO AIN A/C FREQUENCY: 60 HZ

SET> EDIT EXIT

DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO

< SET SET> CAL EXIT

Instrument DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D ZERO

calibrates
automatically CALIBRATING A/D SPAN

Exit to return to the

DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: YES ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION
< SET SET> CAL EXIT MENU

6.7.4. Test Channel Output

When activated, output channel A4 can be used to report one of the test functions viewable
from the SAMPLE mode display.

68 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To activate the A4 channel and select a test function, follow this key sequence:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

Continue to press NEXT until …

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
EXIT returns
to the main PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SAMPLE
display

DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL: NONE

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

NEXT ENTR EXIT

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL: PMT DETECTOR

DIAG SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT Press PREV or NEXT Press ENTR to

to move through the select the displayed Press EXIT to
list of available parameter and to return to the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT parameters activate the test DIAG menu
(Table 6-9) channel.

Table 6-13: Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4

Test Channel Test parameter range 1

NONE Test channel is turned off

PMT DETECTOR 0-5000 mV
Ozone flow 0-1000 cm³/min
sample flow 0-1000 cm³/min
SAMPLE PRESSure 0-40 in-Hg-A
rcell pressure 0-40 in-Hg-A
rcell temp 0-70° C
manifold temp 0-70° C
izs temp 0-70° C
conv temp 0-500° C
pmt temp 0-50° C
CHASSIS TEMP 0-70° C
HVPS VOLTAGE 0-5000 V
1
This refers to the voltage range of the parameter and
not the output signal of the test channel.

Once a TEST function is selected, the instrument begins to report a signal on the A4 output
and adds TEST= to the list of test functions viewable on the display (just before the TIME
display).

044100102 Rev A 69
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.7.5. Optic Test

The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED located in
the cooling block of the PMT (Fig. 10-15). The analyzer uses the light emitted from the LED
to test its photo-electronic subsystem, including the PMT and the current to voltage
converter on the pre-amplifier board. To make sure that the analyzer measures only the
light coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied with zero air. The optic test
should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV. To activate the electrical test press
the following key sequence.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X DIAG SIGNAL I / O

< TST TST > CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU Press NEXT until…

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

DIAG OPTIC TEST

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIAG OPTIC RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

<TST TST> EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Press TST until…

While the optic test is

activated, PMT should be DIAG ELEC PMT = 2751 MV NOX=X.X
2000 mV ± 1000 mV
<TST TST> EXIT

NOTE
This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool. The
resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low-
level calibration.

6.7.6. Electrical Test

The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and feeds it
into the preamplifier board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre-amplifier board
itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A/D
converter on the motherboard. It does not test the PMT itself. The electrical test should
produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.

70 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To activate the electrical test press the following keys.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X DIAG SIGNAL I / O

< TST TST > CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU Press NEXT until…

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

DIAG ELEC RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

<TST TST> EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Press TST until…

While the electrical test is

activated, PMT should equal: DIAG ELEC PMT = 1732 MV NOX=X.X
2000 mV ± 1000 mV
<TST TST> EXIT

6.7.7. Ozone Generator Override

This feature allows the user to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. This can be
done before disconnecting the generator, to prevent ozone from leaking out, or after a
system restart if the user does not want to wait for 30 minutes during warm-up time. Note
that this is one of the two settings in the DIAG menu that is retained after you exit the
menu. To access this feature press the following keys. Also note that the ozone generator
does not turn on if the ozone flow conditions are out of specification (e.g., if there is no flow
through the system or the pump is broken).

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP DIAG SIGNAL I / O

PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Press NEXT until…

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

DIAG OZONE OZONE GEN OVERRIDE Toggle this key to

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
turn the O3
OFF ENTR EXIT generator ON/OFF.
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

044100102 Rev A 71
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.7.8. Flow Calibration

The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample and ozone flow rates
as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the
actual flow rate measured at the respective pneumatic ports. This does not change the
hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software calculated values. This is one
of the two parameters in the DIAG menu that is retained after you exit the menu. To carry
out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the respective
test port (Chapter 11 contains more details on this setup). Once the flow meter is attached
and measures the actual flow, follow this key sequence:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG SIGNAL I / O

CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT NEXT ENTR EXIT

Exit at
any time
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU to return
to main
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
the
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP
menu

DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION Exit returns

to the
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT previous menu

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

DIAG FLOW SENSOR TO CAL: SAMPLE

Choose between SAMPLE OZONE ENTR EXIT

sample and ozone
flow sensors. ENTR accepts the
new value and
returns to the
Adjust these values until DIAG FCAL ACTUAL FLOW: 480 CC / M previous menu
the displayed flow rate
equals the flow rate being EXIT ignores the
0 4 8 0 ENTR EXIT new value and
measured by the
independent flow meter. returns to the
previous menu

6.8. Digital Inputs and Outputs

6.8.1. Status Outputs

The status output signals report analyzer conditions through optically isolated transistors
which can sink up to 50 mA of DC current to ground. These outputs can be used with
interface devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic
controllers (PLC).

NOTE
Most PLC devices have internal provisions for limiting the current that the output
can draw from an external device. When connecting the M200E status outputs to a
unit that does not have this feature, a 120 Ω external pull-up resistors must be
used to limit the current through the transistor output to 50 mA or less. Refer to
the motherboard schematic 04069 in Appendix D.

72 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel
labeled STATUS. The function of each pin is defined in Table 6-14.

STATUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +

EMITTERS
COMMON
HIGH RANGE

DIAGNOSTIC MODE
CONC VALID
SYSTEM OK

ZERO CAL

LOW SPAN
SPAN CAL

GROUND
Figure 6-4: Status Output Connector

Table 6-14: Status Output Pin Assignments

Connector
Status Condition (ON=conducting)
Pin
1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present.
2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement is valid, OFF when invalid.
3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode.
4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode.
5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode.
6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.
7 LOW RANGE ON if unit is in low range of any AUTO range mode.
8 Unused.
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed
D EMITTER BUS together. For most applications, this pin should be connected
to the circuit ground of the receiving device.
+ 5 VDC, 30 mA maximum (combined rating with Control
+ DC POWER
Inputs).

DIGITAL The ground from the analyzer’s internal, 5/±15 VDC power
GROUND supply.

6.8.2. Control Inputs

Control inputs allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes are
provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel.
These are opto-isolated, digital inputs that are activated when a 5 VDC signal from the “U”
pin is connected to the respective input pin.

044100102 Rev A 73
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 6-15: Control Input Pin Assignments

Input Status Condition when enabled

EXTERNAL ZERO Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the
A
CAL display will read ZERO CAL R.
EXTERNAL SPAN Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the
B
CAL display will read SPAN CAL R.
EXTERNAL LOW Low span (mid-point) calibration mode is activated. The
C
SPAN CAL mode field of the display will read LO CAL R.
D Unused
E Unused
F Unused

DIGITAL GROUND Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder).

Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This

DC power for
U voltage can be taken from an external source or from the
Input pull ups
“+” pin.
Internal +5V Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate
+
Supply inputs when connected to pin U.

There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the “+”
pin is the most convenient method (see figure). However, to ensure that these inputs are
truly isolated, a separate, external 5 VDC power supply should be used.

CONTROL IN CONTROL IN

A B C D E F U + A B C D E F U +
ZERO CAL

ZERO CAL
LOW SPAN

LOW SPAN
SPAN CAL

SPAN CAL

5 VDC Power
- Supply +
Local Power Connections External Power Connections

Figure 6-5: Control Inputs with Local and External 5 V Power Supply

6.9. Setup - Communication Ports (COMM)

The M200E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel
(Figure 3-3). Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with,
issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer
system or terminal. By default, both ports operate on the RS-232 protocol. The COM2 port,

74 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

however, can be configured for half-duplex RS-485 communication or can be used for the
T-API Ethernet interface card (optional equipment, Section 5.6.3).

There are two options to connect multiple analyzers to a single computer terminal or data
logging device over a single serial communications line. Either port can be equipped with an
optional RS-232 multidrop assembly (Section 5.6.2), or up to eight analyzers can be
connected using COM2 configured for RS-485 operation (contact the factory for further
information). A third option is to use a code-activated switch (CAS), which can connect
typically between 2 and 16 analyzers to one communications hub. Contact T-API sales for
more information on CAS systems.

When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface (Section 5.7.3), the analyzer can be
connected to any standard 10BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches
or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a
remote computer to connect through the internet to the analyzer using APIcom, terminal
emulators or other programs.

6.9.1. Analyzer ID
The first entry in the COMM menu is for configuration of the analyzer ID number, a
numerical value of up to 4 digits. As a factory default, the M200E is configured with ID
number “200”. The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to
the same communications channel (e.g., a multi-drop setup), in which case each analyzer
needs to be addressed with a unique ID number. Different models of T-API analyzers have
different ID numbers, but if two identical models are used on one channel (for example, two
M200E instruments), the ID of one instrument needs to be changed. The ID can also be
used for internal identification of same model analyzers in different locations.

For the Hessen protocol (a configuration option listed in Table 6-17 and briefly described in
Section 6.9.10), the M200E assigns different numbers to identify its reported gases. When
this protocol is enabled, the analyzer behaves and reports as three separate instruments,
one for each gas.

6.9.2. COM Port Default Settings

As received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with pin 3
of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and pin 2 designated for sending data.

• COM1: RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector.

• Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).
• Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit, no start bit.
• Parity: None.
• COM2: RS-232 (configurable), DB-9 female connector.
• Baud rate: 115000 bits per second (baud).
• Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit, no start bit.
• Parity: None.

044100102 Rev A 75
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

CAUTION
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorpo-
rate internal wiring that make the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from
sources other than T-API for pin assignments before using.

6.9.3. COM Port Cable Connections

There are two DB-9 connectors on the M200E rear panel. COM1 is a male connector, COM2
a female connector (Table 6-16 lists pin assignments). T-API offers two mating cables, one
of which should be applicable for your use.

• Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows
connection of COM1 with the serial port of most personal computers. Also available
as Option 60 (Section 5.7.1).
• Part number WR0000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to
the most common styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated
switches.
Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional
adapters.

To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are
activity indicators just above each COM port. When power is applied to the analyzer, the red
LED should be illuminated. If this LED is dark, it indicates a communications error between
serial port and CPU.

Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red
and green LEDs should be on. If not, COM1 can be switched between DTE and DCE modes
using a small switch on the rear panel to exchange the receive and transmit lines
(emulating a cross-over or null-modem cable). If both LEDs are still not illuminated, check
the cable for proper wiring. For COM2 it may be necessary to install a null-modem cable
(contact customer service for information).

6.9.4. COM2 Configuration

As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This port
can be re-configured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port with a 150 Ω
termination resistor (Table 6-18 shows the pin assignments of the DB-9 connector).

For RS-485 operation, jumper JP3 on the CPU board should be installed and switch 6 of
SW1 should be set to the ON position. For RS-232, remove the jumper and set the switch to
OFF (default). JP3 is just to the right of the third connector from the left on the top of the
CPU board (as seen from the inside of the analyzer). SW1 is in the middle of the CPU board
between disk-on-chip and BIOS. For non-terminated RS-485 operation, remove the jumper
on JP3 but leave switch 6 in the ON position. Refer to Figure 3-7 to locate the CPU board.

76 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

Table 6-16: COM1 and COM2 DB-9 Pin Assignments

Pin # COM1 (RS-232) COM2 (RS-232) COM2 (RS-485)

1 Not used Not used Not used
2 TRANSMIT DATA* RECEIVE DATA DATA -
3 RECEIVE DATA* TRANSMIT DATA DATA +
4 Not used Not used Not used
5 Signal Ground Signal Ground Signal Ground
6 Not used Not used Not used
7 DATA SET READY* DATA SET READY Not used
8 REQUEST TO SEND* REQUEST TO SEND Not used
(=DTE Ready)
9 Not used Not used Not used
* Configurable for COM1 at rear panel using the DTE-DCE switch

6.9.5. DTE and DCE Communication

RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the DTE
category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference between the
two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions. DTE devices
receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3, DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and
transmit data on pin 2.

To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers
(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the
user to switch between the two functions (for COM1 only).

6.9.6. COM Port Communication Modes

Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different
modes, which are listed in Table 6-17 and which can be combined by adding the Mode ID
numbers. For example, quiet mode, computer mode and internet-enabled mode would carry
a combined mode ID of 11, the standard configuration for Ethernet functionality on the
M200E COM2 port. Note that each COM port needs to be configured independently.

044100102 Rev A 77
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 6-17: COM Port Communication Modes

Mode ID Description
Quiet mode 1 Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (iDAS reports, and
warning messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port
is communicating with a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback
is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.
Computer 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the
mode port is communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM.
Security 4 When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The
mode only command that is active is the help screen (? CR). Section 6.4.1 describes
the password functionality.
Enable 8 Enables the use and configuration of the Ethernet interface. When enabled, a
Internet new menu item INET will appear in the respective COM port menu.
Hessen 16 The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. T-
protocol API part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol.
Multidrop 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single
Protocol communications channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.
Enable 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain
modem lines in the RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.
Ignore 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.
Errors
Disable 256 Disables XON/XOFF data flow control.
XON/XOFF
512 Unused
RS-485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has
mode precedence over multidrop mode if both are enabled.
E, 7, 1 2048 This setting selects even parity, 7 data bits, and 1 stop bit for this com port;
the default setting is always no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. Used in
conjunction with the Hessen protocol, hence, it is listed after ID 16
Command 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.
Prompt

Each Parameter is preceded by a string of either COM1 or COM2 depending on the chosen
COM port.

78 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To select a set of communication modes for a one of the COMM Ports, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

EXIT returns
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU to the
previous
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT menu

Select which COM SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

port to configure
ID NET COM1 COM2 EXIT

The sum of the mode

IDs of the selected SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
modes is displayed
here SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF

EXIT key
NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT ignores
the new
settings

SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: ON

Use PREV and NEXT
keys to move NEXT ON ENTR EXIT
between available ENTR key
modes. Note that a accepts
mode is enabled by the new
simply pressing the settings
ON/OFF. Press ENTR SETUP X.X COM1 COMPUTER MODE: OFF
only after selecting
all modes. PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

044100102 Rev A 79
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.9.7. COM Port Baud Rate

To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports, press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

EXIT returns
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU to the
previous
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT menu

Select which COM SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

port to configure.
ID COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

Press SET> until you
reach COM1 BAUD SET> EDIT EXIT
RATE

EXAMPLE
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
Use PREV and NEXT
keys to move <SET SET> EDIT EXIT EXIT key
between available ignores
baud rates. the new
setting
300
1200 SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
4800
9600 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT ENTR key
19200 accepts
38400 the new
57600 setting
115200 SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:9600

NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

6.9.8. COM Port Testing

The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu. This
test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running,
the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker.

80 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To initiate the test press the following key sequence.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX =XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SET> EDIT EXIT

EXIT returns
to the SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
previous
menu COMM VARS DIAG EXIT <SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Select which SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU SETUP X.X COM1 : TEST PORT
COM port to
test. ID COM1 COM2 EXIT <SET TEST EXIT

EXIT returns to
COMM menu
Test runs SETUP X.X TRANSMITTING TO COM1
automatically
<SET TEST EXIT

6.9.9. Ethernet Port Configuration

The optional Ethernet port (Section 5.7.3) communicates with the analyzer through the
COM2 serial port. Refer to Figure 3-2 and Figure 5-2 for location of this option. The Ethernet
board has two operational modes:

• Pass-through mode: This is the normal operation mode in which the board actively
passes data between the RS-232 port and the RJ-45 connector on the analyzer’s rear
panel. This enables all remote commands to be passed to the analyzer.
• Configuration mode: The board stops passing data and is ready to accept and store
configuration parameters and firmware upgrades. The use of a terminal window or
separate configuration program is needed for these low-level configuration changes.
The iChip configuration utility is available at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/
and provides a convenient, graphical user interface, which runs only on Microsoft
WindowsTM operating systems. All commands can also be issued via Terminal window
using the AT+i protocol. Instructions for AT+i commands are also available at the
website along with other pertinent information.
The Ethernet board has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the analyzer,
indicating its current operating status (Table 6-18).

Table 6-18: Ethernet Status Indicators

LED Function
LNK (green) ON when connection to the LAN is valid.
ACT (yellow) Flickers on any activity on the LAN.
TA (green) Flickers when the RS-232 port is transmitting data.
RA (yellow) Flickers when the RS-232 port is receiving data.

As soon as the Ethernet option is enabled in the COMM menu, a new sub-menu INET will
appear. This sub-menu is enabled by default when the analyzer was ordered with built-in
Ethernet and is used to set configuration parameters that enable the Ethernet card to

044100102 Rev A 81
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

communicate with your local area network. To perform this configuration, you will need to
get the following information from your network administrator:

• Gateway IP address, typically a string of numbers with four packets of 1 to 3

numbers each: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, for example: 192.168.76.1.
• Instrument IP address, typically a string of numbers very similar to the Gateway IP
address, for example: 192.168.76.55. Note that this instrument IP address must
be a static address and cannot be a dynamic IP address. DHCP and analyzer host
names are not supported at this time.
• Subnet Mask, typically a string of numbers such as 255.255.252.0.
• The communications port number is set to 3000 by default and should not be
changed.
The following procedures assume that the Ethernet card is already installed in your
analyzer. If you are retro-fitting the analyzer with an Ethernet Option 63, please make sure
to enable the internet option as described in Section 6.9.6 and set the baud rate to 115000
as described in Section 6.9.7. Refer to the installation instructions of that option for more
information.

Once Ethernet is enabled for the COM2 port, the first step in configuring the Ethernet option
is to set the card from pass-through mode to configuration mode, so that TCP/IP parame-
ters can be edited.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB O3 =XXX.X SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

< TST TST > CAL SETUP ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU INTERNET CONFIGURATION

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT GTWY IP SNET PORT STRT STOP EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU STOPPING ETHERNET

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

ETHERNET STOPPED
If the message ETHERNET NOT
STOPPED appears here, the
Ethernet card either was already
in configuration mode or might
not be responding.

Step two in the configuration process is to edit the TCP/IP parameters.

82 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB O3 =XXX.X Internet Configuration

Keypad Functions
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
KEY FUNCTION

<CH Moves the cursor one

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU character to the left.
CH> Moves the cursor one
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
character to the right.
INS Inserts a character before the
cursor location.
DEL Deletes a character at the
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU cursor location.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT [?] Press this key to cycle
through the range of
numerals and characters
available for insertion.
ENTR Accepts the new setting and
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU returns to the previous menu.
ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT EXIT Ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.

INTERNET CONFIGURATION
Cursor location is indicated by brackets
GTWY IP SNET PORT STRT STOP EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000

<CH CH> INS DEL [0] ENTR EXIT

INTERNET CONFIGURATION
Change the cursor value with this button
GTWY IP SNET PORT STRT STOP EXIT
SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000

<CH CH> INS DEL [0] ENTR EXIT

INTERNET CONFIGURATION

GTWY IP SNET PORT STRT STOP EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK: [0] 00.000.000

<CH CH> INS DEL [0] ENTR EXIT

INTERNET CONFIGURATION The PORT number

needs to remain at
GTWY IP SNET PORT STRT STOP EXIT 3000. Do not change
this setting!

044100102 Rev A 83
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

Step three in the configuration process is to restart the pass-through mode for normal
operation.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB O3 =XXX.X SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

< TST TST > CAL SETUP ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU INTERNET CONFIGURATION

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT GTWY IP SNET PORT STRT STOP EXIT

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU STARTING ETHERNET

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

If the message ETHERNET NOT STARTED ETHERNET STARTED

appears here, the Ethernet card either was already
in configuration mode or might not be responding.

6.9.10. Hessen Mode Configuration

The Hessen protocol is used in applications, which adhere to operation protocols originally
defined by the German state of Hessen and also applies to the Bavarian protocol.

A Hessen protocol network typically consists of a host computer that monitors the status
and controls one or more remote instruments. The remote instruments are regarded as
slaves of the host computer, and only respond to commands from the host computer;
remote instruments never initiate Hessen protocol messages.

The Hessen protocol is a multidrop application, in which several instruments are connected
to a common communications channel (e.g., using hardware Option 62). However, the
implementation details of this multidrop bus are handled outside of the instrument. The
instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and respond only to
commands containing their own unique ID number.

The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things:

• to obtain the status of remote instruments, including the concentrations of all the
gases measured and
• to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode.
The T-API implementation supports both of these principal features.

From the user’s point of view, the RS-232 hardware on T-API instruments supporting the
Hessen protocol is not different from that of standard instruments. The RS-232
communication parameters, however, are different from standard configurations. For more
information on configuring the Hessen protocol, please download the manual addendum at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.

84 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.10. Setup - Data Acquisition System (DAS)

The M200E analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system
(iDAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a
host of diagnostic parameters. The iDAS of the M200E can store up to about one million
data points, which can, depending on individual configurations, cover days, weeks or
months of valuable measurements. The data are stored in non-volatile memory and are
retained even when the instrument is powered off. Data are stored in plain text format for
easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs (such as spreadsheet-type
programs).

The iDAS is designed to be flexible, users have full control over the type, length and
reporting time of the data. The iDAS permits users to access stored data through the
instrument’s front panel or its communication ports. Using APICOM, data can even be
retrieved automatically to a remote computer for further processing.

The principal use of the iDAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics,
which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the
analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and archival in electronic
format.

To support the iDAS functionality, T-API offers APICOM, a program that provides a visual
interface for remote or local setup, configuration and data retrieval of the iDAS
(Section 6.11). The APICOM manual, which is included with the program, contains a more
detailed description of the iDAS structure and configuration, which is briefly described in
this section.

The M200E is configured with a basic iDAS configuration, which is enabled by default. New
data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or
occasional use. Note that iDAS operation is suspended while its configuration is edited
through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is recommended to use the APICOM
graphical user interface for iDAS changes.

The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer status,
also indicates certain aspects of the iDAS status:

Table 6-19: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS

LED State iDAS Status

System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this
mode. Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods,
Off
concentration data are typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be
collected.
Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits
calibrations. IDAS channels can be enabled or disabled for this period.
Blinking
Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be
collected.
On Sampling normally.

The iDAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels.

044100102 Rev A 85
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.10.1. iDAS Structure

The iDAS is designed around the feature of a “record”. A record is a single data point of one
parameter, stored in one (or more) data channels and generated by one of several
triggering event. The entire iDAS configuration is stored in a script, which can be edited
from the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a
string of plain-text lines through the communication ports.

iDAS data are defined by the PARAMETER type and are stored through different triggering
EVENTS in data CHANNELS, which relate triggering events to data parameters and define
certain operational functions related to the recording and reporting of the data.

6.10.1.1. iDAS Channels

The key to the flexibility of the iDAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of
triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels. Users may create up to
20 data channels and each channel can contain one or more parameters. For each channel
one triggering event is selected and up to 50 data parameters are allowed (the M200E has
around 25), which can be the same or different between channels. Each data channel has
several properties that define the structure of the channel (Table 6-20).

86 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

Table 6-20: iDAS Data Channel Properties

Property Description Default Setting Range

NAME The name of the data channel. “NONE” Up to 6 letters and
digits (more with
APICOM, but only
the first six are
displayed on the
front panel).
TRIGGERING The event that triggers the data channel to ATIMER Any allowed event.
EVENT measure and store its data parameters. See
APPENDIX A-5 for a list of available
triggering events.
NUMBER AND A User-configurable list of data types to be PMTDET Any available
LIST OF recorded in any given channel. See concentration,
PARAMETERS APPENDIX A-5 for a list of available temperature,
parameters. pneumatic or
diagnostic
parameter.
STARTING DATE The starting date when a channel starts 01-JAN-03 Any actual date in
collecting fata the past or future.
SAMPLE PERIOD The amount of time between each data point 000:01:00 000:00:01 to
that is averaged into one mean reported 366:23:59
every REPORT PERIOD. (Days:Hours:Minut
es)
REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel 000:01:00 000:00:01 to
data point. 366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minut
es)
NUMBER OF The number of reports that will be stored in 100 1 to 1 million,
RECORDS the data file. Once the specified limit has limited by available
been exceeded, the oldest data are over- storage space.
written to make space for new data.
RS-232 REPORT Enables the analyzer to automatically report OFF OFF or ON
channel values to the RS-232 ports.
COMPACT Enables a compact version of the RS-232 OFF OFF or ON
REPORT reporting with up to five parameters sharing
the same output line.
CHANNEL Enables or disables the channel. Provides a ON OFF or ON
ENABLED convenient means to temporarily disable a
data channel.
CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while OFF OFF or ON
instrument is in calibration mode.
Note that - when enabled here - there is
also a length of the DAS HOLD OFF after
calibration mode, which is set in the VARS
menu. (Section 6.5.)

6.10.1.2. iDAS Parameters

Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the iDAS. For each
T-API analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different, fully defined and not
customizable. Appendix A-5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the M200E. The

044100102 Rev A 87
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

most common parameters are concentrations of measured gases (NOX, NO and NO2),
temperatures of heated zones (NO2 converter, reaction cell, box temperature…), pressures
and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as
calibration data (slope and offset) for each gas.

Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppb, cm³/min, etc.,
although some parameters have no units. The only units that can be changed are those of
the concentration readings according to the SETUP-RANGE settings. Note that the iDAS
does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and iDAS data files may contain
concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data acquisition.

Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are recorded
(Table 6-21).

Table 6-21: iDAS Data Parameter Functions

Function Effect
PARAMETER Instrument-specific parameter name.
SAMPLE MODE INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
PRECISION Decimal precision of parameter value(0-4).
STORE NUM. SAMPLES OFF: stores only the average (default).
ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a
parameter. This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used.
Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one
channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters.

Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel (the M200E has about 30 para-
meters). The number of parameters and channels is also limited by available memory.

6.10.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events

Triggering events define when and how the iDAS records a measurement of any given data
channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5. The most
common triggering events are:

• ATIMER: Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Most

trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals, which can be
instantaneous or averaged.
• EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the end
of (irregularly occurring) calibrations or when the response slope changes. These
triggering events create instantaneous data points for the new slope and offset (con-
centration response) values at the end of a calibration. Zero and slope values can be
used to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated.
• WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning
messages appears. This is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a
particular warning occurred.

88 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.10.2. Configuring the iDAS

6.10.2.1. Default M200E iDAS Configuration

A set of default data channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging
nitrogen oxides concentrations, calibration and predictive diagnostic data. These default
channels are listed in Table 6-22 and are defined as follows:

CONC: Hourly averages of NOX, NO and NO2 concentrations and the NOX stability (standard
deviation). These data are recorded at one minute intervals and stored every full hour with
a time and date stamp. Readings during calibration and the calibration hold off period are
not included in the averages. By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored, which
covers more than one month of continuous data acquisition. This channel also logs the
number of (1-minute) samples within each average for statistical evaluation of the
concentration means.

CALDAT: Logs concentration, slope and offset values for NOX and NO every time a zero or
span calibration is performed (triggering event: SLPCHG). The NOX stability (to evaluate if
the calibration value was stable) as well as the converter efficiency (for trend reference) are
also stored. This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used
to document analyzer calibration and detect trends in slope and offset (instrument
response). As with all data channels, a date and time stamp is recorded for every logged
data point.

CALCHECK: This channel logs concentrations and the stability each time a zero or span
check (not calibration) is finished (triggered by exiting any calibration menu). The data of
this channel enable the user to track the quality of zero and span responses over time and
assist in evaluating the quality of zero and span gases and the analyzer’s noise specifica-
tions. The STABIL figure documents if the analyzer response was stable at the point of the
calibration check reading. The last 200 data points are retained.

DIAG: Daily averages of temperature zones, flow and pressure data as well as some other
diagnostic parameters (HVPS, AZERO). These data are intended for predictive diagnostics
and maintenance described in Chapter 9. The last 1100 daily averages are stored to cover
more than four years of analyzer performance, a major portion of the analyzer’s lifetime. If
these parameters are required for data analysis, this channel can easily be duplicated (e.g.,
by using APICOM) to obtain hourly averages, which could be synchronized with the CONC
data.

HIRES: One minute, instantaneous data of all available parameters in the M200E that are
actively used. This data channel is disabled by default but may be turned on for trouble-
shooting or when the application requires a high resolution of data. Short-term trends as
well as signal noise levels can be detected and documented this way. Readings during
calibration and the calibration hold off period are included in the averages. By default, the
last 1500 data points are stored, which covers a little more than one day of continuous data
acquisition.

Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s disk-on-chip, CPU board
or configuration is replaced/reset.

044100102 Rev A 89
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 6-22: M200E Default iDAS Configuration, Revision C.7.

List of Parameters
List of Channels
NAME – MODE/EVENT - PRECISION - NUM SAMPLES
Name: CONC
NOXCNC1 - AVG - 4 - ON
Event: ATIMER
Sample Period: 000:00:01
NOCNC1 - AVG - 4 - OFF
Report Period: 000:01:00
Number of Records: 800
RS-232 report: OFF N2CNC1 - AVG - 4 - OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: ON STABIL - AVG - 4 - OM
Name: CALDAT NXZSC1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
Event: SLPCHG NOXSLP1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
Number of Records: 200 NOXOFFS1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
RS-232 report: OFF NOZSC1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
Channel enabled: ON NOSLP1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF NOOFFS1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
N2ZSC1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
CNVEF1 - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
STABIL - SLPCHG - 4 - OFF
Name: CALCHECK NXZSC1 - EXITMP - 4 - OFF
Event: EXITMP
Number of Records: 200 NOZSC1 - EXITMP - 4 - OFF
RS-232 report: OFF N2ZSC1 - EXITMP - 4 - OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF STABIL - EXITMP - 4 - OFF
Name: DIAG SMPFLW - AVG – 2 - OFF
Event: ATIMER O3FLOW – AVG – 2 - OFF
Sample Period: 000:00:30 RCPRESS – AVG – 2 - OFF
Report Period: 001:00:00 SMPPRES – AVG – 2 - OFF
Number of Records: 1100 RCTEMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
RS-232 report: OFF PMTTMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
Channel enabled: ON CNVTMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF BOXTMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
HVPS - AVG – 2 - OFF
AZERO - AVG – 2 - OFF
Name: HIRES NOXCNC1 - AVG - 4 - OFF
Event: ATIMER NOCNC1 – AVG - 4 - OFF
Sample Period: 000:00:01 N2CNC1 - AVG – 4 - OFF
Report Period: 000:00:01 STABIL - AVG – 4 - OFF
Number of Records: 1500 SMPFLW - AVG – 2 - OFF
RS-232 report: OFF O3FLOW - AVG – 2 - OFF
Channel enabled: OFF RCPRESS - AVG – 2 - OFF
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF SMPPRES - AVG – 2 - OFF
RCTEMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
PMTTMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
CNVTMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
BOXTMP - AVG – 2 - OFF
HVPS - AVG – 1 - OFF
AZERO - AVG – 2 - OFF
REFGND - AVG – 1 - OFF
REF4096 - AVG - 1 - OFF

Teledyne-API recommends to download and store CONC, CALDAT and ENGDAT data once
per month for permanent documentation and future data analysis. Data can be most
conveniently downloaded, graphed and stored using the APICOM remote control program.
Channel properties, triggering events and parameters for the default channels are listed in
Table 6-22.

90 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

The default data channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the
front panel or through APICOM to fit a specific application. The T-API website contains this
default and other sample iDAS scripts for free download. We recommend that the user
backs up any iDAS configuration and its data before altering it.

Appendix A-5 lists the firmware-specific iDAS configuration in plain-text format. This text
file can either be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or
can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the analyzer.

WARNING
Sending an iDAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace
the existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up any existing
data and the iDAS configuration before uploading new settings.

6.10.2.2. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings

IDAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke
sequence.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP VIEW KEYPAD FUNCTIONS

KEY FUNCTION

<PRM Moves to the next Parameter

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
PRM> Moves to the previous
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Parameter
EXIT will return to the
NX10 Moves the view forward 10
main SAMPLE Display.
data points/channels
NEXT Moves to the next data
point/channel
SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION
PREV Moves to the previous data
VIEW EDIT EXIT point/channel
PV10 Moves the view back 10 data
points/channels
Keys only appear as needed

SETUP X.X CONC : DATA AVAILABLE

NEXT VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X 00:00:00 NXCNC1=0.0 PPM

PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 <PRM PRM> EXIT

SETUP X.X ENGDAT: DATA AVAILABLE

PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X 00:00:00 SMPFLW=000.0 cc / m

<PRM PRM> EXIT

SETUP X.X CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE

PREV VIEW EXIT

SETUP X.X 00:00:00 NXSLP1=0.000

PV10 PREV <PRM PRM> EXIT

044100102 Rev A 91
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.10.2.3. Editing iDAS Data Channels

IDAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program.
The following list of key strokes shows how to edit using the front panel.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

EXIT will return to the SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

previous SAMPLE
display. CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION

VIEW EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X ENTER DAS PASS: 818

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

Edit Data Channel Menu

Moves the SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
display up & Exits to the Main
down the list of PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
Data Channels Menu

Exports the
Inserts a new Data configuration of all
Channel into the list data channels to
BEFORE the Channel RS-232 interface.
currently being displayed
Deletes The Data
Channel currently
being displayed

Moves the display SETUP X.X NAME:CONC Exits returns to the

between the previous Menu
PROPERTIES for this <SET SET> EDIT PRNT EXIT
data channel.

Reports the configuration of current

data channels to the RS-232 ports.
Allows to edit the channel name, see next key sequence.

When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the configura-
tion parameters. For example, the display line:

0) CONC : ATIMER, 4, 800

Translates to the following configuration:

Channel No.: 0
NAME: CONC
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points.

92 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To edit the name of a data channel, follow the above key sequence and then press:

FROM THE PREVIOUS KEY SEQUENCE …

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC ENTR accepts the new string

and returns to the previous
C O N C - - ENTR EXIT menu.
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.

Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the

available character set:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ]
{ } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

6.10.2.4. Trigger Events

To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, press:

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Exits to the Main
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
menu

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER ENTR accepts the new string

and returns to the previous
<PREV NEXT> ENTR EXIT menu.
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.

Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the

list of available trigger events.

044100102 Rev A 93
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

6.10.2.5. Editing iDAS Parameters

Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data
channels. However, when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or editing
parameters, all data for that particular channel will be lost, because the iDAS can store only
data of one format (number of parameter columns etc.) for any given channel. In addition,
an iDAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of channels. Hence,
remote update of the iDAS will always delete all current channels and stored data.

To modify, add or delete a parameter, press SETUP-DAS-ENTR and then:

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Exits to the main
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
menu

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X PARAMETERS:2

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

YES will delete SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA) NO returns to
all data in that the previous
entire channel. YES NO menu and
retains all data.

Edit Data Parameter Menu

Moves the SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=DETREP, MODE=INST
display between Exits to the main
available PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Data Acquisition
Parameters menu

Inserts a new Parameter Use to configure

Deletes the Parameter
before the currently the functions for
currently displayed.
displayed Parameter this Parameter.

94 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter, press:

FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU

(see previous section)

SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=PMTDET, MODE=INST

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: PMTDET

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: PMTDET

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Cycle through list of available

Parameters.

SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST

INST AVG MIN MAX EXIT

Press the key for the desired mode

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 1 previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT and returns to the previous
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 1

1 EXIT

Set for 0-4

SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF <SET Returns to

previous
<SET EDIT EXIT Functions

SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF

OFF ENTR EXIT

Turn ON or OFF

6.10.2.6. Sample Period and Report Period

The iDAS defines two principal time periods, the SAMPLE PERIOD, which is the time
interval at which data are sampled (in volatile memory; not stored permanently), and the
REPORT PERIOD, which is the time interval of which data are permanently stored to the
Disk-on-Chip data storage and reported to the communication ports.

044100102 Rev A 95
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

The REPORT PERIOD is typically used as the time interval between two permanently
stored data points. The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and determines
the frequency of data collection, i.e. how many times the iDAS records a parameter and
stores it in a (volatile) data array for further processing and averaging. In conjunction with
the REPORT PERIOD, the SAMPLE PERIOD determines the number of data points in each
average value.

If, for example, the NOX concentration parameter is configured with a SAMPLE PERIOD set
to once per minute (default setting) and the REPORT PERIOD set to once per hour, the
resulting data will be hourly, arithmetic means calculated from N=60 data points. Calibra-
tion and hold-off procedures as well as power-outs during that one hour will reduce the
number of records per concentration average. For statistical analysis, the number of records
per average data point for any given parameter within one data channel can also be stored.

Configuring the SAMPLE PERIOD and the REPORT PERIOD for the same value, for
example once per hour, will result in an instantaneous reading once per hour. This value
would be the same as a reading configured for an instantaneous (INST) data type once per
hour instead of an AVG type.

SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD are defined to be from the beginning to the end
of the respective clock interval. A one-minute period starts and ends with the full minutes of
the analyzer clock, an hourly period starts and ends with the full hour of the analyzer’s
clock and so on, even if the iDAS data collection was started within those periods. A one-
minute data point, which is the lowest setting for any period, is always an instantaneous
value, even when configured as an AVG event (although that data point is internally
averaged over about 30 milli-seconds of analog data readings).

Note on averages in progress when instrument is powered off:

The iDAS is capable of averaging parameters over very long time intervals (REPORT
PERIOD up to 366 days). If the instrument is powered off during an averaging interval and
before the average is permanently stored in memory, the samples accumulated so far for
that REPORT PERIOD are lost. On the other hand, if the instrument is powered up during
an averaging interval, the iDAS begins averaging samples from that point onward (or after
the hold-off period) until the scheduled end of the REPORT PERIOD when the data point is
permanently stored.

96 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To define the SAMPLE or REPORT PERIOD, press SETUP-DAS-EDIT-ENTR and the

following keys:

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Use the PREV and NEXT Exits to the main
keys to scroll to the data PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
channel to be edited. menu.

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

Press SET> key until you reach REPORT PERIOD (OR SAMPLE PERIOD) …

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0

Set the number of days
between reports (0-366). 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

Press keys to set hours

SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:01
between reports in the format :
HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a ENTR accepts the new string and
0 1 0 0 ENTR EXIT returns to the previous menu.
24 hour clock . PM hours are 13 EXIT ignores the new string and
thru 23, midnight is 00:00. returns to the previous menu.
Example 2:15 PM = 14:15 IIf at any time an illegal entry is selected (e.g., days > 366)
the ENTR key will disappear from the display.

6.10.2.7. Number of Records

The number of data records in the M200E is limited to a cumulative one million data points
in all channels (one megabyte of space on the disk-on-chip). However, the actual number of
records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels and other settings in
the iDAS configuration. Every additional data channel, parameter, number of samples
setting etc. will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat. In general,
however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and
parameters (max: 50 per channel).

The iDAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specify-
ing too many records at any given point. If, for example, the iDAS memory space can
accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify
more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also make an upload
of an iDAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if the combined number
of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either try from the front panel
what the maximum number of records can be or use trial-and-error in designing the iDAS
script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals. To set the
number of records for one channel from the front panel, press SETUP-DAS-EDIT-ENTR and
the following key sequence.

044100102 Rev A 97
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Exits to the main
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
menu

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:000

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

SETUP X.X EDIT RECOPRDS (DELET DATA)

NO returns to the
YES will delete all data YES NO previous menu.
in this channel.

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the
Toggle keys to set previous menu.
number of records SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0 EXIT ignores the new setting
(1-99999) and returns to the previous
0 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT menu.

6.10.2.8. RS-232 Report Function

The M200E iDAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they
can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user.

98 044100102 Rev A
Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

To enable automatic COM port reporting, press SETUP-DAS-ENTR and then:

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Exits to the main
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
menu

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the
previous menu.
SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF EXIT ignores the new setting
Toggle key to turn and returns to the previous
reporting ON or OFF OFF ENTR EXIT menu.

6.10.2.9. Compact Report

When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead of
reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are
reported in one line, instead. For example, channel DIAG would report its record in two lines
(10 parameters) instead of 10 lines. Individual lines carry the same time stamp and are
labeled in sequence.

6.10.2.10. Starting Date

This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to
start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is in the past,
the iDAS ignores this setting.

6.10.2.11. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels

Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the
disk-on-chip. The HIRES channel of the M200E, for example, is disabled by default.

044100102 Rev A 99
Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

To disable a data channel, press SETUP-DAS-ENTR and the following keys:

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Exits to the main
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
menu

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON and returns to the previous
Toggle key to turn menu.
channel ON or OFF OFF ENTR EXIT

6.10.2.12. HOLDOFF Feature

The iDAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during
the DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (Section 6.5). To enable or
disable the HOLDOFF for any one iDAS channel, press SETUP-DAS-ENTR and then:

FROM THE DAS PASSWORD MENU

Edit Data Channel Menu

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
Exits to the main
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition
menu

SETUP X.X NAME:CONC

<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON

SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON EXIT ignores the new setting
Toggle key to turn and returns to the previous
HOLDOFF ON or OFF ON ENTR EXIT menu.

100 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.10.3. Remote iDAS Configuration

Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in Section 6.9.10 is much
more conveniently done in one step through the APICOM remote control program using the
graphical interface shown in Figure 6-6. Refer to the next Section 6.11 for details on remote
access to the M200E analyzer.

Figure 6-6: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the iDAS

Once an iDAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting
DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a
computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. Refer to the APICOM
manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user manual (T-API part number
039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

Although T-API recommends the use of APICOM, the iDAS can also be accessed and
configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal (Figure 6-7).
However, all configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted
in from of a text file, which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer
procedure.

044100102 Rev A 101

Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 6-7: iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program

Both procedures are best started by downloading the default iDAS configuration, getting
familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions, and then altering a copy of the
original file offline before uploading the new configuration.

CAUTION
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of iDAS channels and parameters of one
channel through the front-panel keyboard can be done without affecting the other
channels, uploading an iDAS configuration script to the analyzer through its
communication ports will erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing
them with the new iDAS configuration. It is advised to download and backup all
data and the original iDAS configuration before attempting any iDAS changes.

6.11. Remote Operation of the Analyzer

6.11.1. Basic Operation

6.11.1.1. Terminal Operating Modes

The Model 200E can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through
the serial ports. As terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the
analyzer supports two communicate modes specifically designed to interface with these two
types of devices.

102 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM. More information regarding APICOM can be found in
later in this section or on the T-API website at http://www.teledyne-
api.com/software/apicom/.

Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a

“dumb” computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this
mode are listed in Table 6-23.

6.11.1.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode

Table 6-23: Terminal Mode Software Commands

COMMAND Function
Control-T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF,
the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.
Control-C Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
CR A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the
(carriage terminal/computer. The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed
return) until this is done. On personal computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER
key.
BS Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.
(backspace)
ESC Erases the entire command line.
(escape)
? [ID] CR This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the
definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer
being used. The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers
are on the same communications line, such as the multi-drop setup.
Control-C Pauses the listing of commands.
Control-P Restarts the listing of commands.

6.11.1.3. Command Syntax

Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers,
keywords, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.

All Commands follow the syntax:

X [ID] COMMAND <CR>

Where

X is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command.
Allowed designators are listed in Table 6-24 and Appendix A-6.

[ID] is the analyzer identification number (Section 6.10.1). Example: the

Command “? 200” followed by a carriage return would print the list of
available commands for the revision of software currently installed in
the instrument assigned ID Number 200.

044100102 Rev A 103

Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command
being issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may
have additional arguments that define how the command is to be
executed. Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of available
command designators.

<CR> is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage

return (usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).

Table 6-24: Command Types

Command Command Type

C Calibration
D Diagnostic
L Logon
T Test measurement
V Variable
W Warning

6.11.1.4. Data Types

Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean

expressions and text strings.

• Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a
filter length, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or
more digits. For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers.
• Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist
of the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-
f), which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. No plus or minus sign is
permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers.
• Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as
temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of
an optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an optional decimal
point, and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear before or after the
decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -
0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.
• Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that
may assume only two values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.
• Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other
data types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers.
They consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters,
including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark. For
example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not possible
to include a quotation mark character within a text string.
• Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such as
iDAS data channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the
entire name of the item; you cannot abbreviate any names.

104 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

6.11.2. Status Reporting

Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the
RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the
instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable the
reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (Section 6.9.6, Table 6-18).

Status reports include iDAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages, calibra-
tion and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible
messages, and this section for information on controlling the instrument through the
RS-232 interface.

General Message Format

All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request)
are in the format:

X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>

Where:

X is a command type designator, a single character indicating the

message type, as shown in the Table 6-21.

DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It
consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour
of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a
number from 00 to 59.

[ID] is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.

MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages, test
measurements, iDAS reports, variable values, etc.

<CRLF> is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.

The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse
them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any
information on the time a message was issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for
trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as Hyper-
Terminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.

6.11.3. Remote Access by Modem

The M200E can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between
the analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from
T-API with part number WR0000024).

Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct
position. Also make sure the M200E COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with
the modem, which needs to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.

044100102 Rev A 105

Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64,
Section 6.10.2.11). Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your
modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is

AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0

This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100
characters long.

To change this setting press:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

EXIT returns
to the SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
previous
menu COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y∅ &D∅ &H

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Select which SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM Port is ENTR accepts the
tested ID COM1 COM2 EXIT
new string and returns
SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y∅ &D∅ &H to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
<CH CH> INS DEL [A] ENTR EXIT string and returns to
the previous menu.
The <CH and CH>
keys move the [ ]
cursor left and right
along the text Press the [?]
string key repeatedly to cycle through the
available character set:
The INS key The DEL key 0-9
inserts a character deletes a character A-Z
before the cursor at the cursor space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ =
location. location.
+[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

6.11.4. COM Port Password Security

In order to provide security for remote access of the M200E, a LOGON feature can be
enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by
turning on the SECURITY MODE (Mode 4, Section 6.10.2.11). Once the SECURITY MODE
is enabled, the following items apply.

• A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.

• If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be
achieved with the LOGOFF command.
• Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subse-
quent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.
• If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.
• The following messages will be returned at logon:
• LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given.
• LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect.
• LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully.
To log on to the model 200E analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:

106 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions

LOGON 940331

940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable
RS232_PASS issued as follows:

V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN

Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.

6.11.5. APICOM Remote Control Program

APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows to access and control
any of T-API's main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection
through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Section 6.10.3 and Figure 6-6 showed the remote
iDAS configuration through APICOM, Figure 6-8 shows the main interface, which resembles
and emulates the actual front panel functionality.

Figure 6-8: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface

Running APICOM, a user can:

• Establish a link from a remote location to the M200E through direct cable connection
via RS-232 modem or Ethernet.
• View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be
accessed when standing in front of the instrument.
• View multiple instruments (including calibrators) from multiple sites at the same
time.
• Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.
• Remotely edit system parameters and set points.

044100102 Rev A 107

Operating Instructions Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.
• Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload iDAS configurations.
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-shooting.
APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer or can be downloaded for free at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

6.11.6. Additional Communications Documentation

Table 6-25: Serial Interface Documents

Interface / Available
Document Title Part Number
Tool Online*
Multi-drop RS-232 Multi-drop Documentation 021790000 YES
DAS Manual Detailed description of the iDAS 028370000 YES
APICOM APICOM User Manual 039450000 YES
Hessen Hessen Protocol 4.0 Manual Addendum 045850000 YES
protocol
* These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/

108 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

7. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This chapter describes calibration procedures for the M200E. All of the methods described
here can be initiated and controlled through the front panel or the COM ports.

NOTE
If you are using the M200E for US-EPA controlled monitoring, see Chapter 8 for
information on the EPA calibration protocol.

7.1. Calibration Preparations

The calibration procedures in this section assume that the range mode, analog range and
units of measure have already been selected for the analyzer. If this has not been done,
please do so before continuing (Section 6.5 for instructions).

7.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables

Calibration of the Model 200E analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and
supplies. These include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Zero-air source (defined in Section 3.3.2).

• Span gas source (defined in Section 3.3.1).
• Gas lines - all gas line materials should be stainless steel or Teflon-type (PTFE or
FEP). High concentration NO gas transported over long distances may require
stainless steel to avoid oxidation of NO with O2 diffusing into the tubing.
• A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional). For
electronic documentation, the internal data acquisition system can be used.

7.1.2. Zero Air

Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all
components that might affect the analyzer’s readings. For NOX measuring devices, zero air
should be devoid of NOX and large amounts of CO2, NH3 and water vapor. Water vapor and
moderate amounts of NH3 can be removed using a sample gas conditioner (Section 5.8).

Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by drying
and removal of pollutants are available. We recommend this type of device for generating
zero air. Please contact our sales department for more information on this.

7.1.3. Span Gas Standards

As explained in detail in Section 3.3.1, span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical
composition of the gas being measured at about 80% of the desired full measurement
range. For example, if the measurement range is 500 ppb, the span gas should have an NO
concentration of about 400 ppb.

044100102 Rev A 109

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with NO span gas, although it is
possible to use NO2 or a gas phase titration (GPT) system. Quick span checks may be done
with either NO, NO2 or a mixture of NO and NO2 as is used in GPT. Span gases should be
certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the analyzer. Typical gas
accuracy for NOX gases is 1 or 2%. NO standards should be mixed in nitrogen (to prevent
oxidation of NO to NO2 over time), whereas NO2 standards should be mixed in air (to keep
it oxidized).

7.1.4. NO2 Permeation Tubes

T-API offers an internal zero / span (IZS) option operating with an NO2 permeation device.
The accuracy of these devices is only about ±5%. Whereas this may be sufficient for quick,
daily calibration checks, we recommend to use certified NO gases for accurate calibration.
Note that US-EPA controlled applications do not allow permeation devices to be used for
calibration.

7.1.5. Calibration Gas Traceability

All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the
National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we
recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST
standard reference materials (SRM). These are available from a variety of commercial
sources.

7.1.6. Data Recording Devices

A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be
used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the M200E. If analog readings are
used, the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable
voltage source or meter. Data recording devices should be capable of bi-polar operation so
that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording, the M200E provides
an internal data acquisition system (iDAS), which is described in detail in Section 6.9.10.
APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for
data handling, download, storage, quick check and plotting.

7.1.7. NO2 Conversion Efficiency

To ensure accurate operation of the M200E, it is important to check the NO2 conversion
efficiency (CE) periodically and to update this value as necessary. The default setting for the
NO2 converter efficiency is 1.0000. For the analyzer to function correctly, the converter
efficiency must be between 0.9600 and 1.0200 (96-102% conversion efficiency) as per US-
EPA requirements. If the converter’s efficiency is outside these limits, the NO2 converter
should be replaced. The currently programmed CE is recorded along with the calibration
data in the iDAS for documentation and performance analysis (Section 6.10.2.1).

The following procedure will cause the Model 200E to automatically calculate the current
NO2 conversion efficiency.

Step one is to connect a source of calibrated NO2 span gas as shown below.

110 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

Calibrated
NO2 gas
Source of
(high
concentration) Gas Dilution SAMPLE Gas
removed
Calibrator during
(with O3 generator procedure
option)

VENT
Zero Air Source Sample

Pump
Exhaust
MODEL
Span
200E
Zero Air

Figure 7-1: Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency

Step two is to set the expected NO2 span gas concentration:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

This step only appears if the

analyzer’s reporting range is set
SAMPLE A RANGE TO CAL: LOW NOX=X.X for AUTO range mode.
Select LOW and press ENTR.
LOW HIGH ENTR Repeat entire procedure for
HIGH range.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

The expected NO2 span concentration value

defaults to 400.0 Conc.
M-P CAL CO SPAN CONC: 400.0 Conc Make sure that you specify the actual
concentration value of the span gas. To
change this value to the concentration of the
0 0 4 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT span gas, enter the number by pressing the
key under each digit until the value is visble.

ENTR accepts the expected NO2 span

concentration value.

EXIT ignores the expected NO2 span

concentration value.

044100102 Rev A 111

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

Step three is to perform the converter efficiency calculation procedure:

Continue from the

CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
(step two above)

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

M-P CAL CE FACTOR: 1.0000 GAIN

1. 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

Wait until the ACTION:

reading Supply NO2 span gas to the instrument.
stabilizes and
the ENTR
button is
displayed SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X When ENTR is pressed, the ratio
of observed NO2 concentration to
expected NO2 concentration is
< TST TST > ENTR EXIT calculated and stored.

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

NO2 CAL SET EXIT

NOTE:
The converter efficiency must be
between 0.9600 and 1.0200,
otherwise the NO2 converter M-P CAL CE FACTOR: 0.9852 GAIN
needs to be replaced. 3x EXIT to return to the
0. 9 8 5 2 ENTR EXIT main SAMPLE display.

7.2. Manual Calibration

The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model 200E
NOX analyzer.

A note on the difference between a calibration and calibration check: pressing the ENTR key
during the following procedures recalculates the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE
(instrument response curve) and alters the instrument’s calibration. Alternatively, you can
check on the current values and response and then EXIT out of any menu before pressing
the final ENTR key to leave all settings intact (Section 7.3).

112 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

7.2.1. Connect Zero Air and Span Gases to the Analyzer

Source of
sample gas
Calibrated NO removed
gas during
(high MODEL 700 Gas calibration
concentration) Dilution
Calibrator
(with O3 generator
option)

Sample
MODEL 701
Vent excess gas
Zero Air
Generator
Exhaust
MODEL
Span
200E
Pump

Zero Air

OR
Source of
Calibrated NO SAMPLE Gas
gas
removed
(At span gas
during
concentration)
calibration
Needle valve to
control flow

Valve

Sample
MODEL 701
Zero Air VENT
Exhaust
MODEL
Generator Span
200E
Pump
Zero Air

Figure 7-2: Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option

7.2.2. Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected NOx span
concentration.
M-P CAL RANGE = 500.0 PPB NO = X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU

NOX NO CONV EXIT

M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC: 400.0 Conc

0 0 4 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

The NOX & NO span concentration

values automatically default to EXIT ignores the new setting and
M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU returns to the
400.0 Conc.
To change this value to the CONCENTRATION MENU.
concentration of the span gas, enter NOX NO CONV EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and
the number by pressing the key returns to the
under each digit until the value is CONCENTRATION MENU..
set.
M-P CAL NO SPAN CONC: 450.0 Conc

0 0 4 5 0 .0 ENTR EXIT

044100102 Rev A 113

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

NOTE
The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same
value unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered
properly in the conversion efficiency setting. When setting expected concentration
values, consider impurities in your span gas source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2
and vice versa).

7.2.3. Perform Zero/Span Calibration:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X
Scroll the display to the NOX
STB function, which calculates
< TST TST > CAL SETUP the standard deviation of the
NO/NOx measurement

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO = X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

ACTION:
Supply the instrument with zero air.
Wait until NOX
STB falls below
0.5 ppb. This
may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL NOX STB=0.5 PPB NO2= X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

M-P CAL NOX STB=0.5 PPB NOX= X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

Press ENTR to change the OFFSET
Analyzer & SLOPE values for both the NO
continues to cycle and NOX measurements.
through NOX, NO, M-P CAL NOX STB=0.5 PPB NO = X.X Press EXIT to leave the calibration
and NO2 unchanged and return to the
measurements . previous menu (for cal checks).
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT

ACTION:
Supply the instrument with span gas. The value of NOX
STB may jump
significantly. Wait
until it falls back
below 0.5 ppb. This
may take several
M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO2= X.X minutes.

The SPAN key now

appears during the < TST TST > SPAN CONC EXIT
transition from zero
to span. You may
see both keys. Press ENTR to change the
M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX = X.X OFFSET & SLOPE values for both
the NO and NOx measurements.

< TST TST > ENTR SPAN CONC EXIT Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu (for cal checks).

M-P CAL NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO2 =X.X

EXIT returns to the main
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT SAMPLE display

114 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

If the ZERO or SPAN keys are not displayed during zero or span calibration, the measured
concentration value is too different from the expected value and the analyzer does not allow
to zero or span the instrument. Consult Section 11.3 for calibration problems.

7.3. Calibration Checks

Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response
curve, are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the
analyzer’s performance. To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow
these steps.

Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7-2, then perform the
zero/span calibration check procedure:

ACTION:
Supply the instrument with zero gas.

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.XX

Scroll the display to the
NOX STB test function. < TST TST > CAL SETUP

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO = X.X

< TST TST > CAL SETUP

Wait until NOX
STB is below
0.5 ppb. This ACTION:
may take Record the NOX,
several minutes. SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO =X.XX
NO2 & NO
readings.
< TST TST > CAL SETUP

The value of NOX ACTION:

STB may jump Supply span gas to the instrument
significantly.
Wait until it falls
below 0.5 ppb. This
may take several
ACTION:
minutes.
SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO2=X.XX Record the NOX,
NO2 & NO
readings.
< TST TST > CAL SETUP

The SPAN key appears during the transition from zero to

span. You may see both keys.

7.4. Calibration with Zero/Span Valves

To perform a manual calibration or calibration check of the analyzer with a zero/span valve
option installed and functioning, use the following method. The basic differences between
calibrating an M200E with the zero/span valve option instead of the basic calibration
method (Section 7.2) are that zero air and span gas are now supplied through dedicated

044100102 Rev A 115

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

gas inlets rather than through the sample inlet and that the zero and span operations are
initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys CALZ and CALS.

Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel
(Figure 3-2) to follow the setup in Figure 7-4. Set the expected NO and NOX values
according to the procedure described in Section 7.2.

Perform the calibration or calibration check according to the following flow chart:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.XX

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

Scroll the display to the NOX

STB test function. This function
SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO = X.XX
calculates the stability of the
NO/NOX measurements.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument. Wait until NOX
ANALYZER ENTERS
ZERO CAL MODE. STB falls below
0.05 ppb. This
may take several
ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XX minutes.

< TST TST > ZERO CONC

ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XX

EXIT returns the unit to
SAMPLE mode without
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT changing the calibration
values.

Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument.

ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP The value of NOX
STB may jump
Analyzer enters SPAN significantly. Wait
CAL Mode. until it falls below 0.5
ppb. This may take
SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XX several minutes.

< TST TST > SPAN CONC EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XX

EXIT returns to the
SAMPLE mode without
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT changing the calibration
values.

Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument.

If either the ZERO or
SPAN button fails to
appear, see Chapter 11
SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XX EXIT returns to the
for troubleshooting tips. main SAMPLE
display
< TST TST > SPAN CONC EXIT

116 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

7.5. Calibration with IZS Option

When using the IZS option to calibrate the M200E, the analyzer’s CAL_ON_NO2 feature
must be turned on. This feature enables a continuous zero gas flow across the IZS
permeation tube and through the NO2 converter (Figure 3-11). It also programs the
analyzer to use the NO output from the NO2 converter to calibrate the span value of both
NO and NOX.

NOTE
The IZS with NO2 permeation tube has a limited accuracy of about ±5%. Whereas
this may be sufficient for informal calibration checks, this method of calibration is
not approved by the US EPA as a calibration source.

This feature should only be enabled when a span calibration or calibration check is
performed. While CAL-ON-NO2 is enabled, the NO2 concentration will always be reported
as zero. This is because the gas is continuously routed through the NO2 converter and the
analyzer’s firmware simulates calibration with NO gas. Since the instrument sees the same
concentration of NO during both NO and NOX cycles, it reports an NO2 concentration of zero.

Table 7-1: IZS Option Valve States with CAL_ON_NO2 Turned ON

Valve Condition Valve Port Connections

Sample/Cal Open to zero/span valve 1!2
Zero/Span Open to SPAN GAS inlet 1!2
NO/NOx Valve Open to NO2 converter 1!2
AutoZero Valve Cycles normally N/A

Performing a manual calibration of the analyzer with an IZS option installed is similar to the
method described in Section 7.4, except that both zero air and span gas are supplied to the
analyzer from ambient air through the zero gas inlet.

1. Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3: Pneumatic Connections for Manual Calibration Checks with IZS

044100102 Rev A 117

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

Set the expected NO and NOX values according to Section 7.2.

Perform the zero point calibration:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X

Set the Display to show the
NOX STB test function.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NO = X.X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Wait until STABIL
value falls below
0.5 ppb. This may
Analyzer enters ZERO CAL
take several
mode
ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X minutes.

< TST TST > ZERO CONC

EXIT terminates
ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X
calibration and returns to
SAMPLE mode.
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT

Pressing ENTR changes the

calibration of the instrument.

ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

If the ZERO button does

ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X X
not appear, see Chapter
11 for troubleshooting.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

Turn ON the CAL_ON_NO2 feature:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

< TST TST > CAL SETUP NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU

Press NEXT until …

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X 8) CAL_ON_NO2 = OFF

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU

PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SETUP X.X 8) CAL_ON_NO2 = ON

SETUP X.X ENTER VARS PASS: 818
ON ENTR EXIT
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new setting.

Toggle this key to change setting ENTR accepts the new setting.

Perform the span calibration procedure:

118 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX= X.X Set the Display to show the NOX
STB test function.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X X

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

Analyzer enters SPAN CAL Wait until the STABIL value
mode. falls below 0.5 ppb. This
may take several minutes.
SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X

< TST TST > SPAN CONC EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X

EXIT terminates the
calibration process and
< TST TST > ENTR CONC EXIT returns the unit to
SAMPLE mode.

Pressing ENTR changes the

calibration of the instrument.

If the SPAN button does

SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X
not appear, see Section EXIT returns to the
SAMPLE mode.
11 for troubleshooting.
< TST TST > SPAN CONC EXIT

Turn off the CAL_ON_NO2 feature (step four above).

7.6. Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero/Span

Valves
To perform a manual calibration check with zero/span valve or IZS option installed:

• Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below.

Figure 7-4: Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z/S Valve or IZS Option

044100102 Rev A 119

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Perform the zero/span check. Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve or
IZS option are similar to that described in Section 7.3, except:
On units with an IZS option installed, zero air is supplied to the analyzer through the zero
gas inlet and the same gas stream is used to create span gas internally using the permea-
tion device.

On units with a zero/span valve option installed, zero air and span gas are supplied to the
analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different sources.

The zero and calibration operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated
keys CALZ and CALS.

Note that there is no option to use a dedicated span gas port if the IZS option is installed.
Span gas from a gas tank would need to be supplied through the Sample port or through
one of the auxiliary ports available on the rear panel (with modified internal plumbing),
although the user could modify the plumbing to have the span gas go through the IZS oven
(without the permeation tube installed).

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.XX

Scroll to the NOX

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
STB test function.

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X

Wait until NOX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
STB falls below
0.5 ppb. This may ACTION:
take several Record the
minutes. NOX, NO2 & NO
ZERO CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X readings presented in
the upper right corner
< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT of the display.

SAMPLE NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.X

ACTION:
The value of NOX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Record the
STB may jump NOX, NO2 & NO
significantly. Wait readings presented in
until NOX STB falls the upper right corner
below 0.5 ppb. This of the display.
may take several SPAN CAL M NOX STB=XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XX
minutes.
EXIT returns to the main
< TST TST > ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT SAMPLE display

7.7. Calibration With Independent or AUTO Ranges

Additional considerations apply when calibrating a Model 200E with reporting ranges set to
AUTO (automatic) or IND (independent) mode (Sections 6.5.4 and 6.5.5).

7.7.1. Calibration in AUTO Range Mode

If the analyzer is operated in AUTO range mode, the high and low ranges must be indepen-
dently calibrated. After pressing the CAL, CALZ or CALS keys, the user is prompted for the
range to be calibrated as seen in the zero calibration example below.

120 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.XX

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL: LOW

LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP

SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL: HIGH

LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP

ZERO CAL M RANGE = 500.0 PPB X=X.XX

Analyzer enters ZERO
CAL mode
< TST TST > ZERO CONC EXIT

…continue Calibration as per

standard procedure

Once this selection is made, the calibration/check procedure continues as described in

Sections 7.2 through 7.6. The other range may be calibrated by starting over from the main
SAMPLE display.

7.7.2. Independent Range Mode

Independent range mode is described in Section 6.5.4. When selecting span gas concentra-
tions for the NO/NOX or NO2 dynamic calibrations, use concentrations around 80% of the
highest reporting range for all gases. This will produce the most accurate calibration.

The span calibration routine is only required to be performed once, unlike AUTO range
mode, which requires separate HIGH and LOW range calibrations. If the calibration data
are obtained from the RS-232 port or from the front panel display, no special changes are
necessary as the IND range mode only affects the scaling of the analog outputs.

7.7.3. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures

Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear
panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be
found in Section 6.8.2.

When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches
into zero, low span or high span mode and internal zero/span valves (if installed) will be
automatically switched to the appropriate configuration. The remote calibration contact
closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that contact closures remain
closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading; the instrument will stay in the
selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed.

If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (Section 7.8) feature
and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled, the M200E will not re-calibrate the
analyzer until the contact is opened. At this point, the new calibration values will be
recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode. If the AutoCal attribute
CALIBRATE is disabled, the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode, leaving the instru-
ment’s internal calibration variables unchanged.

044100102 Rev A 121

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

7.8. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal)

The AutoCal feature allows unattended, periodic operation of the zero/span valve options by
using the analyzer’s internal time of day clock. The AutoCal feature is only available on the
front panel menu (ACAL) if either the zero/span valve or the IZS option is installed.

AutoCal operates by executing user-defined sequences to initiate the various calibration

modes of the analyzer and to open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program
and run up to three separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can
operate in one of three modes or be disabled (Table 7-2).

Table 7-2: AutoCal Modes

Mode Action
Disabled Disables the sequence
Zero Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by
Zero-Span
a span concentration calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a span concentration calibration or
Span
check

Each mode has seven parameters that control operational details of the sequence
(Table 7-3).

Table 7-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters

Parameter Action
Timer Enabled Turns on the sequence timer
Starting Date Sequence will operate on Starting Date
Starting Time Sequence will operate at Starting Time
Delta Days Number of days between each sequence trigger. If set to 7, for example, the
AutoCal feature will be enabled once every week on the same day.
Delta Time Incremental delay on each delta day that the sequence starts. If set to 0, the
sequence will start at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to Delta Days
for the total time between cycles.
This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of
each calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the
days of calibration.
Duration Duration of the each sequence step in minutes. This parameter needs to be set
such that there is enough time for the concentration signal to stabilize. The STABIL
parameter shows if the analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration.
This parameter is logged with calibration values in the iDAS.
Calibrate Enable to do a true, dynamic zero or span calibration; disable to do a calibration
check only. This setting must be OFF for analyzers used in US EPA applications and
with IZS option installed.
RANGE TO CAL LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto
and remote range modes; this property is not available in single and independent
range modes.

122 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

NOTE
The CALIBRATE attribute (formerly called “dynamic calibration”) must always be
set to OFF for analyzers used in US EPA controlled applications that have IZS
option installed.

Calibration of instruments used in US EPA related applications should only be

performed using external sources of zero air and span gas with an accuracy
traceable to EPA or NIST standards and supplied through the analyzer’s
sample port (Section 7.2).

The following example sets sequence #2 to carry out a zero-span calibration every other
day starting at 14:00 on 01 January, 2003, lasting 30 minutes (15 for zero and 15 for
span). This sequence will start 30 minutes later each day.

Table 7-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence

Mode and Attribute Value Comment

Sequence 2 Define sequence #2
Mode ZERO-SPAN Select zero and span mode
Timer Enable ON Enable the timer
Starting Date 01-JAN-03 Start on or after 01 January 2003
Starting Time 14:00 First sequence starts at 14:00 (24-hour clock format)
Delta Days 2 Repeat this sequence every 2 days
Repeat sequence 30 minutes later each time
Delta Time 00:30
(every 2 days and 30 minutes)
Each sequence step will last 15 minutes (total of 30
Duration 15.0
minutes when using zero-span mode)
The instrument will recalculate the slope and offset values
Calibrate ON for the NO and NOX channel at the end of the AutoCal
sequence.

Please note the following suggestions for programming the AutoCal feature.

• The programmed Starting Time must be 5 minutes later than the real time clock
(Section 6.4.3).
• Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new
sequence which is initiated from a timer, the COM ports, or the contact closures will
override any sequence in progress. Note that two sequences with different daily
increments may eventually overlap.
• If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366) the ENTR
key will disappear from the display.
• With CALIBRATE turned on, the state of the internal setup variables
DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope
and offset values for the NO and NOX response each time the AutoCal program runs.
This continuous re-adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault
conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if CALIBRATE is enabled, the
analyzer’s test functions, slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure
high quality and accurate data from the instrument.

044100102 Rev A 123

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

To program the sample sequence shown above, follow this flow chart:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:14:15

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP <SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS: 1

CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT <SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle keys
to set
number of
SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS: 1 days
between
NEXT MODE EXIT 0 0 2 ENTR EXIT procedures
(1-367)

SETUP X.X SEQ 2) DISABLED SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS:2

PREV NEXT MODE EXIT <SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X MODE: DISABLED SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME00:00

NEXT ENTR EXIT <SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Toggle keys
to set
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO delay time for
SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME: 00:00
each iteration
of the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT 0 0 :3 0 ENTR EXIT sequence:
HH:MM
(0 – 24:00)
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO–SPAN SETUP C.4 DELTA TIEM:00:30

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT <SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 1:00:00

SETUP C.4 DURATION:15.0 M INUTES
PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT Toggle keys
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT to set
duration for
each
Default SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE: ON iteration of
value is SETUP C.4 DURATION 15.0MINUTES the
ON sequence:
SET> EDIT EXIT Set in
3 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
Decimal
minutes
from
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02 0.1 – 60.0
SETUP C.4 DURATION:30.0 M INUTES
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Toggle keys
to set
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
day, month & SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: OFF
year:
0 4 SEP 0 3 ENTR EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Format :
DD-MON-Y Y
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03 Toggle key
SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: OFF between
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT Off and
ON ENTR EXIT ON

SETUP C.4 STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03

SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:00:00

Toggle keys to
SETUP C.4 SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30 EXIT returns
set time:
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT to the SETUP
Format : HH:MM
PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT Menu
This is a 24 hr
clock .
PM hours are SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:00:00 Sequence Delta Time
13 – 24. MODE Delta Days
Example 1 4 :1 5 ENTR EXIT
2:15 PM = 14:15

7.9. Calibration Quality Analysis

After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to
evaluate the analyzer’s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values describe
the linear response curve of the analyzer, separately for NO and NOX. The values for these
terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality of the calibration. To

124 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures

perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of the following test
functions (Section 6.2.1 or Appendix A-3), all of which are automatically stored in the iDAS
channel CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival.

• NO OFFS
• NO SLOPE
• NOX OFFS
• NOX SLOPE
Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 7-5 and frequently
compare them to those values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet that came attached to
your manual, which should not be significantly different. If they are, refer to the trouble-
shooting Chapter 11.

Table 7-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation

Function Minimum Value Optimum Value Maximum Value

NOX SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300
NO SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300
NOX OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV
NO OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV

The default iDAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as
all calibration check (zero and span) values in its internal memory. Up to 200 data points
are stored for up 4 years of data (on weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime history of
monthly calibrations. Review these data to see if the zero and span responses change over
time. These channels also store the STABIL figure (standard deviation of NOX concentration)
to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration
procedure. Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and
documentation.

044100102 Rev A 125

Calibration Procedures Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

126 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

8. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION

To ensure high quality, accurate measurements at all times, the M200E analyzer must be
calibrated prior to use. A quality assurance program centered on this aspect and including
attention to the built-in warning features of the analyzer, periodic inspection, regular
zero/span checks, regular evaluation of test parameters for predictive diagnostics and data
analysis and routine maintenance of the instrument are paramount to achieving this goal.

The US EPA strongly recommends to obtain a copy of the Quality Assurance Handbook for
Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Part I (abbreviated Q.A. Handbook
Volume II). A new revision of this handbook is in progress8. A draft version of Section 2.3
can be downloaded online8 and should be consulted as the latest reference about NO2
measurements.

Special attention should be paid to Section 2.3 of the handbook8 which covers the
measurement of NO2. Specific regulations regarding the use and operation of ambient NOx
analyzers can be found in Reference 1 at the end of this chapter.

If the M200E is used for EPA compliance monitoring, it must be calibrated in accordance
with the instructions in this section.

8.1. Calibration of Equipment

In general, calibration is the process of adjusting the gain and offset of the M200E against a
standard with certified, traceable concentration. The reliability of data derived from the
analyzer depends primarily upon its state of calibration. In this section the term dynamic
calibration is used to express a multipoint calibration against known standards. It involves
introducing gas samples of known concentration into the instrument in order to adjust the
instrument to a predetermined sensitivity and to produce a calibration relationship. This
relationship is derived from the instrumental response to successive samples of different,
known concentrations. As a minimum, three reference points and a zero point are recom-
mended to define this relationship. The true values of the calibration gas must be traceable
to NIST-SRM (Section 2.0.7, Q.A. Handbook).

All monitoring systems are subject to some drift and variation in internal parameters and
cannot be expected to maintain accurate calibration over long periods of time. Therefore, it
is necessary to dynamically check the calibration relationship on a predetermined schedule.
Zero and span checks must be used to document that the data remain within control limits.
These checks are also used in data reduction and validation. The internal data acquisition
system of the M200E allows to store all calibration checks (as well as full calibrations) over
long periods of time for documentation. Table 8-1 summarizes the initial quality assurance
activities for calibrating equipment. Table 8-2 is a matrix for the actual, dynamic calibration
procedure.

Calibrations should be carried out at the field monitoring site. The analyzer should be in
operation for at least several hours (preferably overnight) before calibration so that it is
fully warmed up and its operation has stabilized. During the calibration, the M200E should
be in the CAL mode, and therefore sample the test atmosphere through all components
used during normal ambient sampling and through as much of the ambient air inlet system
as is practicable. If the instrument will be used on more than one range, it should be
calibrated separately on each applicable range, see Section 6.6. Calibration documentation
should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file.

044100102 Rev A 127

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 8-1: Activity Matrix for EPA Calibration Equipment and Supplies

Equipment/ Frequency And Method Action If Requirements

Acceptance Limits
Supplies Of Measurement Are Not Met
Recorder Compatible with output signal Check upon receipt Return equipment to
of analyzer; min chart width of supplier
150 mm (6 in) is recommended
Sample line Constructed of PTFE, glass or Check upon receipt Return equipment to
and manifold stainless steel supplier
Calibration Meets guidelines and Section See Section 2.3.9 of Q. Return equipment/
equipment 2.3.2 of Q. A. Handbook A. Handbook supplies to supplier or
take corrective action
Working Traceable to NIST-SRM. Meets Analyzed against NIST- Obtain new working
standard NO limits in traceability protocol for SRM; see protocol in standard and check for
cylinder gas accuracy and stability. Section 2.0.7, Q.A. traceability
Section 2.0.7 of Q. A. Handbook Handbook
Recording Develop standard forms N/A Revise forms as
forms appropriate
Audit Cannot be the same as used for System must be Locate problem and
equipment calibration checked out against correct or return to
known standards supplier

Table 8-2: Activity Matrix for Calibration Procedure

Equipment/ Frequency And Method Action If Requirements

Acceptance Limits
Supplies Of Measurement Are Not Met
Calibration Sec. 2.0.7, Q.A. Handbook Assayed against an Working gas standard is
gases NIST-SRM quarterly, unstable, and/or
Sec. 2.0.7 measurement method is
(Q.A. Handbook) out of control; take
corrective action such as
obtaining new calibration
gas
Dilution gas Zero air, free of contaminants; See TAD2 Return to supplier or take
TAD2 and Sec. 2.0.7, Subsec. appropriate action with
7.1, Q.A. Handbook generation system
Multi-point tR < 2 minutes PR Method: Section 7.2 of Adjust flow conditions
calibration > 2.75 ppm/min this manual) and/or reaction cell
(GPT) Use calibration procedure in Q.A CFR Title 401, volume to meet
Handbook; also CFR1 Appendix F suggested limits

Converter efficiency > 96% Repeat the calibration

Replace or service the
converter

128 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

8.2. Gas Phase Titration (GPT)

8.2.1. GPT Principle of Operation

Gas phase titration (GPT) is recommended for calibration of the M200E. Those using a NO2
permeation tube should refer to the CFR1.

The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O3 which
produces stoichiometric quantities of NO2 as shown by the following equation:

→ NO2 + O2 + hν
NO + O3 

Given that the O3 concentration is known for this reaction, the resultant concentration of
NO2 can be determined. Ozone is added to excess NO in a dynamic calibration system as
shown in Figure 8-1, and the NO channel of the chemiluminescence analyzer detects the
changes in NO concentration. After the addition of O3, the observed decrease in NO
concentration on the calibrated NO channel is equivalent to the concentration of NO2
produced. The amount of generated NO2 may be varied by adding varying amounts of O3
from a stable O3 generator. All zero air used in this procedure should conform to the
requirements stated in Section 8.1 of this manual.

Dynamic calibration systems based on this principle are commercially available, or may be
assembled by the user. A recommended calibration system is described in the Federal
Register1 CFR1.

8.2.2. GPT Calibrator Check Procedure

It has been empirically determined that the NO-O3 reaction is complete (<1% residual O3) if
the NO concentration in the reaction cell (ppm) multiplied by the residence time (min.) of
the reactants in the chamber is >2.75 ppm min. The theory behind the development of this
equation is in the Federal Register1. The following procedures and equations should be used
to determine whether an existing GPT calibration system will meet required conditions for a
specific calibration.

For calibrators that have known pre-set flow rates, use equations 8-5 and 8-6 of steps 7
and 8 (below) to verify the required conditions. If the calibrator does not meet
specifications, follow the complete procedure to determine what flow modifications must be
made.

Select an NO standard gas that has a nominal concentration in the range of 50 to 100 ppm.
Determine the exact concentration [NO]STD by referencing against an NIST-SRM, as
discussed in the Q.A. Handbook.

Determine the volume (cm3) of the calibrator reaction cell (VRC). If the actual volume is not
known, estimate the volume by measuring the approximate dimensions of the chamber and
using an appropriate formula.

Determine the required minimum total flow output (FT) using Equation 8-1:

FT = analyzer flow demand (cm3/min) x 110/100 Eq 8-1

044100102 Rev A 129

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

If more than one analyzer is to be calibrated at the same time, multiply FT by the number of
analyzers.

Calculate the NO concentration [NO]OUT needed to approximate 90% of the URL of the NO2
analyzer to be calibrated, using Equation 8-2:

[NO]OUT = URL of analyzer (ppm) x 90/100 Eq 8-2

Calculate the NO flow (FNO) required to generate the NO concentration [NO]OUT, using
Equation 8-3:

[NO ] OUT x F T
F NO = Eq 8-3
[NO ] STD
Calculate the required flow through the ozone generator (FO), using Equation 8-4:

[NO ] STD X F NO X V RC
Fo = - F NO Eq 8-4
2.75 ppm - min
Verify that the residence time (tR) in the reaction cell is <2 min, using Equation 8-5:

VRC
tR = ≤ 2 min
FO + FNO Eq 8-5

Verify that the dynamic parameter specification (PR) of the calibrator's reaction cell is
>2.75 ppm-min using Equation 8-6:

PR = [NO ]STD ×
FNO VRC
× ≥ 2.75 Eq 8-6
FO + FNO FO + FNO

NOTE
If tr is >2 minutes or if PR is <2.75 ppm min, changes in flow conditions
(FT, FO, FNO) or in the reaction cell volume (VRC), or both will
have to be made, and tr and PR will have to be recalculated.

After equations 8-5 and 8-6 are satisfied, calculate the diluent air flow (FD) using
Equation 8-7:

FD = FT − FO − FNO Eq 8-7

130 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

8.2.3. Example GPT Calculation

Following is an example calculation that can be used to determine whether an existing GPT
calibrator will meet the required conditions for a specific calibration. For this example, it is
assumed that only the volume of the reaction cell, VRC, and the concentration of the NO
standard, [NO]STD, are known. All flow settings (FNO, FO, FT, and FD) will be calculated. In
many uses, these flow settings are known and need only to be substituted in Equations 8-5
and 8-6 to verify the required conditions. Before doing any calculations, the URL and flow
demand of the analyzer being calibrated must be known. Operating parameters are
determined from the operations manual:

• Upper range limit = 0.5 ppm, and

• Flow demand = 500 cm3/min.
• Volume of calibrator reaction cell is determined by physical measurement: VRC = 180
cm3
• The concentration of the NO standard gas to be used is determined by reference
against an NIST-SRM (Section 2.0.7, Q.A. Handbook): [NO]STD = 50.5 ppm
Determine the minimum total flow (FT) required at the output manifold using Equation 8-1:

FT = 500 cm3/min (110/100) = 550 cm3/min

Because low flows are difficult to control and measure, it is often advantageous to set a
higher total flow than needed. In this example, we will set FT to 2750 cm3/min.

Determine the highest NO concentration, [NO]OUT, required at the output manifold, using
Equation 8-2:

[NO]OUT = 0.5 ppm (90/100) = 0.45 ppm

Calculate the NO flow (FNO) required to generate the NO concentration [NO]OUT, using
Equation 8-3:

0.45 ppm × 2750 cm3 / min

F NO = = 24.5 cm3 / min
50.5 ppm

Calculate the required flow rate through ozone generator (FO) using Equation 8-4:

50.5 ppm x 24.5 cm3 /min x 180 cm3

FO = - 24.5 cm3 / min
2.75 ppm - min

= 80984 cm6 / min2 - 24.5 cm3 /min = 260 cm3 /min

Verify that the residence time (tR) in the reaction cell is <2 min using Equation 8-5:

180 cm3
tR = = 0.63 min
260 cm3 / min+ 24.5 cm3 / min

044100102 Rev A 131

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

Verify the dynamic parameter specification (PR) of the calibrator reaction cell using
Equation 8-6:

24 cm3 / min 180 cm3

PR = 50.5 ppm × × = 2.75 ppm − min
260 cm3 / min+ 24.5 cm3 / min 260 cm3 / min+ 24.5 cm3 / min

Calculate the diluent air flow (FD) required at the mixing chamber, using Equation 8-7:

FD = 2750 cm3/min - 260 cm3/min - 24.5 cm3/min = 2465.5 cm3/min

8.3. Multipoint Calibration Procedure

The procedure for calibration of chemiluminescence NOx analyzers by GPT is specified in the
Federal Register.1 This section applies the general procedure to the specific case of the
M200E.

Calibration must be performed with a calibrator that meets all conditions specified in the
Q.A. Handbook. Flow settings used in the GPT calibration for NO2 must be determined as
illustrated in Section 3.6, this manual.

The user should be sure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use
against a reliable standard. All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25o C (78oF)
and 760 mm (29.92 in.) Hg. Calibrations of flow meters are discussed in the QA Handbook,
Vol. II, Part 1, Appendix 126.

Gas Phase Titration (GPT) requires the use of the NO channel of the analyzer to determine
the amount of NO2 generated by titration. Therefore it is necessary to calibrate and
determine the linearity of the NO channel before proceeding with the NO2 calibration. It is
also necessary to calibrate the NOx channel. This can be done simultaneously with the NO
calibration. During the calibration the M200E should be operating in its normal sampling
mode, and the test atmosphere should pass through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and
other components used during normal ambient sampling and as much of the ambient air
inlet system as is practicable. All operational adjustments to the M200E should be
completed prior to the calibration. The following software features must be set into the
desired state before calibration.

• Automatic converter efficiency compensation. See Section 7.1.7 of this manual.

• Independent reporting range selection. See Section 6.5.4 of this manual.
• Automatic temperature/pressure compensation. See Section 6.5.
• Alternate units, make sure ppb units are selected for EPA monitoring. See
Section 6.5.6.
• Auto ranging reporting range option. See Section 6.5.5.

132 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

Figure 8-1: GPT Calibration System

Converter efficiency should be set prior to calibration since its value is used in the
computation of the NOX and NO2 concentration outputs.

The analyzer should be calibrated on the same range used for monitoring.

If auto ranging or independent range options are selected the highest of the ranges will
result in the most accurate calibration, and should be used.

Make sure the GPT calibration system can supply the range of concentrations at a sufficient
flow over the whole range of concentrations that will be encountered during calibration.

8.3.1. Zero Calibration

The zero point calibration procedure is identical to that described in Sections 7.2, 7.4 or 7.5
of this manual.

8.3.2. Span Calibration

Adjust the NO concentration to approximately 80% of the URL of the NO channel. The
expected NO and NOX span concentrations can be determined by measuring the cylinder
and diluent flows and computing the resulting concentrations. If there is any NO2 impurity
in the NO standard gas it should be taken into account when the NOX concentration is
entered during the NO/NOX channel calibration. This is done by ADDING the impurity

044100102 Rev A 133

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

concentration to the NO concentration to get the NOX concentration for calibration.

Calculate the exact NO and NOX concentrations as follows:

F NO x [NO ] STD
[NO ] OUT = Eq 8-8
FT

Enter the respective concentrations using the procedure in Section 7.2. The expected span
concentrations need not be re-entered each time a calibration is performed unless they are
changed.

• Enter the expected NOX and NO span gas concentrations:

• Sample the generated concentration until the NO and the NOX responses have
stabilized.
• Span the instrument by the following the same method as Sections 7.2, 7.4 or 7.5:
The analog voltage output should measure 80% of the voltage range selected. (e.g.
4.00 VDC if 0-5V output is selected.) The readings on the front panel display should be
equal to the expected NO and NOX concentrations entered in the procedure given in
Sections 7.2, 7.4 or 7.5 above. See the Troubleshooting Chapter 11 if there are problems.
Also see the Calibration Quality Check procedure Section 7.9.

After the zero and the 80% URL points have been set, generate five approximately evenly
spaced calibration points between zero and 80% URL without further adjustment to the
instrument. Allow the instrument to sample these intermediate concentrations for about 10
minutes each and record the instrument NO and NOX responses.

Plot the analyzer NO and NOX responses versus the corresponding calculated concentrations
to obtain the calibration relationships. Determine the straight line of best fit (y = mx + b)
determined by the method of least squares.

After the best-fit line has been drawn for the NO and the NOX calibrations, determine
whether the analyzer response is linear. To be considered linear, no calibration point should
differ from the best-fit line by more than 2% of full scale.

8.3.3. GPT NO2 Calibration

The M200E computes the NO2 concentration by subtracting the NO from the NOX
concentration. Unlike analog instruments, this difference is calculated by the M200E's
internal computer software. It is extremely unlikely that the NO2 concentration will be in
error. Therefore this procedure is a confirmation that the NO2 subtraction algorithm in the
computer is operating correctly.

NOTE
Do not make any adjustments to the instrument during this procedure.

Generate an NO concentration near 90% of the URL. Dilution air and O3 generator air flows
should be the same as used in the calculation of specified conditions of the dynamic
parameter according to Section 8.2. Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NOX
responses stabilize. Record the NO and NOx concentrations.

134 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

Second, turn on and adjust the O3 generator in the calibrator to produce sufficient O3 to
decrease the NO concentration to about 10% of full scale. This will be equivalent to 80% of
the URL of the NO2 channel. After the analyzer responses stabilize, record the resultant NO,
NOX, and NO2 concentrations.

NO2 CONVERTER EFFICIENCY

if the NOX reading should drop to less than 96% of its starting value during this step, it
indicates the NO2 converter is in need of troubleshooting or replacement. See Chapter 11
for further details.

While maintaining all other conditions, adjust the ozone generator to obtain several other
concentrations of NO2 evenly spaced between the 80% URL point and the zero point.
Record the NO, NOX, and NO2 concentrations for each additional point.

Calculate the resulting NO2 concentrations as follows:

F NO * [ NO 2 ] IMP
[ NO 2 ] OUT = [NO ] ORIG - [NO ] REM + Eq 8-9
FT

Where [NO]ORIG is the NO concentration before the GPT ozone is turned on, and [NO]REM is
the NO remaining after GPT.

Plot the NO2 concentration output by the instrument on the y-axis against the generated
NO2 [NO2]OUT on the x-axis. The plot should be a straight line within the ± 2% linearity
criteria given for the NOx and NO channels. If the plot is not linear the most likely cause is
that the converter needs replacing. See Section 7.1.7 on NO2 converter efficiency.

8.4. Calibration Frequency

To ensure accurate measurements of the NO, NOX, and NO2 concentrations, calibrate the
analyzer at the time of installation, and re-calibrate it:

• No later than three months after the most recent calibration or performance audit
which indicated analyzer calibration to be acceptable.
• An interruption of more than a few days in analyzer operation.
• Any repairs which might affect its calibration.
• Physical relocation of the analyzer.
• Any other indication (including excessive zero or span drift) of possible significant
inaccuracy of the analyzer.
Following any of the activities listed above, the zero and span should be checked to
determine if a calibration is necessary. If the analyzer zero and span drifts exceed the
calibration limits in Section 12 of the Q.A. Handbook6, a calibration should be performed.

8.5. Other Quality Assurance Procedures

Precision is determined by a one-point check at least once every two weeks. Accuracy is
determined by a three-point audit once each quarter.

044100102 Rev A 135

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

Essential to quality assurance are scheduled checks for verifying the operational status of
the monitoring system. The operator should visit the site at least once each week. Every
two weeks a Level 1 zero and span check must be made on the analyzer. Level 2 zero and
span checks should be conducted at a frequency desired by the user. Definitions of these
terms are given in Table 8-3.

Table 8-3: Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks

LEVEL 1 ZERO AND SPAN CALIBRATION LEVEL 2 ZERO AND SPAN CHECK
A Level 1 zero and span calibration is a A Level 2 zero and span check is an "unofficial" check
simplified, two-point analyzer calibration of an analyzer's response. It may include dynamic
used when analyzer linearity does not need checks made with uncertified test concentrations,
to be checked or verified. (Sometimes when artificial stimulation of the analyzer's detector,
no adjustments are made to the analyzer, electronic or other types of checks of a portion of the
the Level 1 calibration may be called a analyzer, etc.
zero/span check, in which case it must not Level 2 zero and span checks are not to be used as a
be confused with a Level 2 zero/span basis for analyzer zero or span adjustments,
check.) Since most analyzers have a calibration updates, or adjustment of ambient data.
reliably linear or near-linear output They are intended as quick, convenient checks to be
response with concentration, they can be used between zero and span calibrations to check for
adequately calibrated with only two possible analyzer malfunction or calibration drift.
concentration standards (two-point Whenever a Level 2 zero or span check indicates a
concentration). Furthermore, one of the possible calibration problem, a Level 1 zero and span
standards may be zero concentration, which (or multipoint) calibration should be carried out before
is relatively easily obtained and need not be any corrective action is taken.
certified. Hence, only one certified
concentration standard is needed for the If a Level 2 zero and span check is to be used in the
two-point (Level 1) zero and span quality control program, a "reference response" for
calibration. Although lacking the advan- the check should be obtained immediately following a
tages of the multipoint calibration, the two- zero and span (or multipoint) calibration while the
point zero and span calibration--because of analyzer's calibration is accurately known. Subsequent
its simplicity--can be (and should be) Level 2 check responses should then be compared to
carried out much more frequently. Also, the most recent reference response to determine if a
two-point calibrations are easily automated. change in response has occurred. For automatic Level
Frequency checks or updating of the 2 zero and span checks, the first scheduled check
calibration relationship with a two-point following the calibration should be used for the
zero and span calibration improves the reference response. It should be kept in mind that any
quality of the monitoring data by helping to Level 2 check that involves only part of the analyzer's
keep the calibration relationship more system cannot provide information about the portions
closely matched to any changes (drifts) in of the system not checked and therefore cannot be
the analyzer response. used as a verification of the overall analyzer
calibration.

In addition, an independent precision check between 0.08 and 0.10 ppm must be carried
out at least once every two weeks. Table 8-4 summarizes the quality assurance activities
for routine operations. A discussion of each activity appears in the following sections.

To provide for documentation and accountability of activities, a checklist should be compiled

and then filled out by the field operator as each activity is completed.

For information on shelter and sample inlet system, an in-depth study is in Field Operations
Guide for Automatic Air Monitoring Equipment, Publication No. APTD-0736, PB 202-249 and
PB 204-650, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Programs, October 1972.

136 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

8.6. Summary of Quality Assurance Checks

The following items should be checked on a regularly scheduled basis to assure high quality
data from the M200E. See Table 8-4 for a summary of activities; also the QA Handbook should
be checked for specific procedures.

Table 8-4: Activity Matrix for Data Quality

Frequency and Method Action if Requirements

Characteristic Acceptance Limits
of Measurement are not Met
Shelter Mean temperature between Check thermograph chart Mark strip chart for the
temperature 22°C and 28°C (72° and weekly for variations affected time period
82° F), daily fluctuations not greater than ± 2°C (4°F) Repair or adjust
greater than ± 2°C temperature control
Sample No moisture, foreign material, Weekly visual inspection Clean, repair, or replace
introduction leaks, obstructions; sample as needed
system line connected to manifold
Recorder Adequate ink & paper Weekly visual inspection Replenish ink and paper
Legible ink traces supply

Correct chart speed and range Adjust time to agree

with clock; note on chart
Correct time
Analyzer TEST measurements at Weekly visual inspection Adjust or repair as
operational nominal values needed
settings M200E in SAMPLE mode
Analyzer Zero and span within tolerance Level 1 zero/span every Find source of error and
operational limits as described in 2 weeks; Level 2 between repair
check Section 12 of the Q.A. Level 1 checks at After corrective action,
Handbook6 frequency desired by user re-calibrate analyzer
Precision check Assess precision as described Every 2 weeks, Subsec. Calc, report precision,
in Sections 15&18 of the Q.A. 3.4.3 (Ibid.) Section 12 of the Q.A.
Handbook6 Handbook6

8.7. Short Calibration Checks

A system of Level 1 and Level 2 zero/span checks (Table 8-3) is recommended. These checks
must be conducted in accordance with the specific guidance given in Section 12 of the Q.A.
Handbook6. Level 1 zero and span checks must be conducted every two weeks. Level 2 checks
should be conducted in between the Level 1 checks at a frequency desired by the user. Span
concentrations for both levels should be between 70 and 90% of the measurement range.

Zero and span data are to be used to:

• Provide data to allow analyzer adjustment for zero and span drift;
• Provide a decision point on when to calibrate the analyzer;
• Provide a decision point on invalidation of monitoring data.
These items are described in detail in Sections 15&18 of the Q.A. Handbook6. Refer to
Chapter 11 of this manual if the instrument is not within the allowed margins. We recommend
to use APICOM and the iDAS for analysis and documentation of zero/span check data.

044100102 Rev A 137

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

8.7.1. Zero/Span Check Procedures

The Zero and span calibration can be checked in a variety of different ways. They include:

• Manual zero/span checks can be done from the front panel keyboard. The procedure
is in Section 7.3 or 7.6 of this manual.
• Automatic zero/span checks can be performed every night. See Section 7.8 of this
manual for setup and operation procedures.
• Zero/Span checks through remote contact closure can be initiated through remote
contact closures on the rear panel. See Section 7.7.3 of this manual.
• Zero/span checks can also be controlled through the RS-232 port. See Section 6.9 of
this manual for more details on setting up and using the analyzer’s RS-232 port.

8.7.2. Precision Check

A periodic check is used to assess the data for precision. A one-point precision check must
be carried out at least once every 2 weeks on each analyzer at an NO2 concentration
between 0.08 and 0.10 ppm. The analyzer must be operated in its normal sampling mode,
and the precision test gas must pass through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other
components used during normal ambient sampling. The standards from which precision
check test concentrations are obtained must be traceable to NIST-SRM. Those standards
used for calibration or auditing may be used.

8.7.3. Precision Check Procedure

Connect the analyzer to a precision gas that has an NO2 concentration between 0.08 and
0.10 ppm. An NO2 precision gas may be generated by either GPT or a NO2 permeation tube.
If a precision check is made in conjunction with a zero/span check, it must be made prior to
any zero or span adjustments.

• Allow the analyzer to sample the precision gas until a stable trace is obtained.
• Record this value. NO and NOX precision checks should also be made if those data
are being reported. Information from the check procedure is used to assess the
precision of the monitoring data; see in Section 12 of the Q.A. Handbook6 for
procedures for calculating and reporting precision.

8.8. Certification of Working Standards

The NO content of the NO working standard must be periodically assayed against NIST-
traceable NO or NO2 standards. Any NO2 impurity in the cylinder must also be assayed.
Certification of the NO working standard should be made on a quarterly basis or more
frequently, as required. Procedures are outlined below for certification against NO traceable
standard which is the simplest and most straightforward procedure.

To assure data of desired quality, two considerations are essential:

• The measurement process must be in statistical control at the time of the

measurement and;
• Any systematic errors, when combined with the random variation in the measure-
ment process, must result in a suitably small uncertainty.

138 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration

Evidence of good quality data includes documentation of the quality control checks and the
independent audits of the measurement process by recording data on specific forms or on a
quality control chart and by using materials, instruments, and measurement procedures
that can be traced to appropriate standards of reference.

To establish traceability, data must be obtained routinely by repeated measurements of

standard reference samples (primary, secondary, and/or working standards). More specifically,
working calibration standards must be traceable to standards of higher accuracy.

8.8.1. Certification Procedures of Working Standards

This procedure requires the use of calibrated NO gas traceable to an NIST-SRM and the gas
phase titration calibration procedure (Section 8.2) to calibrate the NO, NOX, and NO2
responses of the analyzer. Also the efficiency of the analyzer’s NO2 converter must be
determined (Section 7.1.7).

Generate several NO concentrations by diluting the NO working standard. Use the nominal
NO cylinder concentration, [NO]NOM, to calculate the diluted concentrations. Plot the
analyzer NO response (in ppm) versus the nominal diluted NO concentration and determine
the slope, SNOM. Calculate the NO concentration of the working standard [NO]STD from:

[NO]STD = [NO]NOM x SNOM

A more detailed procedure is presented in Reference 1.

8.8.1.1. Other Methods of Establishing Traceability

Methods of establishing traceability are:

• Using a NO working standard traced to NIST NO2 standard
• Using a NO2 working standard traced to NIST NO2 standard
• Using a NO2 working standard traced to NIST NO standard

NOTE
If the NO2 impurity in the NO cylinder, [NO2]imp is greater than the 1 ppm value
allowed in the calibration procedure, check that the NO delivery system is not the
source of contamination before discarding the NO standard.
For further information on calibration by GPT and NO2 permeation devices, refer to
part 50 of Chapter 1, Title 40 CFR, Appendix F Reference 13 of that Appendix.

8.9. References
1. Environmental Protection Agency, Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50,
Appendix F, Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement
of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Gas Phase Chemiluminescence), Federal
Register, 41 (232), 52688-52692, December 1976 (as amended at 48 FR 2529,
Jan 20, 1983).

2. Ellis, Elizabeth C. Technical Assistance Document for the Chemiluminescence

Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research

044100102 Rev A 139

EPA Protocol Calibration Model 200E Instruction Manual

Triangle Park, NC. 83 pages, December 1975. Available online at

http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/criteria/reldocs/4-75-003.pdf.

3. Environmental Protection Agency, Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 58,
Appendix A, Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement
of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Gas Phase Chemiluminescence), Federal
Register, 41 (232), 52688-52692, December 1976 (as amended at 48 FR 2529,
Jan 20, 1983).

4. Mavrodineanu, R., and Gills, T. E., Standard Reference Materials: Summary of Gas
Cylinder and Permeation Tube Standard Reference Materials Issued by the National
Bureau of Standards, Document SP260-108, May 1987.
And: Taylor, J. K., Standard Reference Materials: Handbook for SRM Users,
Document number SP260-100, February 1993. Available online at:
http://patapsco.nist.gov/srmcatalog/sp_publications/publications.htm

5. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems - Volume I, “A

Field Guide to Environmental Quality Assurance," EPA-600/R-94/038a, April 1994.
Available online at: http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qabook.html.

6. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems - Volume II,
Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77/027a, December 1986. US EPA Order
Number: 454R98004, available at the National Technical Information Service (NTIS),
5285 Port Royal Rd Springfield, VA 22151. Portions are also available at:
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qabook.html.

7. Environmental Protection Agency, Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 58,
Appendix B, Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement
of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Gas Phase Chemiluminescence), Federal
Register, 41 (232), 52688-52692, December 1976 (as amended at 48 FR 2529,
Jan 20, 1983).

8. Quality Assurance Guidance Document. Reference Method for the Determination of

Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Chemiluminescence). Draft document, 58
pages, February 2002. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park NC 27711, draft document available at
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qabook.html. Guidelines about the measurement of
NO2 in this document replace those in the old QA Handbook and should be consulted
as the latest reference.

140 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

9. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE
Predictive diagnostic functions including data acquisition, failure warnings and alarms built
into the analyzer allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without perform-
ing unnecessary, preventative maintenance procedures. There is, however, a minimal
number of simple procedures that, when performed regularly, will ensure that the analyzer
continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime. Repair and troubleshooting
procedures are covered in Chapter 11 of this manual.

NOTE
A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of the
maintenance procedures listed below. Refer to Chapter 7.

CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any
operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer.

NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by
qualified maintenance personnel only.

9.1. Maintenance Schedule

Table 9-1 is the recommended maintenance schedule for the M200E. Please note that in
certain environments with high levels of dust, humidity or pollutant levels some
maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.

Table 9-1: M200E Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Cal Manual
Item Action Frequency Check ? Section Date Performed

Review and Table A-

TEST functions Weekly No
evaluate 3
Particulate Change
Weekly No 9.3.1
filter particle filter
Zero/span Evaluate offset
Weekly Yes 7.3, 7.6
check and slope
Zero/span Zero and span Every 3 7.2,
Yes
calibration calibration months 7.4, 7.5

044100102 Rev A 141

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table 9-1: M200E Preventive Maintenance Schedule (continued)

Check Yes on
Every 3
NO2 converter conversion change, 9.3.8
months
efficiency else no
External zero
Exchange Every 3
air scrubber No 9.3.7
chemical months
(optional)
When
External dryer Replace indicator
No
(optional) chemical color
changes
Change
Ozone filter Annually Yes 9.3.3
chemical
Annually or
Reaction cell
Clean as Yes 9.3.9
window
necessary
DFU filter (air
inlet filter of
Perma Pure 9.3.2
Change
dryer, pump Annually No
particle filter 9.3.7
dust filter
and IZS
filter)
Annually or
Check for leaks after Yes on
Pneumatic 11.5.1,
in gas flow repairs leaks,
sub-system 11.5.2
paths involving else no
pneumatics
Reaction cell
Yes on
and O3 O-
Rcell or
rings and Replace Annually 9.3.10
PMT O-
sintered
rings.
filters
On PMT/
preamp
PMT Sensor Low-level
changes or
Hardware hardware Yes 7.9
if slope is
Calibration calibration
outside of
1.0±0.3
when RCEL
pressure
Pump Rebuild head exceeds 10 Yes 9.3.4
in-Hg-A (at
sea level)
Every 3
years or if
Yes (if
Replace conversion
NO2 converter CE factor 9.3.8
converter efficiency
is used)
drops below
96%

Items shown in bold face are required to maintain full warranty, all other items are strongly
recommended.

142 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

9.2. Predictive Diagnostics

The analyzer’s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their
values. Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these test functions to the values
measured on your instrument at the factory and recorded on the M200E Final Test and
Validation Data Form (T-API part number 04490, attached to the manual). Table 9-2 can be
used as a basis for taking action as these values change with time. The internal data
acquisition system (iDAS) is a convenient way to record and track these changes. APICOM
control software can be used to download and review these data even from remote
locations (Section 6.11.5 describes APICOM).

Table 9-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions

Function Expected Actual Interpretation & Action

Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for
Fluctuating
RCEL Constant to leaks
pressure within ± 0.5 Pump performance is degrading. Replace pump
Slowly increasing
head when pressure is above 10 in-Hg-A
Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for
Constant Fluctuating
leaks
SAMPLE within
Slowly increasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters
pressure atmospheric
changes Developing leak in pneumatic system to vacuum
Slowly decreasing
(developing valve failure). Check for leaks
Ozone Constant to
Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters
Flow within ± 15
Developing AZERO valve failure. Replace valve
Constant PMT cooler failure. Check cooler, circuit, and
within ±20 of Significantly power supplies
AZERO
check-out increasing Developing light leak. Leak check.
value
O3 air filter cartridge is exhausted. Change
chemical
Constant for Slowly decreasing
NO2 Converter efficiency may be degrading. Replace
constant signal for same
CONC converter.
concentrations concentration
Change in instrument response. Low level
NO2 Constant (hardware) calibrate the sensor
Decreasing over
CONC response from
time Degradation of IZS permeation tube. Change
(IZS) day to day
permeation tube
NO2 Constant
Heavily fluctuating Ambient changes in moisture are affecting the
CONC response from
from day to day performance. Add a dryer to the zero air inlet.
(IZS) day to day
Constant for
Decreasing over Drift of instrument response; clean RCEL
NO CONC constant
time window, change O3 air filter chemical.
concentration

9.3. Maintenance Procedures

The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard
maintenance of the Model 200E.

044100102 Rev A 143

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

9.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter

The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt. It should
be replaced according to the service interval in Table 9-1 even without obvious signs of dirt.
Filters with 1 and 5 µm pore size can clog up while retaining a clean look. We recommend
to handle the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing with gloves and tweezers.
We recommend not to touch any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE retaining ring,
glass cover and the O-ring with bare hands as this may cause the pores to clog quicker and
surfaces to become dirty due to possible oils from your hands.

Figure 9-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly

• To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1, follow this
procedure:
• Turn OFF the pump to prevent drawing debris into the sample line.
• Remove the CE Mark locking screw in the center of the front panel and open the
hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly.
• Carefully remove the retaining ring, glass window, PTFE O-ring and filter element.
We recommend to clean the glass and O-rings at least once monthly, weekly in very
polluted areas.
• Install a new filter element, carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder.
• Re-install the PTFE O-ring with the notches facing up (important!), the glass cover,
then screw on the hold-down ring and hand-tighten the assembly. Inspect the
(visible) seal between the edge of the glass window and the O-ring to assure proper
gas tightness.

144 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

• To fulfill CE Mark safety requirements, the front panel locking screw must be
installed at all times during operation of the analyzer.
• Re-start the analyzer.

9.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter

The air for the O3 generator passes through a Perma Pure© dryer, which is equipped with a
small particulate filter at its inlet. This filter prevents dust from entering the Perma Pure©
dryer and degrading the dryer’s performance over time. To change the filter according to
the service interval in Table 9-1:

• Before starting the procedure, check and write down the average RCEL pressure and
the OZONE flow values.
• Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
• Unscrew the nut around the port of the filter using 5/8” and 9/16” wrenches and by
holding the actual fitting body steady with a 7/16” wrench.

CAUTION
Risk of significant leak. Make sure to use proper wrenches and to not turn the
fitting against the Perma Pure© dryer. This may loosen the inner tubing and cause
large leaks.

• Take off the old filter element and replace it with a suitable equivalent
(TAPI part# FL-3).

Figure 9-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer

• Holding the fitting steady with a 5/8” wrench, tighten the nut with your hands. If
necessary use a second wrench but do not over-tighten the nut.
• Replace the cover, plug in the power cord and restart the analyzer.
• Check the O3 flow rate, it should be around 80 cm³/min ± 15. Check the RCEL
pressure, it should be the same value as before.

044100102 Rev A 145

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

9.3.3. Changing the Ozone Filter Chemical

The O3 filter is located between the O3 generator and the reaction cell and cleans the O3
stream from solid and liquid contaminants that are created inside the O3 generator. The
content of the filter cartridge needs periodical exchange according to Table 9-1, a rebuild kit
is available from the factory. Appendix B of this manual lists the part numbers of the ozone
filter rebuild kit.

• To change the filter chemical, follow these steps:

• Turn of power to the analyzer and pump. Remove the analyzer cover and locate the
O3 filter in the front of the analyzer next to the O3 generator.
• Use your hands or a special tool (FT267) to remove both pieces of 1/8” tubing from
the filter.

Figure 9-3: 04419 Ozone Filter Unit

• Remove the two 3” mounting screws with a Phillips screw driver and take out the
filter cartridge.
• Using a 9/16” wrench, remove both red NPT fittings from the cartridge.
• Pour out the contents of the cartridge onto a sheet of white paper. Notice any
discoloration of the contents, which is usually white and slightly transparent. Note
how much of the chemical is discolored (usually with yellow tint), this may give you

146 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

an indication of the lifetime of the chemical in your application. The maintenance

cycle of this item is dependent on ambient moisture, sub-micron particle load and
other factors and may differ from that shown in Table 9-1.
• Discard the used chemical without touching it. It may contain nitric acid, which is a
corrosive and highly irritating substance. Immediately wash you hands after contact.
• Using a small powder funnel, fill the cartridge with about 10 g new chemical (TAPI
part # CH43) so that it is level on both legs of the cartridge. Slight vibration is
required to settle the chemical into the cartridge and achieve tightest packing, which
increases performance and lifetime of the filter. Make sure that the level of the
chemical does not protrude farther than the first two threads of the NPT fitting.

NOTE
Use only genuine, pre-conditioned Teledyne-API refill kits for this procedure.
Do not leave this material uncovered for more than a few seconds, as it will
absorb contaminants from ambient air!

• Ensure that the two fittings still contain a sintered filter at the bottom (pressed in)
and apply a layer of Teflon tape to the NPT threads, then screw the fittings into the
cartridge. Do not over-tighten the fittings, which will damage the soft Teflon threads,
rendering the cartridge useless. The cartridge material will provide a natural seal.
• Screw the cartridge back onto the chassis, orientation is not important.
• Evaluate the ferrules on the tubing. If the ferrules are too old, we recommend to
replace them with new ferrules, part # FT 303.
• Reconnect the tubing. Do not over-tighten these fittings. Use only tool # FT267
for half to one more turn beyond hand-tightness. Tools like pliers will destroy the
knurling and may easily over-tighten the fitting and cause it to break.
• If the service interval for this item has been exceeded, it may also be necessary to
clean the reaction cell as described in Section 9.3.9.
• Leak check the system using the pressurized approach described in Section 11.5.2.
You can use soap leak detector liquid to evaluate if the cartridge is not tight. If
necessary, tighten the fittings some more but do not overtighten.
• Restart the analyzer and pump and continue operation.
• If the chemical used for replacement has not been conditioned properly or was
stored over long periods of time or was exposed to ambient air, you may see a
significant increase of the AutoZero value, slowly diminishing over time. Until
diminished, this will cause large negative offsets on calibration and a changing
calibration over time. It may take one week to clean the material properly, hence,
we recommend to use genuine Teledyne-API refill kits to ensure minimum
downtimes.
• Re-calibrate the analyzer after one hour (Chapter 7). If AutoZero is high, you may
have to wait day until calibration.

9.3.4. Rebuilding the External Sample Pump

The sample pump head periodically wears out and must be replaced when the RCEL
pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A (at sea level, adjust this value accordingly for elevated

044100102 Rev A 147

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

locations). A pump rebuild kit is available from the factory. Appendix B of this manual lists
the part numbers of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams are included in the kit.

A flow and leak check after rebuilding the sample pump is recommended. A span check and
re-calibration after this procedure is necessary as the response of the analyzer changes with
the RCEL pressure.

9.3.5. Changing the Pump and IZS Dust Filters

The exhaust air from the analyzer passes a small particle filter (DFU filter, part # FL3)
before entering the pump. When this particle filter becomes visibly dirty or the pressure
drop between SAMP and RCEL pressure increases significantly, it needs replacement in
order to prevent a large pressure drop with degraded analyzer performance.

• Power down the analyzer and pump.

• For internally mounted filters, skip the next two steps.
• For externally mounted filters on the pump housing, remove the analyzer exhaust
tube from the dust filter. Remove the particle filter from the pump. To do so, push
the white plastic ring into the fitting and pull the filter out of the fitting. If necessary,
use needle-nose pliers to pry the filter out of the fittings.
• Push a new filter into the pump fitting and make sure that the arrow on the filter
points towards the pump. Push the exhaust tubing onto the filter. Skip the next two
steps.
• For internally mounted filters at the inside rear panel, remove the chassis and locate
the filter between the vacuum manifold and the exhaust port fitting.
• Disconnect the clear tubing from the filter body and change the filter with the arrow
pointing against the gas flow. To remove the hose clamps, slide the two clamp ends
in opposite directions with a needle-nose pliers until the clamp comes apart.
Reconnect the tubing by using the same or new clamps and pushing tightening them
until a good seal is achieved.
• Restart the pump and clear any error warnings from the front panel display.
• After about 5 minutes, check the RCEL pressure reading and ensure that it is similar
to its value before changing the filter but less than 10 in-Hg-A.
A similar procedure applies to the same DFU particle filter that is used in the optional IZS
zero air scrubber assembly (Figure 9-4). To change this filter, simply disconnect the tube
and fitting from one end and remove the filter from the scrubber cartridge. Insert a new
filter and attach the tubing. Make sure that the embedded small arrow points in flow
direction.

9.3.6. Changing the IZS Permeation Tube

The optional IZS permeation tube that is filled with liquid NO2 will be exhausted at some
point. The lifetime depends on the frequency of usage. To change this tube, purchase a
replacement and then

• Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
• Locate the IZS oven in the rear left of the analyzer.

148 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

• Remove the top layer of insulation if necessary.

• Unscrew the black aluminum cover of the IZS oven (3 screws) using a medium
Phillips-head screw driver. Leave the fittings and tubing connected to the cover.
• Remove the old permeation tube if necessary and replace it with the new tube. Make
sure that the tube is placed into the larger of two holes and that the open
permeation end of the tube (plastic) is facing up.
• Re-attach the cover with three screws and make sure that the sealing O-ring is
properly in place and that the three screws are tightened evenly.
• Replace the analyzer cover, plug the power cord back in and turn on the analyzer.
• Carry out an IZS span check to see if the new permeation device works properly.
The permeation rate may need several days to stabilize.

WARNING
Do not leave instrument turned off for more than 8 hours without removing the
permeation tube. Do not ship the instrument without removing the permeation
tube. The tube continues to emit NO2, even at room temperature and will
contaminate the entire instrument.

9.3.7. Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber

The external zero air scrubber contains two chemicals, pink Purafil© (Part # CH 9) and
black, charcoal (Part # CH 1). The Purafil© converts NO in the ambient air to NO2 and the
following charcoal absorbs any NO2. The chemicals need to be replaced periodically
according to Table 9-1 or as needed. This procedure can be carried out while the instrument
is running. Make sure that the analyzer is not in ZERO calibration mode.

• Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel. Figure 3-7 shows the location,
Figure 9-4 the exploded assembly.
• Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1/4” plastic tubing from the particle
filter using 9/16” and 1/2" wrenches.
• Remove the particle filter from the cartridge using 9/16” wrenches.
• Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard the Purafil© and charcoal
contents. Make sure to abide to local laws about discarding these chemicals. The
rebuild kit (listed in Appendix B) comes with a Material and Safety Data Sheet, which
contains more information on these chemicals.
• Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom and the Purafil© chemical at the top
and use three, white retainer pads to separate the chemicals as shown in Figure 9-4.
• Replace the screw-top cap and tighten the cap - hand-tight only.
• If necessary, replace the DFU filter with a new unit and discard the old. The bottom
retainer pad should catch most of the dust, the filter should not be visibly dirty (on
the inside)
• Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel.
• Reconnect the plastic tubing to the fitting of the particle filter.

044100102 Rev A 149

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the
analyzer in case the instrument is mounted in a rack. If necessary, squeeze the clips
for a tighter grip on the cartridge.

Figure 9-4: Zero Air Scrubber Assembly

9.3.8. Changing the NO2 converter

The NO2 converter is located in the center of the instrument, see Figure 3-2 for location,
and Figure 9-5 for the assembly. The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge
only, the heater with built-in thermocouple can be reused.

• Turn off the analyzer power, remove the cover and allow the converter to cool.
• Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until
the converter cartridge can be seen.

CAUTION
The converter operates at 315º C. Severe burns can result if the
assembly is not allowed to cool. Do not handle the assembly until it is at
room temperature. This may take several hours.

150 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

• Remove the tube fittings from the converter.

• Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter. Unscrew the
grounding clamp of the power leads with a Phillips-head screw driver.

Figure 9-5: NO2 Converter Assembly

• Remove the converter assembly (cartridge and band heater) from the can. Make a
note of the orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge.
• Unscrew the band heater and loosen it, take out the old converter cartridge.
• Wrap the band heater around the new replacement cartridge and tighten the screws
using a high-temperature anti-seize agent such as copper paste. Make sure to use
proper alignment of the heater with respect to the converter tubes.
• Replace the converter assembly, route the cables through the holes in the can and
reconnect them properly. Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads
for safe operation.
• Re-attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover.
• Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer.
• Allow the converter to burn-in for 24 hours, then re-calibrate the instrument.

9.3.9. Cleaning the Reaction Cell

The reaction cell should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests. A dirty reaction cell
will cause excessive noise, drifting zero or span values, low response or a combination of

044100102 Rev A 151

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

all. To clean the reaction cell, it is necessary to remove it from the sensor housing. refer to
Section 11.6.6. for an overview of the entire sensor assembly. Use the following guide to
clean the reaction cell:

• Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump. Refer to the Figure 9-6for the
following procedure.
• Disconnect the black 1/4" exhaust tube and the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes
from the reaction cell. Disconnect the heater/thermistor cable.
• Remove four screws holding the reaction cell to the PMT housing and lift the cell and
manifold out as shown in the inset of Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6: Reaction Cell Assembly

• The reaction cell will separate into two halves, the stainless steel manifold assembly
and the black plastic reaction cell with window, stainless steel cylinder and O-rings.
• The reaction cell (both plastic part and stainless steel cylinder) and optical glass
filter should be cleaned with methanol and a clean tissue and dried thereafter.
• Usually it is not necessary to clean the sample and ozone flow orifices since they are
protected by sintered filters. If tests show that cleaning is necessary, refer to
Section 9.3.10 on how to clean the critical flow orifice.
• Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles. They are Teflon threaded and require
a special tool for reassembly. If necessary, the manifold with nozzles attached can
be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath.

152 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance

• Reassemble in proper order and re-attach the reaction cell to the sensor housing.
Reconnect pneumatics and heater connections, then re-attach the pneumatic sensor
assembly and the cleaning procedure is complete.
• After cleaning the reaction cell, it is also recommended to exchange the ozone
supply air filter chemical as described in Section 9.3.3.
• After cleaning, the analyzer span response may drop 10 - 15% in the first 10 days
as the reaction cell window conditions. This is normal and does not require another
cleaning.

9.3.10. Cleaning or Changing Critical Flow Orifices

There are several critical flow orifices installed in the M200E, Figure 9-6 shows one of the
two most important orifice assemblies, located on the reaction cell. Refer to Section 10.2.9
for a detailed description on functionality and locations. Despite the fact that these flow
restrictors are protected by sintered stainless steel filters, they can, on occasion, clog up,
particularly if the instrument is operated without sample filter or in an environment with
very fine, sub-micron particle-size dust.

The M200E introduces an orifice holder that makes changing the orifice very easy. In fact, it
is recommended to keep spare orifice holder assemblies at hand to minimize downtime and
swap orifices in a matter of a few minutes. Appendix B lists several complete spare part kits
for this purpose. To clean or replace a critical flow orifice, do the following:

Figure 9-7: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly

044100102 Rev A 153

Instrument Maintenance Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump. Remove the analyzer cover and
locate the reaction cell (Figure 9-6, Figure 11-7 and Figure 3-7).
• Unscrew the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell
• For orifices on the reaction cell (Figure 9-6): Unscrew the orifice holder with a 9/16”
wrench. This part holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in
Figure 9-7. Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers.
• For orifices in the vacuum manifold: the assembly is similar to the one shown in
Figure 9-7, but without the orifice holder, part number 04090, and bottom O-ring
OR34 and with an NPT fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting. After taking off the
connecting tube, unscrew the NPT fitting.
• Take out the components of the assembly: a spring, a sintered filter, two O-rings
and the orifice. For the vacuum manifold only, you may need to use a scribe or
pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts out of the manifold.
• Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter and clean the critical flow orifice in a
ultrasonic cleaner for about 30 minutes using methanol. Let the part dry.
• Re-assemble the parts as shown in Figure 9-7 and re-connect them to the reaction
cell manifold or the vacuum manifold.
• Reconnect all tubing, power up the analyzer and pump and - after a warm-up period
of 30 minutes, carry out a leak test as described in Section 11.5.1.

9.3.11. Checking for Light Leaks

When re-assembled or operated improperly, the M200E can develop small leaks around the
PMT, which let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing. To find such
light leaks, follow the below procedures. CAUTION: this procedure can only be carried out
with the analyzer running and its cover removed. This procedure should only be carried out
by qualified personnel.

• Scroll the TEST functions to PMT.

• Supply zero gas to the analyzer.
• With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover. Take extra
care not to touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body. Do not
drop screws or tools into a running analyzer!
• Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet
fitting and at all of the joints of the reaction cell as well as around the PMT housing.
The PMT value should not respond to the light, the PMT signal should remain steady
within its usually noise.
• If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the reaction
cell mounting screws or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE tubing
(this tubing will fade with time and become transparent). Often, light leaks are also
caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly.
• Carefully replace the analyzer cover.
• If tubing was changed, carry out a leak check (Section 11.5.2).

154 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

10. THEORY OF OPERATION

The M200E Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled instrument that
determines the concentration of nitric oxide (NO), total nitrogen oxides (NOX, the sum of
NO and NO2) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It
requires that sample and calibration gases are supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in
order to establish a constant gas flow through the reaction cell where the sample gas is
exposed to ozone (O3), initiating a chemical reaction that gives off light (chemilumines-
cence). The instrument measures the amount of chemiluminescence to determine the
amount of NO in the sample gas. A catalytic-reactive converter converts any NO2 in the
sample gas to NO, which is then – including the NO in the sample gas – is then reported as
NOX. NO2 is calculated as the difference between NOX and NO.

Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require physical
adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures the sensor
output signal when gases with known amounts of NO or NO2 are supplied and stores these
results in memory. The microprocessor uses these calibration values along with the signal
from the sample gas and data of the current temperature and pressure of the gas to
calculate a final NOX concentration.

The concentration values and the original information from which it was calculated are
stored in the unit’s internal data acquisition system (iDAS Section 6.10.2) and are reported
to the user through a vacuum fluorescence display or several output ports.

10.1. Measurement Principle

10.1.1. Chemiluminescence
The principle of the M200E’s measurement method is the detection of chemiluminescence,
which occurs when nitrogen oxide (NO) reacts with ozone (O3). This reaction is a two-step
process. In the first step, one molecule of NO and one molecule of O3 collide and chemically
react to produce one molecule of oxygen (O2) and one molecule of nitrogen dioxide (NO2).
Some of the NO2 retains a certain amount of excess energy from the collision and, hence,
remains in an excited state, which means that one of the electrons of the NO2 molecule
resides in a higher energy state than is normal (denoted by an asterisk in Equation 10-1).

NO + O3 → NO2* + O2 Eq 10-1

Thermodynamics requires that systems seek the lowest stable energy state, hence, the NO2
molecule quickly returns to its ground state in a subsequent step, releasing the excess
energy in form of a quantum of light (hν) with wavelengths between 600 and 3000 nm,
with a peak at about 1200 nm (Equation 10-2, Figure 10-1).

NO2* → NO2 + hν Eq 10-2

All things being constant, the relationship between the amount of NO present in the
reaction cell and the amount of light emitted from the reaction is very linear. More NO
produces more light, which can be measured with a light-sensitive sensor in the near-
infrared spectrum (Figure 10-1). In order to maximize the yield of reaction (1), the M200E

044100102 Rev A 155

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

supplies the reaction cell with a large, constant excess of ozone (about 3000-5000 ppm)
from the internal ozone generator.

Figure 10-1: M200E Sensitivity Spectrum

However, only about 20% of the NO2 that is formed through reaction 10-1 is in the excited
state. In addition, the excited NO2 can collide with another collision partner M in the
reaction cell (mostly other molecules but also cell walls) and transfer its excess energy to
its collision partner without emitting any light at all (Equation 10-3). In fact, by far the
largest portion of the NO2* returns to the ground state this way, leaving only a few percent
yield of usable chemiluminescence.

NO2* + M → NO2 + M Eq 10-3)

In order to enhance the light yield of the reaction, the reaction cell is maintained at reduced
pressure. The probability of a collision between the NO2* molecule and a collision partner M
increases proportionally with the reaction cell pressure. This non-radiating collision with the
NO2* molecules is usually referred to as quenching, an unwanted process further described
in Section 10.1.5.2.

10.1.2. NOX and NO2 Determination

The only gas that is truly measured in the M200E is NO. Any NO2 contained in the gas is not
detected in the above process since NO2 does not react with O3 to undergo chemilumi-
nescence.

In order to measure the concentration of NO or NOX (which is defined here as the sum of
NO and NO2 in the sample gas), the M200E periodically switches the sample gas stream
through a converter cartridge filled with molybdenum (Mo, “moly”) chips (Figure 10-6)

156 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

heated to a temperature of 315° C. The heated molybdenum reacts with NO2 in the sample
gas and produces a variety of molybdenum oxides and NO according to Equation 10-4.

xNO2 + yMo → xNO + M y Oz (at 315° C ) Eq 10-4

Once the NO2 in the sample gas has been converted to NO, it is routed to the reaction cell
where it undergoes the chemiluminescence reaction described in Equations 10-1 and 10-2.

Figure 10-2: NO2 Conversion Principle

By converting the NO2 in the sample gas into NO, the analyzer can measure the total NOX
(NO+NO2) content of the sample gas. By switching the NO2 converter in and out of the
sample gas stream every 6 - 10 seconds, the M200E analyzer is able to quasi-continuously
measure both the NO and the total NOX content.

The NO2 concentration, finally, is not measured but calculated by simply subtracting the
known NO content of the sample gas from the known NOX content.

10.1.3. Chemiluminescence Detection

10.1.3.1. The Photo Multiplier Tube

The M200E uses a photo-multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of light created by the
NO and O3 reaction in the reaction cell.

A PMT is typically a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes.

Photons enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit
electrons. These electrons are accelerated by an applied high voltage and multiply through
a sequence of such acceleration steps (dynodes) until a useable current signal is generated.
This current increases or decreases with the amount of detected light (Section 10.3.2.2 for

044100102 Rev A 157

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

more details), is converted to a voltage and amplified by the preamplifier board and then
reported to the motherboard’s analog inputs.

Figure 10-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube

10.1.3.2. Optical Filter

Another critical component in the method by which your M200E detects chemiluminescence
is the optical filter that lies between the reaction cell and the PMT (Figure 10-2). This filter
is a high pass filter that is only transparent to wavelengths of light above 645 nm. In
conjunction with the response characteristics of the PMT, this filter creates a very narrow
window of wavelengths of light to which the M200E will respond (Figure 10-1).

The narrow band of sensitivity allows the M200E to ignore extraneous light and radiation
that might interfere with the M200E’s measurement. For instance, some oxides of sulfur can
also undergo chemiluminescence when in contact with O3 but emit light at shorter wave-
lengths (usually around 260 nm to 480 nm).

10.1.4. Auto Zero

Inherent in the operation of any PMT is a certain amount of noise. This is due to a variety of
factors such as black body infrared radiation given off by the metal components of the
reaction cell, unit to unit variations in the PMT units and even the constant universal
background radiation that surrounds us at all times. In order to reduce this amount of noise
and offset, the PMT is kept at a constant 7° C (45° F) by a thermo-electric cooler (TEC).

While this intrinsic noise and offset is significantly reduced by cooling the PMT, it is not
eradicated. To determine how much noise remains, the M200E diverts the sample gas flow
directly to the vacuum manifold without passing the reaction cell once every minute for
about 5 seconds (Figure 10-4). During this time, only O3 is present in the reaction cell,
effectively turning off the chemiluminescence reaction. Once the chamber is completely
dark, the M200E records the output of the PMT and keeps a running average of these
AZERO values. This average offset value is subtracted from the raw PMT readings while the
instrument is measuring NO and NOX to arrive at a auto-zero corrected reading.

158 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

Figure 10-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle.

10.1.5. Measurement Interferences

It should be noted that the chemiluminescence method is subject to interferences from a
number of sources. The M200E has been successfully tested for its ability to reject
interference from most of these sources. Table 10-1 lists the most important gases, which
may interfere with the detection of NO in the M200E.

10.1.5.1. Direct Interference

Some gases can directly alter the amount of light detected by the PMT due to chemilumi-
nescence in the reaction cell. This can either be a gas that undergoes chemiluminescence
by reacting with O3 in the reaction cell or a gas that reacts with other compounds and
produces excess NO upstream of the reaction cell.

10.1.5.2. Third Body Quenching

As shown in Equation 10-3, other molecules in the reaction cell can collide with the excited
NO2*, preventing the chemiluminescence of Equation 10-2, a process known as quenching.
CO2 and H2O are the most common quenching interferences, but N2 and O2 also contribute
to this interference type.

Quenching is an unwanted phenomenon and the extent to which it occurs depends on the
properties of the collision partner. larger, more polarized molecules such as H2O and CO2
quench NO chemiluminescence more effectively than smaller, less polar and electronically
“harder” molecules such as N2 and O2.

044100102 Rev A 159

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

The influence of water vapor on the M200E measurement can be eliminated with an
optional, internal sample gas dryer. The concentrations of N2 and O2 are virtually constant
in ambient air measurements, hence provide a constant amount of quenching and the
interference of varying CO2 amounts is negligible at low concentrations.

Table 10-1: List of Interferents

Gas Interference Type Rejection Method

Dilution: Viscosity of CO2 molecules causes If high concentrations of CO2 are suspected,
them to collect in aperture of Critical Flow special calibration methods must be
Orifice altering flow rate of NO. performed to account for the affects of the
CO2 CO2.
3rd Body Quenching: CO2 molecules collide
with NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy Contact T-API Customer Service depart-
kinetically and preventing emission of ment for details.
photons.
Some SOX variants can also initiate a Wavelengths of light produced by
chemiluminescence reaction upon exposure to chemiluminescence of SOX are screened out
O3 producing excess light. by the Optical Filter.
Chemically reacts with NH3, O2 and H2O in O3 Most of the ammonium sulfate and
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium ammonium nitrate produced is removed
sulfate) and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) from the sample gas by an air purifier
which form opaque white deposits on optical located between the O3 Generator and the
SOX filter window. Also forms highly corrosive reaction cell.
HNO3 (Nitric Acid)
3rd Body quenching: SOX molecules collide If high concentrations of SOX are suspected,
with NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy special calibration methods must be
kinetically and preventing emission of performed to account for the affects of the
photons. SO2.
Contact T-API Customer Service depart-
ment for details.
3rd Body quenching: H2O molecules collide Analyzer’s operating in high humidity areas
with NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy must have some method of drying applied
kinetically and preventing emission of to the sample gas supply (Section 5.7 for
photons. more details).

H20 Chemically reacts with NH3 and SOX in O3 Removed from the O3 gas stream by the
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium Perma Pure® Dryer (Section 10.2.6 for
sulfate) and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) more details).
which form opaque white deposits on optical
filter Window. Also forms highly corrosive
HNO3 (nitric acid)
Direct Interference: NH3 is converted to H2O If a high concentration of NH3 is suspected,
and NO by the NO2 converter. Excess NO steps must be taken to remove the NH3
NH3
reacts with O3 in reaction cell creating excess from the sample gas prior to its entry into
chemiluminescence. the NO2 converter.
Chemically reacts with H2O, O2 and SOX in O3 The Perma Pure® dryer built into the M200E
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium is sufficient for removing typical ambient
sulfate) and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) concentration levels of NH3.
which form opaque white deposits on optical
filter window. Also forms highly corrosive
HNO3 (nitric acid).

In cases with excessively high CO2 concentrations (larger than 0.5%), the effect can be
calibrated out by using calibration gases with a CO2 content equal to the measured air. Only
very high and highly variable CO2 concentrations will then be cause of measurable interfer-

160 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

ence. For those applications, we recommend to use other analyzer models. Please consult
sales or our website.

10.1.5.3. Light Leaks

The M200E sensitivity curve includes a small portion of the visible light spectrum
(Figure 10-3), hence, it is important to make sure than the reaction cell is completely
sealed with respect to light. To ensure this, all pneumatic tubing leading into the reaction
cell is either opaque (vacuum exit tubing) in order to prevent light from entering the cell or
light penetration is prevented by stainless steel filters and orifices (gas entries).

10.2. Pneumatic Operation

CAUTION
It is important that the sample airflow system is leak-tight and not pressurized
over ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer
as described in the maintenance schedule, Table 9-1. Procedures for correctly
performing leak checks can be found in Section 11.5.

10.2.1. Pump and Exhaust Manifold

NOTE
Relative Pressure versus absolute pressure. In this manual vacuum readings are
given in inches of mercury absolute pressure (in-Hg-A), i.e. indicate an absolute
pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).

The gas flow for the M200E is created by an external pump (Figure 10-5) that is pneumati-
cally connected through a 6.4 mm / 0.25” tube to the analyzer’s exhaust port located on
the rear panel (Figure 3-2). This pump creates a vacuum of approximately 5 in-Hg-A at one
standard liter/minute, which is provided to various pneumatic components by a vacuum
manifold located just in front of the rear panel (Figure 3-2 and Figure 10-9). Gas flow is
created by keeping the analyzer’s sample gas inlet near ambient pressure, usually by
means of a small vent installed in the sample line at the inlet, in effect pulling the gas
through the instrument’s pneumatic systems.

There are several advantages to this external pump / pull-through configuration.

• By using an external pump, it is possible to remove a significant source of acoustic

noise and vibration from the immediate vicinity of the sensor. The PMT can act as a
“microphone”, amplifying noise and vibration within the chassis. This is one of the
main reasons, why the M200E has an external pump.
• Pumping heats and compresses the sample air, complicating the measurement
process if the pump is upstream.
• Most importantly, however, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of
materials that might chemically react with the sample gas. Placing the pump
downstream of the reaction cell avoids these problems.

044100102 Rev A 161

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

See Section 3.1 for information on connecting and operating the external pump.

Figure 10-5: External Pump Pack

Finally, the M200E requires a steady, high underpressure, which cannot be achieved reliably
over extended periods of time with small vacuum pumps. The external pump used for the
M200E has a very long lifetime and duty cycle and provides a very good vacuum for its
entire lifetime. However, the pump is too large to fit into the chassis of the analyzer.

10.2.2. Sample Gas Flow

The sample gas is the most critical flow path in the analyzer, as the medium has to be
routed through a variety of valves and tubes for the measurement of zero offset and
concentrations of both NO and NOX (and possibly the drying of the gas if the optional
sample dryer is installed). At any point before and in the reaction cell, the integrity of the
sample gas cannot be compromised.

Sample gas flow in the M200E analyzer is not a directly measured value, but is rather
calculated from the sample pressure using the flow principle across a critical orifice. In
general, the differential pressure ratio between sample pressure and reaction cell pressure
needs to exceed 2:1 to allow critical flow. The actual flow rate is then only dependent on
the size of the orifice and the upstream pressure. Refer to Section 10.2.9 for a detailed
description of critical flow.

The M200E uses a 0.010” (10 mil) diameter orifice to achieve a flow rate of about
450-500 cm³/min. With nominal pressures of 28 and 4 in-Hg-A for the sample and reaction
cell pressures, respectively. The necessary ratio of sample to reaction cell pressure of 2:1 is
largely exceeded and accommodates a wide range of possible variability in atmospheric
pressure and pump degradation. Once the pump degrades and vacuum pressure exceeds
14 in-Hg-A, the ratio between sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1 and, hence, a
critical flow rate can no longer be calculated. At this point, the instrument will display an
invalid sample flow rate measurement (XXXX).

162 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

Table 10-2: M200E Valve Cycle Phases

Phase NO/ NOX Autozero Time Activity Figure

Valve Valve Index
Status Status
NO Open to Open to 0-2s Wait period (NO dwell time). Figure 10-2
Measure AutoZero reaction Ensures reaction cell has been
valve cell flushed of previous gas.
2-4s Analyzer measures chemilumi-
nescence in reaction cell.
NOX Open to Open to 4–6s Wait period (NOX dwell time). Figure 10-2
Measure NO2 reaction Ensures reaction cell has been
converter cell flushed of previous gas.
6–8s Analyzer measures NO + O3
chemiluminescence in reaction
cell.
Cycle repeats every ~8 seconds
AutoZero Open to Open to 0–4s Wait period (AZERO dwell time). Figure 10-4
AutoZero vacuum Ensures reaction cell has been
valve manifold flushed of sample gas and
chemiluminescence reaction is
stopped.
4-6s Analyzer measures background
noise without sample gas
Cycle repeats every minute

The M200E uses a 0.010” (10 mil) diameter orifice to achieve a flow rate of about
450-500 cm³/min. With nominal pressures of 28 and 4 in-Hg-A for the sample and reaction
cell pressures, respectively. The necessary ratio of sample to reaction cell pressure of 2:1 is
largely exceeded and accommodates a wide range of possible variability in atmospheric
pressure and pump degradation. Once the pump degrades and vacuum pressure exceeds
14 in-Hg-A, the ratio between sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1 and, hence, a
critical flow rate can no longer be calculated. At this point, the instrument will display an
invalid sample flow rate measurement (XXXX).

For the routing of the sample gas flow, the analyzer uses a variety of valves. The NO/NOX
valve directs the sample gas either directly to the reaction cell or through the unit’s NO2
converter, alternating every ~4 s. The AutoZero valve directs the sample gas stream to
completely bypass the reaction cell for dark noise measurement once every minute, which
is then subtracted as a measurement offset from the raw concentration signal. The valve
cycle phases are summarized in Table 10-2.

10.2.3. Sample Particulate Filter

To remove particles in the sample gas, the analyzer is equipped with a PTFE membrane
filter of 47 mm diameter (also referred to as the sample filter) with a 1 µm pore size. The
filter is accessible through the front panel, which folds down (after removal of the CE Mark
safety screw), and should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in Table 9-1.

044100102 Rev A 163

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

10.2.4. Ozone Gas Air Flow

The excess ozone needed for reaction with NO in the reaction cell is generated inside the
analyzer because of the instability and toxicity of ozone. Besides the ozone generator itself,
this requires a dry air supply and filtering of the gas before it is introduced into the reaction
cell. Due to its toxicity and aggressive chemical behavior, O3 must also be removed from
the gas stream before it can be vented through the exhaust outlet.

In contrast to the sample flow, the ozone flow is measured with a mass flow sensor, which
is mounted on the pneumatic sensor board (Figure 11-5), just behind the PMT sensor
assembly. This mass flow sensor has a full scale range of 0-1000 cm³/min and can be
calibrated through software to its span point (Section 6.7.8). As the flow value displayed on
the front panel is an actual measurement (and not a calculated value), the flow variability
may be higher than that of the sample flow, which is based on a calculation from (more
stable) differential pressures. On the other hand, the drift, i.e. long-term change, in the
ozone flow rate may be higher and usually indicates a flow problem. As with all other test
parameters, we recommend to monitor the ozone flow over time for predictive diagnostics
and maintenance evaluation.

CAUTION
Ozone (O3) is a toxic gas. Obtain a Material and Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for this gas. Read and rigorously follow the safety guide-
lines described there. Always make sure that the plumbing of the
O3 generation and supply system is maintained and leak-free.

10.2.5. O3 Generator
The M200E uses a corona discharge (CD) tube for creating its O3. Corona discharge gener-
ation is capable of producing high concentrations of ozone efficiently and with low excess
heat. Although there are many cell designs, the fundamental principle remains the same
(Figure 10-6).

Figure 10-6: Ozone Generator Principle

164 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

The M200E utilizes a dual-dielectric design. This method utilizes a glass tube with hollow
walls. The outermost and innermost surfaces are coated with electrically conductive
material. The air flows through the glass tube, between the two conductive coatings, in
effect creating a capacitor with the air and glass acting as the dielectric. The layers of glass
also separate the conductive surfaces from the air stream to prevent reaction with the O3.
As the capacitor charges and discharges, electrons are created and accelerated across the
air gap and collide with the O2 molecules in the air stream splitting them into elemental
oxygen. Some of these oxygen atoms recombine with O2 to O3.

The quantity of ozone produced is dependent on factors such as the voltage and frequency
of the alternating current applied to the CD cells. When enough high-energy electrons are
produced to ionize the O2 molecules, a light emitting, gaseous plasma is formed, which is
commonly referred to as a corona, hence the name corona discharge generator.

10.2.6. Perma Pure® Dryer

The air supplied to the O3 generation system needs to be as dry as possible. Normal room
air contains a certain amount of water vapor, which greatly diminishes the yield of ozone
produced by the ozone generator. Also, water can react with other chemicals inside the O3
Generator to produce chemicals that damage the optical filter located in the reaction cell
(Table 10-4) such as ammonium sulfate or highly corrosive nitric acid.

To accomplish this task the M200E uses a Perma Pure® single tube permeation dryer. The
dryer consists of a single tube of Nafion® , a co-polymer similar to Teflon® that absorbs
water very well but not other chemicals. The Nafion® tube is mounted within an outer,
flexible plastic tube. As gas flows through the inner Nafion® tube, water vapor is absorbed
into the membrane walls. The absorbed water is transported through the membrane wall
and evaporates into the dry, purge gas flowing through the outer tube, countercurrent to
the gas in the inner tube (Figure 10-7).

Figure 10-7: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process

This process is called per-evaporation and is driven by the humidity gradient between the
inner and outer tubes as well as the flow rates and pressure difference between inner and
outer tubing. Unlike micro-porous membrane permeation, which transfers water through a
relatively slow diffusion process, per-evaporation is a simple kinetic reaction. Therefore, the
drying process occurs quickly, typically within milliseconds. The first step in this process is a
chemical reaction between the molecules of the Nafion® material and water, other chemical

044100102 Rev A 165

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

components of the gases to be dried are usually unaffected. The chemical reaction is based
on hydrogen bonds between the water molecule and the Nafion material. Other small polar
gases that are capable of hydrogen bonds can be absorbed this way, too, such as ammonia
(NH3) and some low molecular amines. The gases of interest, NO and NO2, do not get
absorbed and pass the dryer unaltered.

To provide a dry purge gas for the outer side of the Nafion tube, the M200E returns some of
the dried air from the inner tube to the outer tube (Figure 10-8). When the analyzer is first
started, the humidity gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not very large and the
dryer’s efficiency is low at first but improves as this cycle reduces the moisture in the
sample gas and settles at a minimum humidity.

Figure 10-8: M200E Perma Pure® Dryer

Just like on startup, if the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30
minutes, it takes a certain amount of time for the humidity gradient to become large
enough for the Perma Pure® Dryer to adequately dry the air. In this case, called a cold
start, the O3 Generator is not turned on for 30 minutes. When rebooting the instrument
within less than 30 minutes of power-down, the generator is turned on immediately.

The Perma Pure® Dryer used in the M200E is capable of adequately drying ambient air to a
dew point of ≤ -5ûC (~4000 ppm residual H2O) at a flow rate of 1 standard liter per minute
(slpm) or down to ≤ -15ûC (~1600 ppm residual H2O) at 0.5 slpm. The Perma Pure® Dryer
is also capable of removing ammonia from the sample gas up to concentrations of
approximately 1 ppm.

10.2.7. Ozone Supply Air Filter

The M200E uses ambient air as the supply gas for the O3 generator and may produce a
variety of byproducts. Small amounts of water, ammonia and various sulfur oxides can
combine to create ammonium sulfate, ammonium nitrate, nitric acid and other compounds.
Whereas sulfates and nitrates can create powdery residues inside the reaction cell causing

166 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

sensitivity drift, nitric acid is a very aggressive compound, which can deteriorate the
analyzer’s components. In order to remove these chemical byproducts from the O3 gas
stream, the output of the O3 generator flows through a special filter between the generator
and the reaction cell.

Any NOX that may be produced in the generator (from reaction of O2 or O3 and N2 in the air)
and may cause an artifact in the measurement, is calibrated out through the Auto-zero
functionality, which checks the background signal of the O3 stream only once per minute.

10.2.8. Ozone Scrubber

Even though ozone is unstable and typically reacts to form O2, the break-down is not quite
fast enough to ensure that it is completely removed from the exhaust gas stream of the
M200E by the time the gas exits the analyzer. Due to the high toxicity and reactivity of O3,
a special catalytic ozone scrubber is used to remove all of the O3 exiting the reaction cell.
Besides its efficient destruction of O3, this catalyst does not produce any toxic or hazardous
gases as it only converts ozone to oxygen and it also does not pose an explosion hazard like
charcoal scrubbers.

The O3 scrubber is located inside the NO2 converter housing next to the NO2 converter in
order to utilize residual heat given of by the converter heater. Even though the catalyst is
100% efficient at scrubbing ozone at room temperature, heating it significantly reduces the
necessary residence time (the amount of time the gas must be in contact with the catalyst)
for 100% efficiency and full efficiency can be maintained at higher gas flow rates. As this is
a true catalytic converter, there are no maintenance requirements as would be required for
charcoal-based scrubbers.

A certain amount of fine, black dust may exit the catalyst, particularly if the analyzer is
subjected to sudden pressure drops (for example, when disconnecting the running pump
without letting the analyzer properly and slowly equilibrate to ambient pressure). To avoid
the dust from entering the reaction cell or the pump, the scrubber is equipped with sintered
stainless steel filters of 20 µm pore size on either end and on some models, an additional
dust filter may be attached to the exhaust port.

10.2.9. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices

In order to maintain constant flow rates for both the O3 supply air and the sample gas, the
M200E uses a variety of flow control assemblies located at various key places in the
pneumatic system of the instrument (Figure 10-9).

The most important component of each flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a simple means to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate
without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the
flow of gas through the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This pressure differential,
created by the analyzer’s external pump, draws the gas through the orifice.

As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,
the speed of the gas flowing through the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of
upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas
through the orifice reaches the speed of sound and remains constant, regardless of any
further pressure difference. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1, the gas flow rate is
unaffected by fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure because such

044100102 Rev A 167

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out at
the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.

Figure 10-9: Location of Flow Control Assemblies

Figure 10-10: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice

The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice depends entirely on the size and shape of the
aperture in the orifice and the upstream pressure. The larger the hole or the higher the

168 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

upstream pressure, the more gas molecules pass through the orifice. The flow rate of the
gas is also unaffected by small degradations in pump efficiency due to age as long as the
2:1 pressure difference is maintained.

Table 10-3: M200E Gas Flow Rates

Flowrate
Location Purpose Orifice Diameter
(nominal)
Sample gas inlet of Controls rate of flow of sample gas into
0.010” (0.25 mm) 500 cm³/min
reaction cell the reaction cell.
O3 supply inlet of Controls rate of flow of ozone gas into
0.004” (0.10 mm) 80 cm³/min
reaction cell. the reaction cell.
Dry air return of Controls flow rate of dry air return /
0.004” (0.10 mm) 80 cm³/min
Perma Pure® dryer purge air of the dryer.
Controls rate of sample gas flow when
Vacuum manifold ,
bypassing the reaction cell during the 0.010” (0.25 mm) 500 cm³/min
auto-zero port.
auto-zero cycle.
Controls rate of flow of zero purge gas
Vacuum manifold,
through the IZS option (when installed 0.004” (0.10 mm) 80 cm³/min
IZS exhaust port
and enabled) when inactive.

Note that the diameter of the critical orifice may change with temperature because of
expansion of the orifice material (ruby) and, hence, the most critical flow orifices in the
M200E are maintained at a constant temperature inside the reaction cell. These are the
sample and O3 flows. Table 10-3 shows the flow rates for each of the critical flow orifices of
the M200E. See Appendix B for spare part numbers of these orifices.

In addition to controlling the gas flows, the two critical flow orifices at the inlets of the
reaction cell also maintain an underpressure inside the reaction cell, effectively reducing the
number of molecules in the chamber and therefore increasing the chemiluminescence yield
as the likelihood of third body quenching is reduced (Section 10.1.5.1). The M200E
sensitivity reaches a peak at about 2 in-Hg-A, below which the sensitivity drops due to a
low number of molecules and decreased yield in the chemiluminescence reaction.

The other components of the flow control assemblies are:

• A sintered stainless steel filter, which prevents particulates from entering the
reaction cell and potentially plug the orifice. Note that very fine sub-micron particles
may still accumulate on that filter and slowly clog up either the filter or the orifice
over time. See Chapter 11 on trouble-shooting sample flow for more information.
• Two O-rings are located before and after the critical flow orifice to seal the gap
between the walls of the assembly housing and the critical orifice and force all gas
through the orifice opening.
• A spring applies mechanical force to form the seal between the o-rings, the critical
flow orifice and the assembly housing and to prevent the components to float up and
turn on sudden pressure drops.

044100102 Rev A 169

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

10.2.10. Pneumatic Sensors

NOTE
The M200E displays all pressures in inches of mercury absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e.
absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).

The M200E uses three pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams. These sensors are located
on a printed circuit assembly, called the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board, located just
behind the sensor assembly.

10.2.10.1. Sample Pressure Sensor

An absolute pressure transducer connected to the input of the NO/NOX valve is used to
measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the analyzer’s reaction cell. This is
the “upstream” pressure mentioned above and the pressure that is used to compute sample
flow rate. In conjunction with the vacuum pressure sensor, it is also used to validate the
critical flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio) through the sample gas critical flow orifice
(Section 10.2.9). If the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on
(Section 10.4.3), the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that
calculation.

The actual pressure measurement is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display as
the test function SAMP. The flow rate of the sample gas is viewable as the SAMP FLW test
function.

10.2.10.2. Vacuum Pressure Sensor

An absolute pressure transducer connected to the exhaust manifold is used to measure the
pressure downstream from and inside the instrument’s reaction cell. The output of the
sensor is used by the CPU to calculate the pressure differential between the gas upstream
of the reaction cell and the gas downstream from it and is also used as the main diagnostic
for proper pump operation. If the ratio between the upstream pressure and the downstream
pressure falls below 2:1, a warning message (SAMPLE FLOW WARN) is displayed on the
analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the sample flow rate will display XXXX instead of
an actual value. If this pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A, an RCEL Pressure Warning is
issued, even though the analyzer will continue to calculate a sample flow rate up to about
14 in-Hg-A.

Also, if the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 10.4.3),

the output of this sensor is used to supply pressure data for that calculation. This meas-
urement is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel as the test function RCEL.

10.2.10.3. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor

A mass flow meter connected between the Perma Pure® dryer and the O3 generator
measures the flow rate of O3 supply air through the analyzer. This information is used to
validate the O3 gas flow rate. If the flow rate exceeds ±15% of the nominal flow rate (80
cm³/min), a warning message OZONE FLOW WARNING is displayed on the analyzer’s
front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the O3 generator is turned off. As second warning, OZONE

170 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

GEN OFF, is displayed. This flow measurement is viewable through instrument’s front panel
display as the test function OZONE FL.

10.3. Electronic Operation

Figure 10-11 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the M200E.

Figure 10-11: M200E Electronic Block Diagram

The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes,
interprets data, calculates data, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by

044100102 Rev A 171

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

T-API. It communicates with the user, receives data from and issues commands to a variety
of peripheral devices through the motherboard, the main printed circuit assembly on the
rear panel (Figure 3-2).

10.3.1. CPU
The CPU is a low power (5 VDC, 0.8A max), high performance, 386-based microcomputer
running a version of the DOS operating system. Its operation and assembly conform to the
PC-104 specification, version 2.3 for embedded PC and PC/AT applications. It has 2 MB of
DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock rate over an internal, 32-bit data
and address bus. Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4-channel, direct memory
access (DMA) devices over data busses of either 8-bit or 16-bit bandwidth. The CPU
supports both RS-232 and RS-485 serial protocols. Figure 10-12 shows the CPU board.

• The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways:
• Through the analyzer’s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked,
digital, serial I/O bus using the I2C protocol (read I-square-C bus)
• RS-232 and/or RS-485 serial ports (one of which can be connected to an Ethernet
converter)
• Various analog voltage and current outputs
• Several digital I/O channels

Figure 10-12: M200E CPU Board Annotated

Finally, the CPU issues commands (also over the I2C bus) to a series of relays and switches
located on a separate printed circuit assembly, the relay board (located in the right rear of

172 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

the chassis on its own mounting bracket) to control the function of heaters and valves. The
CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage, one disk-on-chip and one or two flash
chips.

10.3.1.1. Disk On Chip

Technically, the disk-on-chip is an EEPROM, but appears to the CPU as, behaves as, and
performs the same functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive, internally labeled as DOS
drive C:\. It is used to store the computer’s operating system files, the T-API firmware and
peripheral files, and the operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data
acquisition system (iDAS - Sections 10.4.5 and 6.11).

10.3.1.2. Flash Chip

The flash chip is another, smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space, internally labeled as
DOS drive B:\. The M200E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The
M200E standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to
store the analyzer configuration as created during final checkout at the factory. Separating
these data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data
corruption through drive failure.

In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate
with just the DOC. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the unit to
be recalibrated.

10.3.2. Sensor Module, Reaction Cell & PMT

Electronically, the M200E sensor assembly (Figure 10-13) consists of several subassemblies
with different tasks: to detect the intensity of the light from the chemiluminescence reaction
between NO and O3 in the reaction cell, to produce a current signal proportional to the
intensity of the chemiluminescence, to control the temperature of the PMT to ensure the
accuracy and stability of the measurements and to drive the high voltage power supply that
is needed for the PMT. The individual functions are described individually below, Section
11.6.6 shows the sensor assembly and its components.

10.3.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit

The stability of the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 can be affected by

changes in the temperature and pressure of the O3 and sample gases in the reaction cell. In
order to reduce temperature effects, the reaction cell is maintained at a constant 50° C, just
above the high end of the instrument’s operation temperature range.

Two AC heaters, one embedded into the bottom of the reaction cell, the other embedded
directly above the chamber’s exhaust fitting, provide the heat source. These heaters
operate off of the instrument’s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a
power relay on the relay board (Section 10.3.4). A thermistor, also embedded in the bottom
of the reaction cell, reports the cell’s temperature to the CPU through the thermistor
interface circuitry of the motherboard (Section 10.3.5).

044100102 Rev A 173

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

10.3.2.2. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT)

The M200E uses a photo multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the chemiluminescence created by
the reaction of NO with O3 in the reaction cell.

A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes

(Figure 10-13). Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter
the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. A high
voltage potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of
high voltage dynodes. The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that
each stage multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons.
The greatly increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier are
collected by a positively charged anode at the other end, which creates a useable current
signal. This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the
motherboard.

Figure 10-13: Schematic of Basic PMT Design and Functionality

A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the
electron multiplier. The higher the voltage, the greater is the number of electrons emitted
from each dynode of the electron multiplier, making the PMT more sensitive and responsive
to small variations in light intensity but also increases random noise (dark noise). The gain
voltage of the PMT used in the M200E is usually set between 450 V and 800 V. This
parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (Section 6.2.1) and
does not need to be changed unless the PMT or the HVPS itself is changed. For information
on when and how to set this voltage, see Section 11.6.5.

The PMT is housed inside the sensor module assembly (Figure 11-7). This assembly also
includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the PMT, an LED used by the
instrument’s optical test function (Section 6.7.5), a thermistor that measures the tempera-
ture of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system including the thermo-
electric cooler (TEC).

10.3.2.3. PMT Cooling System

The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature. The warmer
it is, the noisier its signal becomes and significant variations in PMT temperature will render
the concentration signal useless, as it will directly reflect those variations.

174 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

The core part of the M200E PMT cooling system is a thermoelectric cooler (TEC), which
keeps the PMT temperature at a constant, low level (7±2°C) for optimum performance.
Thermoelectric coolers are solid state (semi-conductor) heat pumps, which transfer heat
from one side to the other when a DC current is passed through its circuits. Heat absorbed
at the cold junction (the PMT cold-block) is pumped to the hot junction (the cooling fins) at
a rate proportional to the current passing through the TEC circuit and the number of
junctions. The TEC is just one of many components in the M200E’s PMT cooling system as
shown in Figure 11-7.

10.3.2.4. TEC Control Board

The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located under the slanted shroud, next to the
cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan. Using the amplified PMT temperature signal
from the PMT preamplifier board, it sets the drive for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer
the PMT gets, the more current is passed through the TEC.

A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control circuit is
receiving power. Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly. For the
definitions and acceptable signal levels of these test points see Chapter 11.

10.3.2.5. PMT Preamplifier

The PMT preamplifier board (Figure 10-14 and Figure 11-3) converts and amplifies the PMT
current signal into a useable analog voltage (PMTDET) that can be used by the CPU to
calculate the NO concentration of the gas in the reaction cell.

The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments. First, the voltage
across the electron multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two hexadecimal
switches. Adjusting this voltage directly affects the HVPS voltage and, hence, the signal
from the PMT. Secondly, the gain of the amplified signal can further be adjusted through a
potentiometer. These adjustments should only be performed when encountering problems
that cannot be rectified with the software calibration. See Section 11.6.5 for this hardware
calibration.

The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7° C and can be
viewed as test function PMT TEMP on the front panel.

The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal that simulates the
output of the PMT. By bypassing the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test most of
the signal handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. See Section
6.7.6 for instructions on performing this test.

The optical test (OTEST) consists of an LED inside the PMT cold block that creates a light
signal, which can be measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to the analyzer, the
entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested including the PMT and
the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier board.

044100102 Rev A 175

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 10-14: PMT Preamp Block Diagram

10.3.3. Pneumatic Sensor Board

The flow and pressure sensors of the M200E are located on a printed circuit assembly just
behind the PMT sensor. Refer to Section 11.5.15 for a figure and on how to test this
assembly. The signals of this board are supplied to the motherboard for further signal
processing. All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from the
front panel.

176 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

10.3.4. Relay Board

The relay board is the central switching and power distribution unit of the analyzer. It
contains power relays, valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as
well as thermocouple amplifiers, power distribution connectors and the two switching power
supplies of the analyzer. The relay board communicates with the motherboard over the I2C
bus and can be used for detailed trouble-shooting of power problems and valve or heater
functionality. See Figure 11-4 for an annotated view of the relay board.

10.3.4.1. Heater Control

The M200E uses a variety of heaters for its individual components. All heaters are AC
powered and can be configured for 100/120 VAC or 220/230VAC at 50-60 Hz. The M200E
has five power relays, only some of which are used for the following circuits.

The two reaction cell heaters are electronically connected in parallel for analyzers at
100/120 VAC line power and in series for units configured for 220/230 VAC. One configura-
tion plug on the relay board determines the power configuration for the entire analyzer.

In order to operate efficiently, the NO2 converter must be heated to 315ûC. An AC band
heater wrapped around the NO2 converter cartridge contains two heater coils that can also
be configured with the above configuration plug. A thermocouple imbedded in the heater
measures the temperature and feeds a small voltage to the relay board’s thermocouple
amplifier, which, in turn, transmits the linearized analog voltage to the motherboard.

On units with IZS options installed, an additional set of AC heaters is attached to the IZS
oven. Some special M200E models may have other, non-standard heating zones installed,
such as a bypass manifold.

10.3.4.2. Valve Control

The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four valves.
The main valve assembly in the M200E is the NO/NOX - Auto-zero solenoid valve component
mounted right in front of the NO2 converter housing. These two valves are actuated with
12 V supplied from the relay board and driven by the CPU through the I2Z bus.

A second set of valves may be installed if the zero/span valve or the IZS option is enabled
in the analyzer. Specialty manifold valves may be present in the analyzer.

10.3.4.3. Status LEDs

Sixteen LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to indicate the status of the
analyzer’s heating zones and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator.
Section 11.1.4.3 shows the states of these LEDs and their respective functionality and
location.

Special status circuitry monitors the communication between motherboard and relay board
and drives the red LED labeled D1 (watchdog LED). Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF
for 30 seconds, the watchdog circuit will assume lost connection and automatically turn of
all valves and heaters and may cause the analyzer to reboot or the I2Z bus to hang up.

044100102 Rev A 177

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

10.3.5. Motherboard
This is the largest electronic assembly in the analyzer and is mounted to the rear panel as
the base for the CPU board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly provides a
multitude of functions including A/D conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C
translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and
RS-485 signals.

10.3.5.1. A to D Conversion

Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are
converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to
digital converter (A/D).Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a
particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word.

The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device

(PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F
converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output
of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that count, in the form of
a binary number, to the CPU.

The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the is used in
uni-polar mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range.
This allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted.

For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter:
Reference ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two
voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute
the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent conversions. See
Section 6.7.8 for instructions on performing this calibration.

10.3.5.2. Sensor Inputs

The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master
multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ ) on
each of the inputs prevent cross-talk between the sensor signals.

• The PMT detector output from the PMT preamplifier is used in the computation of the
NO, NOX and NO2 concentrations displayed on the front panel display and reported
through the instrument’s analog outputs and COM ports.
• The PMT high voltage is based on the drive voltage from the preamplifier board. It is
digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the voltage setting of the
HVPS and stored in the instrument’s memory as the test function HVPS.
• The PMT temperature is measured with a thermistor inside the PMT cold block. Its
signal is amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on the preamplifier board
and is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the current
temperature of the PMT. This measurement is stored in the iDAS and displayed as
test function PMT TEMP.
• The NO2 converter temperature is measured with a Type-K thermocouple attached to
the NO2 converter heater and its analog signal is amplified by the circuitry on the
relay board. It is sent to the CPU and then digitized and is used to calculate the

178 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

current temperature of the NO2 converter. It is also stored in the iDAS and reported
as test function MOLY TEMP.
• The sample gas pressure is measured upstream of the reaction cell, stored in the
iDAS and reported as SAMPLE. The vacuum gas pressure is measured downstream
of the reaction cell and is stored in the iDAS and reported as RCEL. For more
information on these sensor’s functions see Section 10.2.10.
• The O3 gas flow is measured upstream of the ozone generator, stored in the iDAS
and reported as test function OZONE FL. For more information on this sensor’s
function see Section 10.2.10.

10.3.5.3. Thermistor Interface

This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-
coefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are:

• The reaction cell temperature sensor is a thermistor embedded in the reaction cell
manifold. This temperature is used by the CPU to control the reaction cell heating
circuit and as a parameter in the temperature/pressure compensation algorithm.
This measurement is stored in the analyzer’s iDAS and reported as test function
RCEL TEMP.
• BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It
measures the analyzer’s inside temperature. This information is stored by the CPU
and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel
display. It is also used as part of the NO, NOX and NO2 calculations when the
instrument’s Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled. This
measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function BOX TEMP and
is viewable as a test function (Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.
• The IZS option’s thermistor is attached to the IZS oven and reports the current
temperature of the NO2 permeation source to the CPU as part of a control loop that
keeps the tube at a constant temperature. It is stored and reported as test function
IZS TEMP.
• The thermistor inside the PMT cold block as well as the thermistor located on the
preamplifier board are both converted to analog signals on the preamplifier board
before being sent to the motherboard’s A/D converter. They are not connected to the
motherboard’s thermistor circuitry. The cold block temperature is stored and
reported as test function PMT TEMP, whereas the preamplifier board temperature is
neither stored nor reported. It is used only as a reference internal to the
preamplifier.

10.3.5.4. Analog Outputs

The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs. On the instrument’s rear panel
ANALOG connector, they are labeled A1, A2, A3 and A4.

Outputs labeled A1, A2 and A3 carry the concentration signals of NOX, NO and NO2,
respectively. A variety of scaling measurement and electronic factors apply to these signals.
See Section 6.6 for information on setting the reporting range type and measurement range
scaling factors for these output channels. See Sections 6.7 for instructions on setting the
electronic scaling factors for these channels.

044100102 Rev A 179

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

The output labeled A4 can be set by the user (Section 6.7.2) to carry the signal of any of
these TEST parameters: none , PMT DETECTOR, OZONE FLOW, SAMPLE FLOW,
SAMPLE PRESSURE, RCELL PRESSURE, RCELL TEMP, MANIFOLD TEMP, IZS TEMP,
CONV TEMP, PMT TEMP, BOX TEMP, HVPS VOLTAGE.

In its standard configuration, the analyzer comes with all four of these channels set up to
report a DC voltage (default A4 signal is NONE). However, current loop drivers can be
purchased for the first three of these outputs, A1 to A3 (Section 5.3. for this optional
equipment, Section 6.7.3.5 for setup).

All of the analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a loop-back
circuit, which permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without the need for
any additional tools or fixtures (Section 6.7.3).

10.3.5.5. External Digital I/O

The external digital I/O performs two functions.

The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin
connector on the rear panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey on/off information about
certain analyzer conditions such as CONC VALID. They can be used to interface with
certain types of programmable devices (Section 6.9.1).

The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source
such as a PLC or data logger (Section 6.9.2). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by
contact closures on the rear panel.

10.3.5.6. I2C Data Bus

I2C is a two-wire, clocked, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and
consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control
signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data are then fed to the keyboard/display interface
and finally onto the relay board.

Interface circuits on the keyboard/display interface and relay board convert the I2C data to
parallel inputs and outputs. An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the mother-
board allows the CPU to recognize and service key strokes on the keyboard.

10.3.5.7. Power-up Circuit

This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during analyzer start-up and sets the analog
outputs, external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots
and the instrument software can establish control.

10.3.6. Power Supply/ Circuit Breaker

The analyzer operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC (both
± 10%) between 47 and 63 Hz. Note, however, that the analyzer’s pump is specifically
configured for one voltage and one frequency only. Individual analyzers are set up at the
factory to accept one of these two voltage ranges. As illustrated in Figure 10-15, power
enters the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel

180 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

of the instrument. From there, it is routed through the ON/OFF switch located in the lower
right corner of the front panel and back to the relay board, which carries the switching
power supplies.

AC line power is stepped down and converted to DC power by two switching power supplies,
one for +12 VDC (5 A) for various valves and the TEC, and a second supply that provides
+5 VDC (3 A) and ±15 VDC (1.5/0.5 A) for logic and analog circuitry as well as the ozone
generator. All AC and DC Voltages are distributed through the relay board. A 5 ampere
circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply
power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer. Under normal operation,
the M200E draws about 1.5 A at 115 V and 2.0 A during start-up.

Figure 10-15: Power Distribution Block Diagram

CAUTION
Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing
this situation before turning the analyzer back on.

10.3.7. Communications Interface

The analyzer has several ways to communicate with the outside world as shown in Figure
10-16. Users can enter data and receive information directly through the front panel keypad

044100102 Rev A 181

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

and display. Direct communication with the CPU is also available through the analyzer’s RS-
232 and RS-485 ports. The analyzer can also send and receive different kinds of information
through its external, digital I/O connectors and through the four analog outputs, all located
on the rear panel.

Figure 10-16: M200E Electronic Interface Block Diagram

10.3.7.1. Front Panel

The front panel of the analyzer is hinged at the bottom and may be opened to gain access
to various components mounted on the panel itself or located near the front of the
instrument (such as the particulate filter). Two fasteners located in the upper right and left
corners of the panel lock it in place, whereas a locking screw in the center top prevents
users without tools from accessing the interior of the analyzer (Figure 3-2).

10.3.7.2. Display

The main display of the analyzer is an vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text
characters each. Information is organized in the following manner:

Mode Field: The far left portion of the top line of text displays the name of the operation
mode in which the analyzer is currently operating for more information on operation modes
see Section 6.1.

Message Field: The center portion of the top line of text displays a variety of informational
messages. Warning messages are displayed here as are responses by the analyzer to

182 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

queries for operation data about the instrument. During interactive tasks, such as instru-
ment calibration or certain diagnostic procedures, the instrument’s response messages are
also displayed here.

Concentration Field: The far right portion of the top line of text displays the concentration of
the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer. The number reported here is the
actual concentration of the sample gas reported in whatever units the user selects
(Section 6.5.6). This number remains unaffected, regardless of how the ranges of the
instrument’s analog outputs are configured.

Key Definition Field: The bottom line of text displays is reserved for defining the test
function of the row of keys just below the display. These definitions change depending on
which part of the software menu tree is currently being displayed.

10.3.7.3. Keypad

The row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display are the main method by
which the user interacts with the analyzer. These keys are context sensitive and are
dynamically re-defined as the user moves around in the software menu structure.

10.3.7.4. Front Panel States LED’s

There are three status LED’s located in the upper right corner of the M200E’s front panel:

Table 10-4: Front Panel Status LED’s

Name Color State Definition

SAMPLE Green Off Unit is not operating in sample mode, iDAS is
disabled.
On Unit is operating in Sample Mode, Front Panel
Display being updated, iDAS data being stored.
Blinking Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display
being updated, iDAS hold-off mode is ON, iDAS
disabled
CAL Yellow Off Auto Cal disabled
On Auto Cal enabled
Blinking Unit is in calibration mode
FAULT Red Off No warning exists
Blinking Warning(s) exist

10.3.7.5. Display / Keyboard Interface Electronics

The display of the analyzer is a vacuum fluorescence display with two lines of 40 text
characters each. Information is organized as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 10-17 shows the
electronic diagram of the display / keyboard circuitry.

Through the keyboard/display interface electronics, the M200E Analyzer captures the status
of the eight front panel keys, alerts the CPU when keys are depressed and manages
communications between the keyboard, the CPU and the front panel display. Except for the
keyboard interrupt status bit, all communication between the CPU and the keyboard/display

044100102 Rev A 183

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

is handle by the instrument’s I2C bus. The CPU controls the clock signal and determines
when the various devices on the bus are allowed to talk or required to listen. Data packets
are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information is intended.

Figure 10-17: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram

10.4. Software Operation

The M200E NOX analyzer’s core module is a high performance, 386-based microcomputer
running a version of DOS. On top of the DOS shell, special software developed by T-API
interprets user commands from various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores
data in the CPU’s memory devices and calculates the concentrations of NOX in the sample
gas. Figure 10-18 shows a block diagram of this software functionality.

10.4.1. Adaptive Filter

The M200E NOX analyzer software processes sample gas concentration data through a built-
in adaptive filter. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time
period, the M200E averages over a defined number of samples, with samples being about 8
seconds apart (reflecting the switching time of 4 s each for NO and NOX). This technique is
known as boxcar filtering. During operation, the software may automatically switch between
two different filters lengths based on the conditions at hand.

During constant or nearly constant concentrations, the software, by default, computes an

average of the last 42 samples, or approximately 5.6 minutes. This provides smooth and

184 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

stable readings and averages out a considerable amount of random noise for an overall less
noisy concentration reading.

If the filter detects rapid changes in concentration the filter reduces the averaging to only 6
samples or about 48 seconds to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly. Two conditions
must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First, the instantaneous concentra-
tion must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 50 ppb. Second, the instanta-
neous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 10% of the
average in the long filter.

Figure 10-18: Schematic of Basic Software Operation

If necessary, these boxcar filter lengths can be changed between 1 (no averaging) and
1000 samples but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio. Signal
noise increases accordingly when in adaptive filter mode, but remains within the official
M200E specifications defined by the EPA as long as the filter size remains at or above 3
samples.

In order to avoid frequent switching between the two filter sizes, the analyzer has a delay
of 120 s before switching out of adaptive filter mode, even if the two threshold conditions
are no longer met.

10.4.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset

Aside from the hardware calibration of the preamplifier board (Section 11.6.5) upon factory
checkout, calibration of the analyzer is usually performed in software. During instrument
calibration (Chapters 7 and 8) the user enters expected values for span gas concentration
through the front panel keypad and supplies the instrument with sample gas of know NO
and NOX concentrations. The readings are then compared to the expected values and the
software computes values for the new instrument slope and offset for both NO and NOX
response. These values are stored in memory for use in calculating the NO, NOX and NO2
concentration of the sample gas. By default, the iDAS stores 200 software calibration
settings for documentation, review and data analysis.

044100102 Rev A 185

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed on the
front panel. NO SLOPE, NOX SLOPE, NO OFFS and NOX OFFS are four of the test
parameters accessible through the <TST TST> buttons.

10.4.3. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC)

The software features a compensation of some temperature and pressure changes critical in
the measurement of NO and NOX concentration. When the TPC feature is enabled (default
setting), the analyzer divides the value of the PMT output signal (PMTDET) by a value
called TP_FACTOR. TP_FACTOR is calculated according to the following equation.

 RCELL TEMP ( K )   7 (in Hg )   SAMP (in Hg   BOX TEMP ( K )  Eq 10-5

TP _ FACTOR = A  × B   ×C  ×D  
 323 ( K )   RCEL (in Hg )   29.92 (in Hg )   298 ( K ) 

Where A, B, C, D are gain functions. The four parameters used to compute TP_FACTOR are:

• RCELL TEMP: The temperature of the reaction cell, measured in K.

• RCEL: The pressure of the gas in the vacuum manifold, measured in in-Hg-A.
• SAMP: The pressure of the sample gas before it reaches the reaction cell, measured
in in-Hg-A. This measurement is ~1 in-Hg-A lower than atmospheric pressure.
• BOX TEMP: The temperature inside the analyzer’s case measured in K. This is
typically about 5 K higher than room temperature.
The current value of all four of these measurements are viewable as TEST FUNCTIONS
through the instrument’s front panel display.

Note that, as RCEL TEMP, BOX TEMP and SAMP pressure increase, the value of
TP_FACTOR increases and, hence, the PMTDET value decreases. Conversely, increases in
the reaction cell pressure (RCEL) decrease TP_FACTOR and, hence increase the PMTDET
value. These adjustments are meant to counter-act changes in the concentrations caused
by these parameters.

Each of the terms in the above equation is attenuated by a gain function with a numerical
value based on a preset gain parameter (shown below in CAPITALIZED ITALICS) normalized
to the current value of the parameter being attenuated. The gain functions A, B, C and D
are defined as:

rcell _ temp( K )
A = 1 + [( − 1) × RCTEMP _ TPC _ GAIN ] Eq 10-6
323( K )

7(" Hg )
B = 1 + [( − 1) × RCPRESS _ TPC _ GAIN ] Eq 10-7
rcell _ pressure(" Hg )

rcell _ temp( K )
C = 1 + [( − 1) × SPRESS _ TPC _ GAIN ] Eq 10-8
323( K )

box _ temp( K )
D = 1 + [( − 1) × BXTEMP _ TPC _ GAIN ] Eq 10-9
298( K )

186 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Theory of Operation

The preset gain parameters are set at the factory and may vary from analyzer to analyzer.
Section 6.5 describes the method for enabling/disabling the TPC feature.

10.4.4. NO2 Converter Efficiency Compensation

Over time, the molybdenum in the NO2 converter oxidizes and looses its original capacity of
converting NO2 into NO, eventually resulting in a decreased converter efficiency (CE). Even
though we recommend to replace the converter if CE drops below 96%, the analyzer’s
firmware allows adjusting minor deviations of the CE from 1.000 and enables reporting the
true concentrations of NO2 and NOX. Converter efficiency is stored in the instrument’s
memory as a decimal fraction that is multiplied with the NO2 and NOX measurements to
calculate the final concentrations for each. Periodically, this efficiency factor must be
measured and - if it has changed from previous measurements - entered into the analyzer’s
memory (Section 7.1.7). Note that EPA applications do not allow an analyzer to be operated
if efficiency is below 96% or above 102%, even though the analyzer would allow to adjust
for larger discrepancies.

10.4.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (iDAS)

The iDAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users
to anticipate when an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can be stored
in non-volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with
common data analysis programs. The iDAS has a consistent user interface among all T-API
A- and E-series instruments. New data parameters and triggering events can be added to
the instrument as needed. Section 6.9.10 describes the iDAS and its default configuration in
detail, Chapter 9 shows the parameters that can be used for predictive diagnostics.

Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters, the iDAS can
store several months of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered off.
However, if new firmware or a new iDAS configuration are uploaded to the analyzer, we
recommend retrieving data before doing so to avoid data loss. The iDAS permits users to
access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The latter can
automatically report stored data for further processing. APICOM, a user-friendly remote
control program is the most convenient way to view, retrieve and store iDAS data
(Section 6.11.5).

044100102 Rev A 187

Theory of Operation Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

188 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

11. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems
with the analyzer.

NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.

CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with
the analyzer open and running. Exercise caution to avoid electrical
shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer. Do not
drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures. Do
not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while
operating inside the analyzer. Use common sense when operating
inside a running analyzer.

11.1. General Troubleshooting

The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and
repaired. During operation, the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and
provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring
operations.

A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps:

• Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.

• Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note
any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
• Use the internal electronic status LED’s to determine whether the electronic
communication channels are operating properly. Verify that the DC power supplies
are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay board. Note
that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color
of the corresponding test points on the relay board.
• Suspect a leak first! Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems
are eventually traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer (including the
external pump), the source of zero air or span gases or the sample gas delivery
system. Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external
gas lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged pump diaphragm, etc.
• Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.5.4. to confirm that the analyzer’s vital
functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay board, keyboard, PMT cooler,
etc.). See Figure 3-2, Figure 3-3, and Figure 3-4 for general layout of components

044100102 Rev A 189

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

and sub-assemblies in the analyzer. See the wiring interconnect diagram (document
04504) and interconnect list (document 04496) in Appendix D.

11.1.1. Warning Messages

The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message
displayed on the front panel. Table A-2 in Appendix A-3 contains a list of warning
messages, along with their meaning and recommended corrective action.

It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same
time, it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply,
relay board, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures
referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error analysis needs to be performed.

The analyzer will alert the user that a warning is active by displaying the keypad labels
MSG and CLR on the front panel and a text message in the top center line of the display as
shown in this example:

SAMPLE AZERO WARNING NOX =123.4

< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP

The analyzer will also issue a message to the serial port and cause the red FAULT LED on
the front panel to blink.

To view or clear a warning messages press:

SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX = XXX.X

<TST TST> keys replaced with
TEST key. Pressing TEST TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
deactivates warning messages
until new warning(s) are activated.

SAMPLE RANGE=500 PPB NOX = XXX.X MSG indicates that warning

messages are active.
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP All Warning messages are hidden,
but MSG button appears

SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX = XXX.X

Press CLR to clear the current
If warning messages re-appear, < TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP warning message.
the cause needs to be found. Do If more than one warning is
not repeatedly clear warnings active, the next message will
take its place.
without corrective action.
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE Mode.

Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages

11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions

Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the TEST functions, viewable from the
front panel, can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined
with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s theory of operation (Chapter 10). We
recommend to use the APICOM remote control program to download, graph and archive
TEST data for analysis and long-term monitoring of diagnostic data (Section 6.11.5).

190 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Appendix A-3. The actual values
for these test functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in the Final Test and
Validation Data Sheet, which was shipped with the instrument. Values outside the
acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s subsystems. Functions
with values that are within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the
measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure or a
maintenance item. A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C (T-API
part number 04503) to assist in recording the value of these test functions. The following
table contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range.

Table 11-1: Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values

Test Function Indicated Failure(s)

NOx STB Unstable concentrations; leaks
SAMPLE Fl Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice
OZONE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice
PMT Calibration off; HVPS problem; no flow (leaks)
NORM PMT AutoZero too high
Leaks; malfunctioning NONOx or AutoZero valve; O3 air filter cartridge
AZERO
exhausted
HVPS HVPS broken; calibration off; preamp board circuit problems
RCELL TEMP Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
BOX TEMP Environment out of temperature operating range; broken thermistor
TEC cooling circuit broken; relay board communication (I2C bus); 12 V power
PMT TEMP
supply
IZS TEMP (option) Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
Malfunctioning heater; disconnected or broken thermocouple; relay board
MOLY TEMP
communication (I2Z bus); relay burnt out; incorrect AC voltage configuration
RCEL (pressure) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices
Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices;
SAMP (pressure)
sample inlet overpressure;
HVPS out of range; low-level (hardware) calibration needs adjustment; span
NOX SLOPE
gas concentration incorrect; leaks
NOX OFF Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
HVPS out of range; low-level calibration off; span gas concentration incorrect;
NO SLOPE
leaks
NO OFFS Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
Time of Day Internal clock drifting; move across time zones; daylight savings time?

11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function

The signal I/O parameters found under the diagnostics (DIAG) menu combined with a
thorough understanding of the instrument’s theory of operation (Chapter 10) are useful for
troubleshooting in three ways:

• The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical
inputs and outputs.

044100102 Rev A 191

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can
be manually changed.
• Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled.
This allows to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of the
analyzer. Figure 11-2 shows an example of how to use the signal I/O menu to view the raw
voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. The
specific parameter will vary depending on the situation.

Figure 11-2: Switching Signal I/O Functions

11.1.4. Status LED’s

Several color-coded, light-emitting diodes (LED) are located inside the instrument to
determine if the analyzer’s CPU, I2C communications bus and the relay board are
functioning properly.

11.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog)

A red LED labeled DS5 in the upper portion of the motherboard (Figure 11-3), just to the
right of the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program. After power-up,
DS5 should flash on and off about once per second. If characters are visible on the front
panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted.
Contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer. If
30 - 60 seconds after a restart neither DS5 is flashing nor any characters are visible on the
front panel display, the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective. If DS5 is
permanently off or permanently on, the CPU board is likely locked up and the analyzer
should not respond (either with locked-up or dark front panel).

192 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

Figure 11-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator

11.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator

The CPU board has two red LEDs, the lower of which is the watchdog timer (the device that
pulses the motherboard watchdog). This LED is labeled LED2 and blinks about twice per
second (twice as fast as the motherboard LED) when operating normally. LED1 above LED2
should always be on. However, both CPU LEDs only indicate if the CPU is powered up
properly and generally working. The lower LED can continue to blink even if the CPU or
firmware are locked up.

11.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs

The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED,
labeled D1, which indicates the health of the I2C communications bus. This LED is the left-
most in LED row 1 in the center of the relay board when looking at the electronic compo-
nents. If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with the DIAG
menu I/O functions to test hardware functionality by manually switching devices on and off
and watching the corresponding LED go on or off.

Figure 11-4 illustrates the relay board layout including the two rows of LEDs, Table 11-2
lists the individual LED functions and the menu tree below shows how to access the manual
control of the I/O functions. Note that only some or the LEDs may be functional in your
analyzer model; the relay board layout is conceptualized for spare, future functionality and
is also common to many of the E-series analyzers.

044100102 Rev A 193

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 11-4: Relay Board PCA

To enter the signal I/O test mode to manually control I/O functions such as valves and
heaters, press the following keys while observing the relay board LEDs when toggling:

SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X DIAG SIGNAL I / O Use the NEXT & PREV
keys to move between
< TST TST > CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT signal types.

Use the JUMP key to

SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG I / O Test Signals Displayed Here go directly to a
specific signal
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
EXIT returns available SIGNALS
to the main
SAMPLE display EXAMPLE

SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG I / O JUMP TO: 5 Enter 05 to Jump
to Signal 5:
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT 0 5 ENTR EXIT (CAL_LED)

SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 DIAG I / O CAL_LED = ON Exit to return
to the
= 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT DIAG menu

Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be
captured with a computer or other output device.

194 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

Table 11-2: Relay Board Status LEDs

LED Color Function Fault Status Indicated Failure(s)

LED Row 1 (center of board)
D1 red Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus Continuously Failed or halted CPU; faulty
operation. ON or OFF motherboard, keyboard, relay
board; wiring between mother-
board, keyboard or relay board; +5
V power supply
D2 yellow Relay 0 - reaction cell Continuously Heater broken, thermistor broken
heater ON or OFF
D3 yellow Relay 1 - NO2 converter Continuously Heater broken, thermocouple
heater ON or OFF broken
1
D4 yellow Relay 2 - manifold heater Continuously Heater broken, thermistor broken
ON or OFF
2
D7 green Valve 0 - zero/span valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck, valve driver
status ON or OFF chip broken
2
D8 green Valve 1 - sample/cal valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck, valve driver
status ON or OFF chip broken
D9 green Valve 2 - auto-zero valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck, valve driver
status ON or OFF chip broken
D10 green Valve 3 - NO/NOx valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck, valve driver
status ON or OFF chip broken
LED Row 2 (top of board)
D5 yellow Relay 3 - IZS heater Continuously Heater broken, thermistor broken
ON or OFF
D6 yellow Relay 4 – (O2 sensor heater N/A N/A
200EH/EM)
D11 green Valve 4 – Spare N/A N/A
D12 green Valve 5 – Spare N/A N/A
D13 green Valve 6 – Spare N/A N/A
D14 green Valve 7 – Spare N/A N/A
D15 green Mosfet1/DC driver-Unused N/A N/A
D16 green Mosfet2/DC driver -Unused N/A N/A
1
Special configurations only
2
Only active for instruments with Z/S valve or IZS options installed

11.2. Gas Flow Problems

The M200E has two main flow paths, the sample flow and the flow of the ozone supply air.
With IZS or zero/span valve option installed, there is a third (zero air) and a fourth (span
gas) flow path, but either one of those is only controlled by critical flow orifices and not
displayed on the front panel or stored to the iDAS. The full flow diagrams of the standard
configuration and with options installed (Appendix D, document 04574) help in trouble-
shooting flow problems. In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories:

• Flow is too high

• Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable

044100102 Rev A 195

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Flow is zero (no flow)

When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate without
relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter to
perform a flow check as described in Section 6.7.8 is essential.

11.2.1. Zero or Low Flow Problems

11.2.1.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low

The M200E does not actually measure the sample flow but rather calculates it from a
differential pressure between sample and vacuum manifold. On flow failure, the unit will
display a SAMPLE FLOW WARNING on the front panel display and the respective test
function reports XXXX instead of a value “0”. This message applies to both a flow rate of
zero as well as a flow that is outside the standard range (350-600 cm³/min). Refer to
Section 0 for more information on sample flow.

If the analyzer displays XXXX for the sample flow, confirm that the external sample pump
is operating and configured for the proper AC voltage. Whereas the M200E can be internally
configured for two different power regimes (100-120 V and 220-240 V, either 50 or 60 Hz),
the external pump is physically different for each of three power regimes (100 V / 50 Hz,
115 V / 60 Hz and 230 V / 50 Hz). If the pump is not running, use an AC Voltmeter to make
sure that the pump is supplied with the proper AC power. If AC power is supplied properly,
but the pump is not running, replace the pump.

NOTE
Sample and vacuum pressures mentioned in this chapter refer to operation of the
analyzer at sea level. Pressure values need to be adjusted for elevated locations,
as the ambient pressure decreases by about 1 in-Hg per 300 m / 1000 ft.

If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, do the following three steps:

• Check for actual sample flow. To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the
sample tube from the sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument. Make sure
that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode. Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets
sucked in by the vacuum or, more properly, use a flow meter to measure the actual
flow. If there is proper flow of around 450-550 cm³/min, contact customer service. If
there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next step.
• Check pressures. Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in-Hg-A at sea
level (adjust as necessary when in elevated location, the pressure should be about
1” below ambient atmospheric pressure) and that the RCEL pressure is below 10 in-
Hg-A. The M200E will calculate a sample flow up to about 14 in-Hg-A RCEL pressure
but a good pump should always provide less than 10 in.
• If both pressures are the same and around atmospheric pressure, the pump does
not operate properly or is not connected properly. The instrument does not get
any vacuum.
• If both pressures are about the same and low (probably under 10 in-Hg-A, or
~20” on sample and 15” on vacuum), there is a cross-leak between sample flow

196 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

path and vacuum, most likely through the Perma Pure dryer flow paths. See
troubleshooting the Perma Pure dryer later in this chapter.
• If the sample and vacuum pressures are around their nominal values (28 and
<10 in-Hg-A, respectively) and the flow still displays XXXX, carry out a leak
check as described in Section 11.5.2
• If gas flows through the instrument during the above tests but goes to zero or is low
when it is connected to zero air or span gas, the flow problem is not internal to the
analyzer but likely caused by the gas source such as calibrators/generators, empty
gas tanks, clogged valves, regulators and gas lines.
• If an IZS or Zero/Span valve option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and
CALS. If the sample flow increases, suspect a bad Sample/Cal valve.
• If none of these suggestions help, carry out a detailed leak check of the analyzer as
described in Section 11.5.2.

11.2.1.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low

If there is zero or a low (<50 cm³/min) ozone flow, the unit displays an OZONE FLOW
WARNING message on the front panel and a value between 0.0 and 50 cm³/min for the
actual ozone flow as measured by the internal mass flow meter. In this case, carry out the
following steps:

• Check the actual flow rate through the ozone dryer by attaching the outlet of an
external flow meter to the inlet port of the dryer. This inlet port is inside the analyzer
at the end of the plastic particle filter (Section 9.3.2 for illustration). If there is
nominal flow (about 140 cm³/min from 80 cm³/min O3 flow and 60 cm³/min purge
flow), consult customer service as there is a problem with the firmware or
electronics.
• If the actual flow is low or zero, check if the pump operates properly. The RCEL
pressure should be below 10 in-Hg-A at sea level. If it is above 10”, rebuild the
pump (Section 9.3.4). Check the spare parts list in Appendix B on how to order
pump rebuild kits.
• Check if the particle filter is clogged. Briefly remove the particle filter to see if this
improves the flow. Be very cautious about handling the Perma Pure dryer fittings -
refer to Section 9.3.2 on proper handling instructions. If the filter is clogged, replace
it with a new unit. If taking off this filter does not solve the problem, continue to the
next step. Do not leave the Perma Pure dryer without filter for more than a few
seconds, as you may draw in dust, which will reduce the performance of the dryer.
• A leak between the flow meter and the reaction cell (where the flow-determining
critical orifice is located) may cause a low flow (the system draws in ambient air
through a leak after the flow meter). Check for leaks as described in Section 11.5.1.
Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check.
• The most likely cause for zero or low ozone flow is a clogged critical flow orifice or
sintered filter within the orifice assembly. The orifice that sets the ozone flow is
located on the reaction cell. Check the actual ozone flow by disconnecting the tube
from the reaction cell and measuring the flow going into the cell. If this flow is
correct (~80 cm³/min), the orifice works properly. If this flow is low, replace or
clean the orifice. The orifice holder assembly allows a quick and easy replacement of
the orifice, refer to Section 9.3.10 on how to do this. Appendix B lists a spare part kit
with a complete orifice assembly that allows a quick replacement with minimum

044100102 Rev A 197

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

instrument down-time. The clogged orifice can then be cleaned while the instrument
is running with the replacement.

11.2.2. High Flow

Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11% of
the nominal flow) should not occur in the M200E unless a pressurized sample, zero or span
gas is supplied to the inlet ports. Ensure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the
analyzer inlet ports.

When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would indicate
that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very unlikely case),
allowing more than nominal flow, or were replaced with an orifice of wrong specifications. If
the flows are within 15% higher than normal, we recommend to re-calibrate the flow
electronically using the procedure in Section 6.7.8, followed by a regular review of these
flows over time to see if the new setting is retained properly.

11.2.3. Sample Flow is Zero or Low But Analyzer Reports

Correct Flow
Note that the M200E analyzer can report a correct flow rate even if there is no or a low
actual sample flow through the reaction cell. The sample flow on the M200E is only
calculated from the sample pressure and critical flow condition is verified from the differ-
ence between sample pressure and vacuum pressure. If the critical flow orifice is partially or
completely clogged, both the sample and vacuum pressures are still within their nominal
ranges (the pump keeps pumping, the sample port is open to the atmosphere), but there is
no flow possible through the reaction cell.

Although measuring the actual flow is the best method, in most cases, this fault can also be
diagnosed by evaluating the two pressure values. Since there is no longer any flow, the
sample pressure should be equal to ambient pressure, which is about 1 in-Hg-A higher than
the sample pressure under normal operation. The reaction cell pressure, on the other hand,
is significantly lower than under normal operation, because the pump no longer has to
remove 500 cm³/min of sample gas and evacuates the reaction cell much better. Those two
indicators, taken together with a zero or low actual flow, indicate a clogged sample orifice.

The M200E features a new orifice holder, which makes switching sample and ozone flow
orifices very easy, refer to Section 9.3.10 on how to change the sample orifices and
Appendix B for part numbers of these assemblies. Again, monitoring the pressures and
flows regularly will reveal such problems, because the pressures would slowly or suddenly
change from their nominal, mean values. T-API recommends to review all test data once
per week and to do an exhaustive data analysis for test and concentration values once per
month, paying particular attention to sudden or gradual changes in all parameters that are
supposed to remain constant, such as the flow rates.

11.3. Calibration Problems

11.3.1. Negative Concentrations

Negative concentration values can be caused for several reasons:

198 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

• A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and
the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point. This is caused by the
analyzer’s zero noise and may cause reported concentrations to be negative for a
few seconds at a time down to -20 ppb, but should randomly alternate with similarly
high, positive values. The M200E has a built-in Auto-zero function, which should take
care of most of these deviations from zero, but may yield a small, residual, negative
value. If larger, negative values persist continuously, check if the Auto-zero function
was accidentally turned off using the remote variables in Appendix A-2. In this case,
the sensitivity of the analyzer may be drifting negative.
• A corruption of the Auto-zero filter may also cause negative concentrations. If a
short, high noise value was detected during the AutoZero cycle, that higher reading
will alter the Auto-zero filter value. As the value of the Auto-zero filter is subtracted
from the current PMT response, it will produce a negative concentration reading.
High AutoZero readings can be caused by
• a leaking or stuck AutoZero valve (replace the valve),
• by an electronic fault in the preamplifier causing it to have a voltage on the PMT
output pin during the AutoZero cycle (replace the preamplifier),
• by a reaction cell contamination causing high background (>40 mV) PMT
readings (clean the reaction cell),
• by a broken PMT temperature control circuit, allowing high zero offset (repair the
faulty PMT cooler). After fixing the cause of a high Auto-zero filter reading, the
M200E will take 15 minutes for the filter to clear itself, or
• by an exhausted chemical in the ozone scrubber cartridge (Section 9.3.3).
• Mis-calibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values. If the
zero air contained some NO or NO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-out zero air
scrubber) and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as “zero”, the
analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that contains little or no
NOx. The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using zero gas
that is contaminated with ambient air or span gas (cross-port leaks or leaks in
supply tubing or user not waiting long enough to flush pneumatic systems).
• If the response offset test functions for NO (NO OFFS) or NOX (NOX OFFS) are
greater than 150 mV, a reaction cell contamination is indicated. Clean the reaction
cell according to Section 9.3.9.

11.3.2. No Response
If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas is
supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly.

• Check if the ozone generator is turned on. Usually, the analyzer issues a warning
whenever the ozone generator is turned off. Go to SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR, then
scroll to the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE and see if it shows ON. If it shows OFF, turn
it ON and EXIT the DIAG menu. If this is done and the ozone flow is correct, the
analyzer should be properly supplied with ozone unless the generator itself is
broken. A more detailed description of the ozone generator subsystem checks are in
Section 11.5.167.
• Confirm the lack of response by supplying NO or NO2 span gas of about 80% of the
range value to the analyzer.
• Check the sample flow and ozone flow rates for proper values.

044100102 Rev A 199

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module.

• Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the diagnostics
menu, see Section 6.7.6. If this test produces a concentration reading, the
analyzer’s electronic signal path is correct.
• Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu,
see Section 6.7.5. If this test results in a concentration signal, then the PMT sensor
and the electronic signal path are operating properly. If the M200E passes both
ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable of detecting light and processing the
signal to produce a reading. Therefore, the problem must be in the pneumatics or
the ozone generator.
• If NO2 signal is zero while NO signal is correct, check the NO/NOX valve and the NO2
converter for proper operation.

11.3.3. Unstable Zero and Span

Leaks in the M200E or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most
common source of unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings.

• Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.5.1. Consider
pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the M200E such as a
change in zero air source (ambient air leaking into zero air line or a worn-out zero
air scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient
air leaking into the span gas line.
• Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (this chapter) to make
sure that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample and ozone air.
• Confirm the sample pressure, sample temperature, and sample flow readings are
correct and steady.
• Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced.

11.3.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Key

In general, the M200E will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value
of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu
does not show a SPAN key when carrying out a span calibration, the actual concentration
must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration, which can have
several reasons.

• Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas
concentration in the CONC sub-menu.
• Confirm that the NOx span gas source is accurate. This can be done by comparing
the source with another calibrated analyzer, or by having the NOx source verified by
an independent traceable photometer.
• Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.5.2. Leaks can
dilute the span gas and, hence, the concentration that the analyzer measures may
fall short of the expected concentration defined in the CONC sub-menu.
• If the low-level, hardware calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was
accidentally altered by the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the
analyzer back into its proper range of expected values. One possible indicator of this
scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its allowed range (0.7-1.3 for

200 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

slope, -20 to 150 for offsets). See Section 11.6.5 on how to carry out a low-level
hardware calibration.

11.3.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Key

In general, the M200E will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value
of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu
does not show a ZERO key when carrying out a zero calibration, the actual gas concentra-
tion must be significantly different from the actual zero point (as per last calibration), which
can have several reasons.

• Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. If the IZS option is installed,
compare the zero reading from the IZS zero air source to a zero air source using
NOX-free air. Check any zero air scrubber for performance. It may need to be
replaced (Section 9.3.7).
• Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. Check for
leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.5.

11.3.6. Non-Linear Response

The M200E was factory calibrated to a high level of NO and should be linear to within 1% of
full scale. Common causes for non-linearity are:
• Leaks in the pneumatic system. Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air or
span gas to the current sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentra-
tions as the linearity test is performed. Check for leaks as described in Section 11.5.
• The calibration device is in error. Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly
when using low concentrations. If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less
than 10% of the full scale flow on either flow controller, you may need to purchase
lower concentration standards.
• The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration. Labeled
concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance.
• The sample delivery system may be contaminated. Check for dirt in the sample lines
or reaction cell.
• Calibration gas source may be contaminated (NO2 in NO gas is common).
• Dilution air contains sample or span gas.
• Ozone concentration too low because of wet air in the generator. Generator system
needs to be cleaned and dried with dry supply air. Check the Perma Pure dryer for
leaks. This mostly affects linearity at the low end.
• Ozone stream may be contaminated with impurities. An exhausted ozone filter
chemical will let compounds such as HNO3 and ammonia derivatives break through
to the reaction cell. Check the contents of the ozone filter cartridge and replace as
necessary. This also will affect linearity mostly at the low level.
• Sample inlet may be contaminated with NOX exhaust from this or other analyzers.
Verify proper venting of the pump exhaust.
• Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the sample
inlet port. Also, if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough
sample gas, the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line. Make sure to create
and properly vent excess span gas.

044100102 Rev A 201

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Diffusion of oxygen into Teflon-type tubing over long distances. PTFE or related
materials can act as permeation devices. In fact, the permeable membrane of NO2
permeation tubes is made of PTFE. When using very long supply lines (> 1 m)
between high concentrations span gases and the dilution system, oxygen from
ambient air can diffuse into the line and react with NO to form NO2. This reaction is
dependent on NO concentration and accelerates with increasing NO concentration,
hence, affects linearity only at high NO levels. Using stainless steel for long span gas
supply lines avoids this problem.

11.3.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display

If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value
reported on the front panel, you may need to re-calibrate the analog outputs. This becomes
more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output range. Analog outputs
running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually. See Section 6.7.3 for a
detailed description of this procedure.

11.3.8. Discrepancy between NO and NOX slopes

If the slopes for NO and NOX are significantly different after software calibration (more than
1%), consider the following two problems

• NO2 impurities in the NO calibration gas. NO gases often exhibit NO2 on the order of
1-2% of the NO value. This will cause differences in the calibration slopes. If the NO2
impurity in NO is known, it can easily be accounted for by setting the expected
values for NO and NO2 accordingly to different values, e.g., 448 ppb NO and 450 ppb
NOX. This problem is worse if NO gas is stored in a cylinder with balance air instead
of balance gas nitrogen or large amounts of nitrous oxide (N2O). The oxygen in the
air slowly reacts with NO to yield NO2, increasing over time.
• The expected concentrations for NO and NOX in the calibration menu are set to
different values. If a gas with 100% pure NO is used, this would cause a bias. See
Section 7.2.2 on how to set expected concentration values.
• The converter efficiency parameter has been set to a value not equal to 1.000 even
though the conversion efficiency is 1.0. The actual conversion efficiency needs to
match the parameter set in the CAL menu. See Section 7.1.7 for more information
on this feature.
An instrument calibration with the IZS option (and expected concentrations set to the same
amount) will always yield identical slopes for NO and NOX, as the instrument measures only
NOX and assumes NO to be the same (with NO2 being zero).

11.4. Other Performance Problems

Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is
monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve.
The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems with
recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.

202 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

11.4.1. Excessive noise

Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample supply or
the analyzer itself. Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free and carry out
a detailed leak check as described earlier in this chapter.

Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high voltage
power supply and/or the PMT detector itself. Contact the factory on trouble-shooting these
components.

11.4.2. Slow Response

If the analyzer starts responding too slow to any changes in sample, zero or span gas,
check for the following:

• Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines.

• Sample inlet line is too long.
• Leaking NO/NOX valve. Carry out a leak check.
• Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary,
change orifices (Section 9.3.10).
• Wrong materials in contact with sample - use glass, stainless steel or Teflon
materials only. Porous materials, in particular, will cause memory effects and slow
changes in response.
• Dirty reaction cell. Clean the reaction cell.
• Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer. Wait until
stability is low.
• Insufficient time allowed for NO or NO2 calibration gas source to become stable. Wait
until stability is low.
• NO2 converter temperature is too low. Check for proper temperature.

11.4.3. Auto-zero Warnings

Auto-zero warnings occur if the signal measured during an auto-zero cycle is lower than –
20 mV or higher than 200 mV. The Auto-Zero warning displays the value of the auto-zero
reading when the warning occurs.

• If this value is higher than 150 mV, check that the auto-zero valve is operating
properly. To do so, use the SIGNAL I/O functions in the DIAG menu to toggle the
valve on and off. Listen if the valve is switching, see if the respective LED on the
relay board is indicating functionality. Scroll the TST functions until PMT is displayed
and observe the PMT value change between the two valve states.
• If the valve is operating properly, you should be able to hear it switch (once a
minute under normal operation or when manually activated from the SIGNAL I/O
menu), the PMT value should drop from span gas reading (e.g., 800-900 mV at 400
ppb NO) to less than 150 mV and the LED on the relay board should light up when
the valve is activated. If the PMT value drops significantly but not to less than 150
mV, the valve is probably leaking across its ports. In this case, replace the valve. If
the PMT value does not change at all, the valve is probably not switching at all.

044100102 Rev A 203

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

Check the power supply to the valve (12 V to the valve should turn on and off when
measured with a voltmeter).

Note that it takes only a small leak across the ports of the valve to show excessive
auto-zero values when supplying high concentrations of span gas.
• Another reason for high (although not necessarily out-of-range) values for AutoZero
could be the ozone air filter cartridge, if its contents has been exhausted and needs
to be replaced. This filter cartridge (Figure 3-2) filters chemicals that can cause
chemiluminescence and, if saturated, these chemicals can break through to the
reaction cell, causing an erroneously high AutoZero value (background noise).
• A dirty reaction cell can cause high AutoZero values. Clean the reaction cell
according to Section 9.3.9.
• Finally, a high HVPS voltage value may cause excess background noise and a high
AZero value. The HVPS value changes from analyzer to analyzer and could show
nominal values between 450 and 800 V. Check the low-level hardware calibration of
the preamplifier board and, if necessary, recalibrate exactly as described in Section
11.6.5 in order to minimize the HVPS.

11.5. Subsystem Checkout

The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying
possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this
included a list of possible causes and, in some cases, quick solutions or at least a pointer to
the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes how to determine if a
certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.

11.5.1. Simple Vacuum Leak and Pump Check

Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; This section presents a simple
leak check, whereas Section 11.5.2 details a more thorough procedure. The method
described here is easy, fast and detects, but does not locate, most leaks. It also verifies the
sample pump condition.

• Turn the analyzer ON, and allow at least 30 minutes for flows to stabilize.
• Cap the sample inlet port (cap must be wrench-tight).
• After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, note the SAMP (sample
pressure) and the RCEL (vacuum pressure) readings.
• If both readings are equal to within 10% and less than 10 in-Hg-A, the instrument is
free of large leaks. It is still possible that the instrument has minor leaks.
• If both readings are < 10 in-Hg-A, the pump is in good condition. A new pump will
create a pressure reading of about 4 in-Hg-A (at sea level).

11.5.2. Detailed Pressure Leak Check

If a leak cannot be located by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to T-API
part number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure gauge to
create both over-pressure and vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the
two stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used.

204 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

CAUTION
Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized
system, do not apply or re-apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be
sucked into the instrument, contaminating inside surfaces.
Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system.

• Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover.
• Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as
described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.
• Disconnect the pump tubing on the outside rear panel and cap the pump port. If IZS
or zero/span valves are installed, disconnect the tubing from the zero and span gas
ports and plug them (Figure 3-3). Cap the DFU particle filter on the Perma Pure
dryer (Figure 9-2).
• Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time to
fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each tube
connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap bubble solution, looking for fine
bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not re-apply
vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not
exceed 15 psi pressure.
• If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on
each valve should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the
normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution.
• If the analyzer is equipped with an IZS Option Connect the leak checker to the Dry
Air inlet and check with soap bubble solution.
• Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated
pressure should be less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is
turned off.
• Clean surfaces from soap solution, re-connect the sample and pump lines and
replace the instrument cover. Restart the analyzer.

11.5.3. Performing a Sample Flow Check

CAUTION
Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between 0 and
1000 cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. Do not use the
built in flow measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument. This
value is only calculated, not measured.

Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, as the front
panel display shows only a calculated value. A decreasing, actual sample flow may point to
slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most likely critical flow orifices or sintered filters. To
perform a sample flow check:

• Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port shown in Figure
3-3.

044100102 Rev A 205

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel.
Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure.
• The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be 500 cm³/min ±
10%. If a combined sample/ozone air Perma Pure dryer is installed (optional equip-
ment), the flow will be 640 cm³/min ± 10% (500 cm³/min for the sample and 80
cm³/min for the ozone generator supply air and 60 cm³/min for the purge flow).
• Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway.

11.5.4. AC Power Configuration

The M200E can be easily configured for two main power regimes, 100-120 V and 220-240 V
at either 50 or 60 Hz. The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC power voltage in use if
the voltage selector plug is configured properly. See Figure 3-1 and Figure 11-4 for the
location of this plug. The plug for 100-120 V should have white jumper wires, the plug for
220-240 V should have blue jumper wires. Note, that an analyzer configured for 230 V will
still turn on at 115 V (and vice versa), but the heaters may burn out or not heat up fast
enough. Internally, several LEDs should turn on as soon as the power is supplied. If an
incorrect power configuration is suspected, check for the correct voltage and frequency at
the line input on the rear panel.

Note that the analyzer will be severely damaged if 220-240 V is supplied to it when
configured for 100-120 V. Never bypass the power switch or circuit breaker.

11.5.5. DC Power Supply

If you have determined that the analyzer’s AC main power is working, but the unit is still
not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s switching
power supplies, which convert AC power to 5 and ±15 V (PS1) as well as +12 V DC power
(PS2). The supplies can either have no DC output at all or a noisy output (fluctuating).

To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various printed
circuit assemblies and DC powered components and the associated test points on the relay
board follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in Table 11-3.

Table 11-3: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code

Name Test Point# Color Definition

DGND 1 Black Digital ground
+5V 2 Red
AGND 3 Green Analog ground
+15V 4 Blue
-15V 5 Yellow
+12R 6 Purple 12 V return (ground) line
+12V 7 Orange

A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct as listed in
Table 11-5. An oscilloscope, in AC mode and with band limiting turned on, can be used to
evaluate if the supplies are excessively noisy (>100 mV peak-to-peak).

206 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

Table 11-4: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels

CHECK relay board Test Points

Power
Voltage From Test Point To Test Point Min V Max V
Supply
Name # Name #
PS1 +5 DGND 1 +5 2 +4.80 +5.25
PS1 +15 AGND 3 +15 4 +13.5 +16.0
PS1 -15 AGND 3 -15V 5 -14.0 -16.0
PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05
PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N/A -0.05 +0.05
PS2 +12 +12V Ret 6 +12V 7 +11.8 +12.5
PS2 DGND +12V Ret 6 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05

11.5.6. I2C Bus

Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of the LED labeled D1 on
the relay board in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display. Assuming
that the DC power supplies are operating properly and the wiring from the motherboard to
the keyboard as well as from the keyboard to the relay board is intact, the I2C bus is
operating properly if:

• D1 on the relay board is flashing or

• D1 is not flashing but pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the
display.
If the display is locked up or if the analyzer is not booting up at all, the I2C bus may be the
cause. Contact customer service if you suspect a problem with the I2C bus.

11.5.7. Keyboard / Display Interface

The front panel keyboard, the display and the keyboard/display circuit board can be verified
by observing the operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when
a key is pressed on the front panel. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that
the DC power supplies are operating properly:

• The vacuum fluorescence display is working properly if, on power-up, a “-“ character
is visible on the upper left hand corner of the display.
• If there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up but the D1 LED on the relay
board is flashing, the keyboard/display circuit may be bad.
• If the analyzer starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front
panel does not change the display, then there are three possible problems:
• One or more of the keys is bad,
• The interrupt signal between the keyboard and the motherboard is broken or
• The keyboard circuit is bad.
You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal
program. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accord-
ingly, the display wiring or the I2C bus may be faulty.

044100102 Rev A 207

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

11.5.8. Relay Board

The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its status
LEDs as described in Section 11.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on and off
through the SIGNAL I/O function in the DIAG menu, see Section 11.1.3.

If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not flashing,
then either the wiring between the keyboard and the relay board is bad, or the relay board
itself is bad.

If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question
(heater, valve, etc.) does not toggle properly using the Signal I/O function, then the
associated device (valve or heater) or its control device (valve driver, heater relay) is
malfunctioning. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily be replaced.
The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function:

Table 11-5: Relay Board Control Devices

Function Control Device Socketed

All valves U5 Yes
All heaters K1-K5 Yes

11.5.9. Motherboard

11.5.9.1. A/D functions

A basic check of the analog to digital (A/D) converter operation on the motherboard is to
use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu. Check the following two A/D reference
voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter.

• Using the Signal I/O function (Section 11.1.3 and Appendix D), view the value of
REF_4096_MV and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of their nominal values
(4096 and 0) and are stable to within ±0.5 mV, the basic A/D converter is function-
ing properly. If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more than 3 mV, one or
more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty.
• Choose one parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE (see
previous section on how to measure it). Compare its actual voltage with the voltage
displayed through the SIGNAL I/O function. If the wiring is intact but there is a
difference of more than ±10 mV between the measured and displayed voltage, the
motherboard may be faulty.

11.5.9.2. Analog Output Voltages

To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in
question and perform an analog output step test as described in Section 6.7.2.

For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into
the channel (Section 6.7.3), the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in
the table below except for the 0% step, which should be within 2-3 mV. If one or more of
the steps is outside of this range, a failure of one or both D/A converters and their
associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely.

208 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

Table 11-6: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values

Full scale Output Voltage

100mV 1V 5V 10V
Step % Nominal Output Voltage
1 0 0 mV 0 0 0
2 20 20 mV 0.2 1 2
3 40 40 mV 0.4 2 4
4 60 60 mV 0.6 3 6
5 80 80 mV 0.8 4 8
6 100 100 mV 1.0 5 10

11.5.9.3. Status Outputs

The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs.

• Connect a cable between the “-“ pin and the “!” pin on the status output connector.
Table 11-7: Status Outputs Check

PIN # Status
1 SYSTEM OK
2 CONC VALID
3 HIGH RANGE
4 ZERO CAL
5 SPAN CAL
6 DIAG MODE
7 SPARE
8 SPARE

• Connect a 1000 Ω resistor between the +5 V and the pin for the status output that is
being tested.
• Connect a voltmeter between the “-“ pin and the pin of the output being tested
(Table 11-7).
• Under the DIAG / SIGNAL I/O menu (Section 11.1.3), scroll through the inputs
and outputs until you get to the output in question. Alternately turn on and off the
output noting the voltage on the voltmeter, it should vary between 0 volts for ON
and 5 volts for OFF.

11.5.9.4. Control Inputs

The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:

• Connect a jumper from the +5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the +5 V on the
CONTROL IN connector.

044100102 Rev A 209

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on
the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to
ZERO CAL R mode.
• Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on
the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to
SPAN CAL R mode.
In each case, the M200E should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed.

11.5.10. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure associated
with the Disk-On-Chip (DOC). If either of these failures occur, contact the factory.

For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on:

• The vacuum fluorescence display does not show a dash in the upper left hand corner
• There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port (COM1) on the rear panel even if
“? <RETURN>” is pressed.
In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard,
specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is
true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measure-
ments will be incorrect.

• If the analyzer stops during initialization (the vacuum fluorescence display shows
some text), it is likely that the DOC, the firmware or the configuration and data files
have been corrupted or that the wrong firmware was uploaded or does not have the
correct filename.

11.5.11. RS-232 Communication

11.5.11.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting

T-API analyzers use the RS-232 protocol as the standard, serial communications protocol.
RS-232 is a versatile standard, which has been used for many years but, at times, is
difficult to configure. T-API conforms to the standard pin assignments in the implementation
of RS-232. Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around 4 general areas:

• Incorrect cabling and connectors. This is the most common problem. See Table 6-16
for connector and pin-out information and Section 6.9.3 for cable connections.
• The communications (baud) rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured.
See Section 6.9.7 on how to set the baud rate.
• The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly (Section 6.9.6).
• If a modem is used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See
Section 6.11.3.
• Incorrect setting of the DTE - DCE switch. Typically, the red LED is on as soon as
you power up the analyzer. If not, contact the factory, as this indicates a problem
with the motherboard. As the analyzer is connected to the computer with a cable,

210 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

the green LED should also illuminate. If not, set the DCE/DTE switch to the other
position. See also Section 6.9.5.
• Note that some laptops do not enable their RS-232 port when in power-saving
mode. In this case, connect the laptop and start either APICOM or a Hyperterminal
window and start communicating with the analyzer. This will enable the serial port
on the laptop and the green LED should illuminate. You may have to switch back and
forth while communicating to get the right setting.

11.5.11.2. Modem or Terminal Operation

These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a
T-API analyzer.

• Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.

• Check the correct position of the DTE/DCE as described in Section 6.9.5.
• Check the correct setup command (Section 6.11.3).
• Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The M200E sets pin 7
(RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.
• Make sure the baud rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and
analyzer match, see Section 6.9.7.
• Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or
computer; See Section 6.9.8.
• Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding
down the space bar is one way). The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as
the instrument is receiving data.
• Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly.
Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Manual”,
T-API part number 013500000, available online at http://www.Teledyne-api.com/manuals/.

11.5.12. PMT Sensor

The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the reaction of NO with ozone. It has
a gain of about 500000 to 1000000. It is not possible to test the detector outside of the
instrument in the field. The best way to determine if the PMT is working properly is by using
the optical test (OTEST), which is described in Section 6.7.5. The basic method to diagnose
a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST, OTEST and specific tests for
other sub-assemblies.

11.5.13. PMT Preamplifier Board

To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, we suggest to carry out the optical
and electrical tests described in Sections 6.7.5 and 6.7.6. If the ETEST fails, the
preamplifier board may be faulty. Refer to Section 11.6.5 on hardware calibration through
the preamplifier board.

044100102 Rev A 211

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

11.5.14. High Voltage Power Supply

The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT tube
(Section 10.3.2). It requires 2 voltage inputs. The first is +15 V, which powers the supply.
The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the preamplifier board.
Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration procedure in Section 11.6.5.
This power supply has 10 independent power supply steps, one to each pin of the PMT. The
following test procedure below allows you to test each step.

• Turn off the instrument.

• Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the NOX sensor
module.
• Remove the end cap from the sensor (4 screws).
• Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor (2 plastic
screws).
• Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the sensor end cap, and power-up the instrument.
Scroll the front panel display to the HVPS test parameter. Divide the displayed
HVPS voltage by 10 and test the pairs of connector points as shown in the figure.
• Check the overall voltage (should be equal to the HVPS value displayed on the front
panel, for example 700 V) and the voltages between each pair of pins of the supply
(should be 1/10th of the overall voltage, in this example 70 V):

• Turn off the instrument power, and re-connect the PMT tube, then re-assemble the
sensor.
If any faults are found in the test, you must obtain a new HVPS as there are no user
serviceable parts inside the supply.

11.5.15. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly

The pressure/flow sensor circuit board, located behind the sensor assembly, can be checked
with a voltmeter using the following procedure, which assumes that the wiring is intact and
that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly. Refer to Figure 11-5
for trouble-shooting.

212 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2, it should be 10.0 ± 0.25 V. If not, the board is
faulty. Measure the voltage across the leads of capacitor C2. It should be 5.0 ± 0.25 V, if
not, the board may be faulty.

11.5.15.1. Reaction Cell Pressure

Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP5. With the sample pump disconnected or
turned off, the voltage should be 4500 ± 250 mV. With the pump running, it should be 800-
1700 mV depending on the performance of the vacuum pump. The lower the reaction cell
pressure, the lower the resulting voltage is. If this voltage is significantly different, the
pressure transducer S1 or the board may be faulty. If this voltage is between 2 and 5 V, the
pump may not be performing well, check that the reaction cell pressure is less than
10 in-Hg-A (at sea level). Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is
closer to the sensor’s contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure.

11.5.15.2. Sample Pressure

Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4. With the sample pump disconnected or
turned off, this voltage should be 4500 ± 250 mV. With the pump running, it should be
about 0.2 V less as the sample pressure drops by about 1 in-Hg-A below ambient pressure.
If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer S2 or the board may be
faulty. A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause this voltage to be between
about 0.6 and 4.5. Make sure that the front panel reading of the sample pressure is at
about 1 in-Hg-A less than ambient pressure. Ensure that the tubing is connected to the
upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s contacts; the lower port does not measure
pressure.

044100102 Rev A 213

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure 11-5: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly

11.5.15.3. Ozone Flow

Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP3. With proper ozone flow (80 cm³/min at the ozone
dryer inlet), this should be approximately 2.0 ± 0.2 V (this voltage will vary with altitude).
With flow stopped (pump turned off), the voltage should be approximately 0 V. If the
voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor or the board may be faulty. A cross-leak to vacuum
inside the Perma Pure dryer may also cause this flow to increase significantly, and the
voltage will increase accordingly. Also, make sure that the gas flows from P1 to P2 as
labeled on the flow sensor (“high” pressure P1 to “low” pressure P2 or “Port” 1 to “Port” 2).

11.5.16. NO2 Converter

The NO2 converter assembly can fail in two ways, an electrical failure of the band heater
and/or the thermocouple control circuit and a performance failure of the converter itself.

1) NO2 converter heater failures can be divided into two possible problems:

• Temperature is reported properly but heater does not heat to full temperature. In
this case, the heater is either disconnected or broken or the power relay is broken.

214 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

• Disconnect the heater cable coming from the relay board and measure the
resistance between any two of the three heater leads with a multi-meter. The
resistance between A and B should be about 1000 Ω and that between A and C
should be the same as between B and C, about 500 Ω each. If any of these
resistances is near zero or without continuity, the heater is broken.
• Temperature reports zero or overload (near 500° C). This indicates a disconnected
or failing thermocouple or a failure of the thermocouple circuit.
• First, check that the thermocouple is connected properly and the wire does not
show signs of a broken or kinked pathway. If it appears to be properly
connected, disconnect the yellow thermocouple plug (marked K) from the relay
board and measure the voltage (not resistance) between the two leads with a
multi-meter capable of measuring in the low mV range. The voltage should be
about 12 mV (ignore the sign) at 315° C and about 0 mV at room temperature.
• Measure the continuity with an Ohm-meter. It should read close to zero Ω. If the
thermocouple does not have continuity, it is broken. If it reads zero voltage at
elevated temperatures, it is broken. To test the thermocouple at room tempera-
ture, heat up the converter can (e.g., with a heat gun) and see if the voltage
across the thermocouple leads changes. If the thermocouple is working properly,
the electronic circuit is broken. In both cases, consult the factory.
2) If the converter appears to have performance problems (conversion efficiency is outside
of allowed range of 96-102%), check the following:

• Conversion efficiency setting in the CAL menu. If this value is different from 1.000,
this correction needs to be considered. Section 7.1.7 describes this parameter in
detail.
• Accuracy of NO2 source (GPT or gas tank standard). NO2 gas standards are typically
certified to only ±2% and often change in concentrations over time. You should get
the standard re-certified every year. If you use GPT, check the accuracy of the ozone
source.
• Age of the converter. The NO2 converter has a limited operating life and may need to
be replaced every ~3 years or when necessary (e.g., earlier if used with continu-
ously high NO2 concentrations). We estimate a lifetime of about 10000 ppm-hours (a
cumulative product of the NO2 concentration times the exposure time to that
concentration). However, this lifetime heavily depends on many factors such as
absolute concentration (temporary or permanent poisoning of the converter is
possible), sample flow rate and pressure inside the converter, converter tempera-
ture, duty cycle etc. This lifetime is only an estimated reference and not a
guaranteed lifetime.
• In some cases with excessive sample moisture, the oxidized molybdenum metal
chips inside the converter cartridge may bake together over time and restrict air flow
through the converter, in which case it needs to be replaced. To avoid this problem,
we recommend the use of a sample gas conditioner (Section 5.8). Section 9.3.8
describes how to replace the NO2 converter cartridge.
• With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NO reading is
negative, while the NO2 reading remains around zero. The converter destroys NO
and needs to be replaced.
• With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NOX reading is
significantly higher than the actual (gas standard) NO concentration. The converter
produces NO2 and needs to be replaced.

044100102 Rev A 215

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

11.5.17. O3 Generator
The ozone generator can fail in two ways, electronically (printed circuit board) and
functionally (internal generator components). Assuming that air is supplied properly to the
generator, the generator should automatically turn on 30 minutes after the instrument is
powered up or if the instrument is still warm. See Section 0 for ozone generator functional-
ity. Accurate performance of the generator can only be determined with an ozone analyzer
connected to the outlet of the generator. However, if the generator appears to be working
properly but the sensitivity or calibration of the instrument is reduced, suspect a leak in the
ozone generator supply air.

A leak in the dryer or between the dryer and the generator can cause moist, ambient air to
leak into the air stream, which significantly reduces the ozone output. The generator will
produce only about half of the nominal O3 concentration when run with moist, ambient air
instead of dried air. In addition, moist supply air will produce large amounts of nitric acid in
the generator, which can cause analyzer components downstream of the generator to
deteriorate and/or causes significant deposit of nitrate deposits on the reaction cell window,
reducing sensitivity and causing performance drift. Carry out a leak check as described
earlier in this chapter.

11.5.18. IZS Option

The zero/span valves and IZS options need to be enabled in the software (contact the
factory on how to do this). See Figure 3-12 for a flow diagram with zero/span valve or IZS
option and Figure 3-2 to locate these options in the rear left corner of the instrument.

• Check for the physical presence of the valves or the IZS option.
• Check front panel for correct software configuration. When the instrument is in
SAMPLE mode, the front panel display should show CALS and CALZ buttons in the
second line of the display. The presence of the buttons indicates that the option has
been enabled in software. In addition, the IZS option is enabled if the TEST functions
show a parameter named IZS TEMP.
The semi-permeable PTFE membrane of the permeation tube is severely affected by
humidity. Variations in humidity between day and night are usually enough to yield very
variable output results. If the instrument is installed in an air-conditioned shelter, the air is
usually dry enough to produce good results. If the instrument is installed in an environment
with variable or high humidity, variations in the permeation tube output will be significant.
In this case, a dryer for the supply air is recommended (dew point should be –20° C or
less).

The IZS option is heated with a proportional heater circuit and the temperature is
maintained at 50° C ±1° . Check the front panel display or the IZS_TEMP signal voltage
using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (Section 11.1.3). At 50° C, the
temperature signal from the IZS thermistor should be around 2500 mV.

11.5.19. Box Temperature

The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard below the bottom
edge of the CPU board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be disconnected to check
its resistance. Box temperature will vary with, but will usually read about 5° C higher than,

216 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

ambient (room) temperature because of the internal heating zones from the NO2 converter,
reaction cell and other devices.

• To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend to check the

BOX_TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu
(Section 11.1.3). At about 30° C, the signal should be around 1500 mV.
• We recommend to use a certified or calibrated external thermometer / temperature
sensor to verify the accuracy of the box temperature by placing it inside the chassis,
next to the thermistor labeled XT1 (above connector J108) on the motherboard.

11.5.20. PMT Temperature

PMT temperature should be low and constant. It is more important that this temperature is
maintained constant than it is to maintain it low. The PMT cooler uses a Peltier, thermo-
electric cooler element supplied with 12 V DC power from the switching power supply PS2.
The temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature controller located on the
preamplifier board. Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0.1 to 12 VDC. The
temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary by ±1°C due to
component tolerances. The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0.1° C around
that set point. On power-up of the analyzer, the front panel enables the user to watch that
temperature drop from about ambient temperature down to its set point of 6-8° C. If the
temperature fails to adjust after 30 minutes, there is a problem in the cooler circuit. If the
control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a temperature of –1° C is reported.

11.6. Repair Procedures

This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major
component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement. Note that maintenance
procedures (e.g., replacement of regularly changed expendables) are discussed in
Chapter 9 (Maintenance) are not listed here. Also note that Teledyne-API customer service
may have a more detailed service note for some of the below procedures. Contact customer
service.

11.6.1. Disk-on-Chip Replacement

Replacing the Disk-on-Chip (DOC) will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters
to be lost unless the replacement chip carries the exact same firmware version. iDAS data
will always be lost and, if possible, should be downloaded prior to changing the DOC. If the
analyzer is equipped with at least one EEPROM flash chip (standard configuration), the
configuration settings are stored on the EEPROM. It is recommended to document all
analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as calibration, range, auto-cal,
analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the CPU chip. Refer to Figure
10-12 for locating the DOC and other CPU components.

• Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components.

• Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the
mounting screws. You may have to lift up the analyzer cover to prevent some
connectors on the CPU board to brush against the cover.
• When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the
Disk-on-Chip on the CPU board. The chip should carry a label with analyzer model
number (M200E), firmware revision (example: M200E_C7.EXE), date and initials of

044100102 Rev A 217

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

the programmer. Remove the IC with a dedicated IC removal tool or by gently

prying it up from the socket. Do not bend the connector pins.
• Reinstall the new Disk-on-Chip, making sure the notch at the end of the chip
matches the notch in the socket. It may be necessary to straighten the pins
somewhat to fit them into the socket. Gently but firmly press the chip all the way in.
Do not bend the pins.
• Close the rear panel, replace the cover and turn on power to the machine.
Generally, all of the setup information will need to be re-entered, including analog input and
output calibration unless the firmware revision has not changed and the analyzer is
equipped and properly configured with an EEPROM chip. Note especially that the A/D
converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in step 1 above must be re-
entered before the instrument will function correctly. The analyzer typically issues an
ANALOG CALIBRATION WARNING if the analog circuitry was not calibrated within 10
minutes after restart.

11.6.2. Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade

The M200E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The standard
configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the analyzer
configuration as created during final checkout at the factory. Replacing this chip will erase
that configuration, which will be recreated with a new copy when restarting the analyzer.
However, if the firmware and/or the DOC is changed at the same time, all analyzer
configuration settings and iDAS data will be lost. Adding a second EEPROM chip to the
existing chip will double memory but this procedure will require a BIOS configuration and is
not a standard sales option. Also make sure that you receive a fully formatted EEPROM chip
for replacement. Contact the factory for details.

• Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components.

• Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the
mounting screws. If necessary, lift the cover to prevent the rear panel connectors
from brushing against it.
• When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the
EEPROM chip in the left-most socket of the CPU board. The chip is almost square
with one corner cut off, the socket is shaped accordingly and the chip is recessed
into the socket. Remove the old chip by using a special tool or gently pry the chip
out using a very fine screwdriver. Make sure not to bend or destroy any of the
contacts of the socket. When upgrading the CPU with a second chip, no removal is
necessary as the second socket should be empty.
• Reinstall the new or additional EEPROM chip, making sure the cut-off edge matches
that of the socket. Press the chip symmetrically and straight all the way in.
• Close the rear panel and cover and turn on power to the machine.
• If a front panel message Flash Format INVALID appears on start-up, the EEPROM
was not properly formatted. Contact the factory for a proper replacement.

11.6.3. O3 Generator Replacement

The ozone generator is a black, brick-shaped device with printed circuit board attached to
its rear and two tubes extending out the right side in the front of the analyzer. To replace
the ozone generator:

218 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

• Turn off the analyzer power, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.
• Disconnect the 1/8” black tube from the white ozone scrubber cartridge and the ¼”
clear tube from the plastic extension tube at the brass fitting nearest to the ozone
generator. Unplug the electrical connection on the rear side of the brick.
• Unscrew the two mounting screws that attach the ozone generator to the chassis
and take out the entire assembly.
• If you received a complete replacement generator with circuit board and mounting
bracket attached, simply reverse the above steps to replace the current generator.
Make sure to carry out a leak check and a recalibration after the analyzer warmed up
for about 30 minutes.

11.6.4. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement

The M200E standard configuration is equipped with a dryer for the ozone supply air. An
optional dryer is available for the sample stream and a combined dryer for both gas
streams can also be purchased. To change one or all of these options:

• Turn off power to the analyzer and pump, remove the power cord and the analyzer
cover. Locate the dryers in the center of the instrument, between sensor and NO2
converter. They are mounted to a bracket, which can be taken out when unscrewing
the two mounting screws (if necessary).
• Disconnect all tubing that extends out of the dryer assembly, those are usually the
purge tube connecting to the vacuum manifold, the tube from the exit to the ozone
flow meter (ozone dryer) or to the NO/NOx valve (sample dryer) or two tubes to the
ozone flow meter and the NO/NOX valve (combo-dryer). Take extra care not to twist
any of the white plastic fittings on the dryer, which connect the inner drying tube to
the outer purge tube. See Section 9.3.2 and Figure 9-2.
• Note the orientation of the dryer on the bracket. Cut the tie wraps that hold the
dryer to the mounting bracket and take out the old dryer. If necessary, unscrew the
two mounting screws on the bracket and take out the entire assembly.
• Attach the replacement dryer to the mounting bracket in the same orientation as the
old dryer. Fix the dryer to the bracket using new tie wraps. Cut off excess length of
the wraps.
• Put the assembly back into the chassis and tighten the mounting screws.
• Re-attach the tubes to vacuum manifold, flow meter and/or NO/NOx valve using at
least two wrenches and take extra care not to twist the dryer’s white plastic fittings,
as this will result in large leaks that are difficult to trouble-shoot and fix.
• Carry out a detailed leak check (Section 11.5.2), close the analyzer, power up pump
and analyzer and re-calibrate the instrument after it stabilizes

11.6.5. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration

The sensor module hardware calibration is used in the factory to adjust the slope and offset
of the PMT output and to optimize the signal output and HVPS. If the instrument’s slope and
offset values are outside of the acceptable range and all other more obvious causes for this
problem have been eliminated, the hardware calibration can be used to adjust the sensor as
has been done in the factory. This procedure is also recommended after replacing the PMT
or the preamplifier board.

044100102 Rev A 219

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• With the instrument running, set the instrument reporting range to SNGL (Section
6.5.3).
• Perform a full zero calibration using zero air (Section 7.2, 7.4, or7.5).
• Locate the preamplifier board (Figure 3-2).
• Locate the following components on the preamplifier board (Figure 11-6):
• HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
• HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
• Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 turns).
• Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise to its maximum setting.
• While feeding 400 ppb NO (or 80% range value) to the analyzer and waiting until
the STABIL value is below 0.5 ppb, look at the front panel and scroll to the
NORM PMT value. This value should always be two times the span gas
concentration in ppb. With 400 ppb NO, the NORM PMT should show 800 mV on a
properly calibrated analyzer.
• Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0). Set the HVPS fine
adjustment switch to its maximum setting (F).
• Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you just
above 800 mV NORM PMT signal (2x span gas ppb value). The coarse adjustment
typically increments the NORM PMT signal in 100-300 mV steps.

Figure 11-6: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout

• Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is 800-830 mV.
The fine adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT value by about 30 mV. It

220 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments if the
proper value is at the threshold of the min/max coarse setting.

NOTE
Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment switches to their
maximum setting. Start at the lowest setting and increment slowly. Wait 10
seconds between adjustments.

• If the NORM PMT value set above is now between 790-810, skip this step.
Otherwise, adjust the NORM PMT value with the gain potentiometer down to
800±10 mV (in general: 2x the span gas concentration value in ppb). This is the
final very-fine adjustment.
• Note that during adjustments, the NORM PMT value may be fluctuating, as the
analyzer continues to switch between NO and NOX streams as well as between
measure and AutoZero modes. You may have to mentally average the values of NO
and NOX response for this adjustment.
• Perform a software span calibration (Section 7.2, 7.4, or7.5) to normalize the sensor
response to its new PMT sensitivity.
• Review the slope and offset values, the slopes should be 1.000±0.300 and the offset
values should be 0.0±20 mV (-20 to +150 mV is allowed).

11.6.6. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC

The photo multiplier tube (PMT) should last for the lifetime of the analyzer. However, in
some cases, the high voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler (TEC) may
fail. In case of PMT, HVPS or TEC failure, the sensor assembly needs to be opened in order
to change one of these components. Refer to Figure 11-7 for the structure of the 200E
sensor assembly and follow the steps below for replacement of one of its components. We
recommend to ensure that the PMT, HVPS or TEC modules are, indeed, faulty to prevent
unnecessary opening of the sensor.

• Power down the analyzer, disconnect the power cord, remove the cover and discon-
nect all pneumatic and electrical connections from the sensor assembly.
• Whereas it is possible for a skilled technician to change the PMT or HVPS through the
front panel with the sensor assembly mounted to the analyzer, we recommend to
remove the entire assembly and carry this procedure out on a clean, anti-static table
with the user wearing an anti-static wrist strap to prevent static discharge damage
to the assembly or its circuits.
• If the TEC is to be replaced, remove the reaction cell assembly at this point by
unscrewing two holding screws. This is necessary only if the PMT cold block is to be
removed. This step is not necessary if the HVPS or the PMT only are exchanged.
• Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front
panel. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers). Remove the
dryer packages inside the PMT housing. Along with the plate, slide out the OPTIC
TEST LED and the thermistor that measures the PMT temperature. Both may be
coated with a white, thermal conducting paste. Do not contaminate the inside of the
housing with this grease, as it may contaminate the PMT glass tube on re-assembly.

044100102 Rev A 221

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

• Unscrew the PMT assembly, which is held to the cold block by two plastic screws.
Discard the plastic screws and replace with new screws at the end of this procedure
(the threads get stripped easily and it is recommended to use new screws).

Figure 11-7: M200E Sensor Assembly

• Carefully take out the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the gasket and the PMT.
• Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, anti-
static wipe and do not touch it after cleaning.
• If the cold block or TEC is to be changed, disconnect the TEC driver board from the
preamplifier board, remove the cooler fan duct (4 screws on its side) including the
driver board, disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly
aside.
• Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT cold
block assembly, which contains the TEC.
• Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new
unit.
• Re-assemble this TEC subassembly in reverse order. Make sure to use thermal
grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between TEC and cold block and that
the side opening in the cold block will face the reaction cell when assembled. Evenly
tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity.

222 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual Troubleshooting & Repair

CAUTION
The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink. If there is
any significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Make sure to apply heat sink paste
before mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and cross-wise.

• Re-insert the TEC subassembly in reverse order. Make sure that the O-ring is placed
properly and the assembly is tightened evenly.
• Re-insert the PMT/HVPS subassembly in reverse order and don’t forget the gasket
between HVPS and PMT. Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the
PMT cold block.
• Insert the LED and thermistor into the cold block, insert new drying packages and
carefully replace the end plate by making sure that the O-ring is properly in place.
Improperly placed O-rings will cause leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to
condense on the inside of the cooler and likely cause a short in the HVPS.
• Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell (evenly tighten these screws), replace the
sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and washers.
• Reconnect all electrical and pneumatic connections, leak check the system and
power up the analyzer.
• Verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST and OTEST features or
zero and span gases, then carry out a hardware calibration of the analyzer
(Section 11.6.5) followed by a software calibration.

11.7. Technical Assistance

If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems,
technical assistance may be obtained from Teledyne-API, Customer Service, 6565 Nancy
Ridge Drive, San Diego, CA 92121. Phone: +1 858 657 9800 or 1-800 324 5190. Fax: +1
858 657 9816. Email: [email protected]. Before you contact customer
service, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C, which is also available online for
electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.

044100102 Rev A 223

Troubleshooting & Repair Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

224 044100102 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A: Software Documentation

APPENDIX A: SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION............................................................225
APPENDIX A-1: M200E Software Menu Trees and Index, Revision C.8 ............................... 226
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision C.8 ............................................ 232
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements, Revision C.8 ...................................... 241
APPENDIX A-4: M200E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision C.8 ............................................. 243
APPENDIX A-5: M200E Trigger Events and iDAS Functions, Revision C.8 ........................... 246
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision C.8 ......................................... 248
APPENDIX B: SPARE PARTS AND EXPENDABLES .....................................................251
APPENDIX C: REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - M200E.....................................................257
APPENDIX D: DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS............................................................259

044100110 Rev A 225

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

APPENDIX A-1: M200E Software Menu Trees and Index, Revision C.8

Figure A-1: Basic Sample Display Menu

226 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Figure A-2: Sample Display Menu - Units with Z/S Valve or IZS Option installed

044100110 Rev A 227

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure A-3: Primary Setup Menu (Except iDAS)

228 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Figure A-4: Secondary Setup Menu (COMM & VARS)

044100110 Rev A 229

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Figure A-5: Secondary Setup Menu (DIAG)

230 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Figure A-6: Internal Data Acquisition (iDAS) Menu

044100110 Rev A 231

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision C.8

Table A-1: M200E Setup Variables, Revision C.8

Please note that variables listed below under “Setup Variables Available Through serial I/O”
should not be changed unless specifically instructed by Teledyne-API customer service or
engineering! Changing those variables may cause significant problems with analyzer
performance. Only those variables listed under “Setup Variables Available through Front
Panel Display And serial I/O” are those see on the front panel display and should be
changed by the user if necessary.

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
Setup Variables Available through Front Panel Display And serial I/O
DAS_HOLD_OFF Minutes 15 0.5-20 Duration of DAS hold off period.
MEASURE_MODE — NO-NOX, NO Gas measure mode: single gas or
NOX 8 NOX switching. Enclose value in double
NOX-NO quotes (") when setting from the
RS-232 interface.
TPC_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON ON enables temperature/ pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.
DYN_ZERO — OFF ON, OFF ON enables remote dynamic zero
calibration; OFF disables it.
DYN_SPAN — OFF ON, OFF ON enables remote dynamic span
calibration; OFF disables it.
1
IZS_SET ºC 50 Warnings: 30-70 IZS temperature set point and
45-55 warning limits.
CONC_PRECISION — AUTO AUTO Number of digits to display to the
0 right of the decimal point for
1 concentrations on the display.
2 Enclose value in double quotes (")
3 when setting from the RS-232
4 interface.
CLOCK_ADJ Sec./Day 0 -60-60 Time-of-day clock speed
adjustment.
CAL_ON_NO2 — OFF ON, OFF ON enables span calibration on
pure NO2; OFF disables it.
Setup Variables Available Through serial I/O
LANGUAGE_SELECT — ENGL ENGL, Selects the language to use for the
SECD user interface. Enclose value in
EXTN double quotes (") when setting
from the RS-232 interface.
MAINT_TIMEOUT Hours 2 0.1-100 Time until automatically switching
out of software-controlled
maintenance mode.
BXTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0.3 0-10 Box temperature compensation
attenuation factor.
RCTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0-10 Reaction cell temperature
compensation attenuation factor.
RCPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 0 0-10 Reaction cell pressure
compensation attenuation factor.

232 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
SPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 0 0-10 Sample pressure compensation
attenuation factor.
CE_FACTOR1 — 1 0.8-1.2 Moly converter efficiency factor for
range 1.
CE_FACTOR2 — 1 0.8-1.2 Moly converter efficiency factor for
range 2.
CONV_TIME — 1 SEC 33 MS Conversion time for PMT detector
66 MS channel. Enclose value in double
133 MS quotes (") when setting from the
266 MS RS-232 interface.
533 MS
1 SEC
2 SEC
SG_CONV_TIME — 33 MS Same as Conversion time for PMT detector
above. channel in single-gas measure
modes. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the
RS-232 interface.
FILT_SIZE Samples 42 1-500 Moving average filter size.
SG_FILT_SIZE Samples 60 1–500 Moving average filter size in
single-gas measure modes.
FILT_ADAPT — ON ON, OFF ON enables adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
FILT_OMIT_DELTA PPM 0.05 0.005- Absolute change in concentration
0.1 to omit readings.
FILT_OMIT_PCT % 10 5-50 Percent change in concentration to
omit readings.
FILT_SHORT_DELT PPM 0.04 0.005- Absolute change in concentration
0.1 to shorten filter.
FILT_SHORT_PCT % 8 5-50 Percent change in concentration to
shorten filter.
FILT_ASIZE Samples 6 1-30 Moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.
SG_FILT_ASIZE Samples 10 1–500 Moving average filter size in
adaptive mode, in single-gas
measure modes.
FILT_DELAY Seconds 120 0-200 Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode.
SG_FILT_DELAY Seconds 60 0–200 Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode in single-gas measure
modes.
NOX_DWELL Seconds 2.5 0.1-30 Dwell time after switching valve to
NOX position.
SG_NOX_DWELL Seconds 1 0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve to
NOX position in single-gas measure
modes.
NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1-30 Number of samples to take in NOX
mode.

044100110 Rev A 233

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
NO_DWELL Seconds 1.5 0.1-30 Dwell time after switching valve to
NO position.
SG_NO_DWELL Seconds 1 0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve to
NO position in single-gas measure
modes.
NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1-30 Number of samples to take in NO
mode.
SG_NO_SAMPLE Samples 1 1–30 Number of samples to take in NO
mode in single-gas measure
modes.
USER_UNITS — PPB PPB Concentration units for user
PPM interface. Enclose value in double
UGM quotes (") when setting from the
MGM RS-232 interface.
DIL_FACTOR — 1 1-1000 Dilution factor. Used only if is
dilution enabled with
FACTORY_OPT variable.
AZERO_ENABLE — ON ON, OFF ON enables auto-zero; OFF
disables it.
AZERO_FREQ Minutes 1 0-60 Auto-zero frequency.
AZERO_DWELL Seconds 2 0-60 Dwell time after opening or closing
auto-zero valve.
AZERO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1-10 Number of auto-zero samples to
average.
SG_AZERO_SAMP Samples 2 1–10 Number of auto-zero samples to
average in single-gas measure
modes.
AZERO_FSIZE Samples 15 1-50 Moving average filter size for auto-
zero samples.
AZERO_LIMIT mV 200 0-1000 Maximum auto-zero offset allowed.
NOX_SPAN1 Conc. 400 4-20000 Target NOX concentration during
span calibration of range 1.
NO_SPAN1 Conc. 400 4-20000 Target NO concentration during
span calibration of range 1.
NO2_SPAN1 Conc. 400 4-20000 Target NO2 concentration during
converter efficiency calibration of
range 1.
NOX_SLOPE1 PPB/mV3,5 1 0.25-4 NOX slope for range 1.
PPM/mV4
NOX_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10000- NOX offset for range 1.
10000
NO_SLOPE1 PPB/mV3,5 1 0.25-4 NO slope for range 1.
PPM/mV4
NO_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10000- NO offset for range 1.
10000
NOX_SPAN2 Conc. 400 4-20000 Target NOX concentration during
span calibration of range 2.

234 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
NO_SPAN2 Conc. 400 4-20000 Target NO concentration during
span calibration of range 2.
NO2_SPAN2 Conc. 400 4-20000 Target NO2 concentration during
converter efficiency calibration of
range 2.
NOX_SLOPE2 PPB/mV3,5 1 0.25-4 NOX slope for range 2.
PPM/mV4
NOX_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10000- NOX offset for range 2.
10000
NO_SLOPE2 PPB/mV3,5 1 0.25-4 NO slope for range 2.
PPM/mV4
NO_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10000- NO offset for range 2.
10000
RANGE_MODE — SNGL SNGL, Range control mode. Enclose value
IND, in double quotes (") when setting
AUTO from the RS-232 interface.
PHYS_RANGE1 PPM 2 0.1-2500 Low pre-amp range.
PHYS_RANGE2 PPM 20 0.1-2500 High pre-amp range.
CONC_RANGE1 Conc. 500 10- D/A concentration range 1 or
20000 range for NOX.
1
CONC_RANGE2 Conc. 500 10- D/A concentration range 2 or
20000 range for NO.
1
CONC_RANGE3 Conc. 500 10- D/A concentration range 3 or
20000 range for NO2.
RCELL_SET ºC 50 Warnings: 30-70 Reaction cell temperature set point
45-55 and warning limits.
1
MANIFOLD_SET ºC 50 Warnings: 30-70 Manifold temperature set point and
45-55 warning limits (if installed).
CONV_TYPE — MOLY NONE, Converter type. “CONV” is mini-
MOLY, hicon, O3KL is O3 killer only (no
CONV, converter installed). Enclose value
O3KL in double quotes (") when setting
from the RS-232 interface.
CONV_SET ºC 315 0-800 Converter temperature set point
Warnings: and warning limits for moly
305-325 converter.
CONV_TEMP_TRIG Cycles 10 0-100 Number of converter temperature
errors required to trigger warning.
BOX_SET ºC 30 Warnings: 0-70 Nominal box temperature set point
7-48 and warning limits.
PMT_SET ºC 7 Warnings: 0-40 PMT temperature warning limits.
5-12 Set point is not used.
SFLOW_SET cc/m 500 0–1000 Sample flow warning limits. Set
Warnings: point is not used.
350–600
SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001- Slope term to correct sample flow
100 rate.

044100110 Rev A 235

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
OFLOW_SET cc/m 80 0–500 Ozone flow warning limits. Set
point is not used.
OZONE_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001- Slope term to correct ozone flow
100 rate.
RCELL_SAMP_RATIO — 0.53 0.1-2 Maximum reaction cell pressure /
sample pressure ratio for valid
sample flow calculation.
STD_BOX_TEMP ºK 298 1-500 Standard box temperature and
Valid limits: valid limits for temperature
278-338 compensation.
STD_RCELL_TEMP ºK 323 1-500 Standard reaction cell temperature
Valid limits: and valid limits for temperature
278-338 compensation.
STD_RCELL_PRESS "Hg 7 0.1-50 Standard reaction cell pressure
Valid limits: and valid limits for pressure
0.5-12 compensation.
STD_SAMP_PRESS "Hg 29.92 0.1-50 Standard sample pressure and
Valid limits: valid limits for pressure
0.5-32 compensation.
5
PRESS_FILT_SIZE Samples 60 1-120 Sample and reaction cell pressure
moving average filter size.
5
PRESS_SAMP_FREQ Minutes 2 0.1-60 Sample and reaction cell pressure
sampling frequency.
RS232_MODE — 0 0-65535 RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add
values to combine flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
8 = enable iChip support
16 = enable Hessen protocol
32 = enable multidrop
64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF support
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048=even parity, 7 data bits, 1
stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt
BAUD_RATE — 19200 300, RS-232 COM1 baud rate. Enclose
1200, value in double quotes (") when
2400, setting from the RS-232 interface.
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200

236 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
MODEM_INIT — “AT Y0 &D0 Any RS-232 COM1 modem initialization
&H0 &I0 character string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
S0=2 &B0 in the return to modem on power up or
&N6 &M0 E0 allowed manually. Enclose value in double
Q1 &W0” character quotes (") when setting from the
set. Up RS-232 interface.
to 100
character
s long.
RS232_MODE2 BitFlag 11 0-65535 RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
(Same settings as RS232_MODE)
BAUD_RATE2 — 115200 300, RS-232 COM2 baud rate. Enclose
1200, value in double quotes (") when
2400, setting from the RS-232 interface.
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200
MODEM_INIT2 — “AT Y0 &D0 Any RS-232 COM2 modem initialization
&H0 &I0 character string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
S0=2 &B0 in the return to modem on power up or
&N6 &M0 E0 allowed manually. Enclose value in double
Q1 &W0” character quotes (") when setting from the
set. Up RS-232 interface.
to 100
character
s long.
RS232_PASS Password 940331 0- RS-232 log on password.
999999
MACHINE_ID ID 200 0-9999 Unique ID number for instrument.
1
GATEWAY_IP_ADDR — “000.000. Any Gateway IP address.
000.000” string of
digits
and
decimal
points.
1
INST_IP_ADDRESS — “000.000. Any Instrument IP address.
000.000” string of
digits
and
decimal
points.
INST_SUBNET_MASK — “255.255. Any Instrument subnet mask.
1
255.0” string of
digits
and
decimal
points.
1
INST_TCP_PORT — 3000 1024- Instrument TCP port.
65535

044100110 Rev A 237

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
TEST_CHAN_ID — NONE NONE, Diagnostic analog output ID.
PMT DE- Enclose value in double quotes (")
TECTOR, when setting from the RS-232
OZONE interface.
FLOW,
SAMPLE
FLOW,
SAMPLE
PRESSUR
E,
RCELL
PRESSUR
E,
RCELL
TEMP,
MANIFOL
D TEMP,
IZS
TEMP,
CONV
TEMP,
PMT
TEMP,
CHASSIS
TEMP,
HVPS
VOLTAGE
COMMAND_PROMPT — “Cmd> ” Any RS-232 interface command
character prompt. Displayed only if enabled
in the with RS232_MODE variable.
allowed Enclose value in double quotes (")
character when setting from the RS-232
set. Up interface.
to 100
character
s long.
3
REMOTE_CAL_MODE — LOW LOW, Range to calibrate during remote
HIGH calibration. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the
RS-232 interface.
PASS_ENABLE — OFF ON, OFF ON enables passwords; OFF
disables them.
STABIL_GAS — NOX NO, Selects gas for stability
NO2, measurement. Enclose value in
NOX double quotes (") when setting
from the RS-232 interface.
STABIL_FREQ Seconds 10 1-300 Stability measurement sampling
frequency.
STABIL_SAMPLES Samples 25 2-40 Number of samples in concentra-
tion stability reading.
HVPS_SET Volts 650 0-2000 High voltage power supply warning
Warnings: limits. Set point is not used.
400-900

238 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
RCELL_PRESS_SET In-Hg 6 0-100 Reaction cell pressure warning
Warnings: limits. Set point is not used.
0-15
RCELL_CYCLE Seconds 10 0.5-30 Reaction cell temperature control
cycle period.
RCELL_PROP 1/ºC 1 0-10 Reaction cell PID temperature
control proportional coefficient.
RCELL_INTEG — 0.1 0-10 Reaction cell PID temperature
control integral coefficient.
RCELL_DERIV — 0 (disabled) 0-10 Reaction cell PID temperature
control derivative coefficient.
1
MANIFOLD_CYCLE Seconds 5 0.5-30 Manifold temperature control cycle
period.
1
MANIFOLD_PROP 1/ºC 0.2 0-10 Manifold PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.
1
MANIFOLD_INTEG — 0.1 0-10 Manifold PID temperature control
integral coefficient.
1
MANIFOLD_DERIV — 0.5 0-10 Manifold PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.
SLOPE_CONST — 8 0.1-100 Slope constant factor to keep
visible slope near 1.
I2C_RESET_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON I2C bus automatic reset enable.
ALARM_TRIGGER Cycles 10 1–100 Number of valve cycles to trigger
concentration alarm.
DISP_INTENSITY — HIGH HIGH, Front panel display intensity.
MED, Enclose value in double quotes (")
LOW, when setting from the RS-232
DIM interface.
SERIAL_NUMBER — “00000000 ” Any Unique serial number for
character instrument. Enclose value in
in the double quotes (") when setting
allowed from the RS-232 interface.
character Format: YYDDDNNNNS (year, Day
set. Up of Year, Number, Special)
to 100
charac-
ters long.

044100110 Rev A 239

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Description

Units Value Range
CLOCK_FORMAT — “TIME=%H: Any Time-of-day clock format flags.
%M:%S” character Enclose value in double quotes (")
in the when setting from the RS-232
allowed interface.
character “%a” = Abbreviated weekday
set. Up name.
to 100 “%b” = Abbreviated month name.
charac- “%d” = Day of month as decimal
ters long. number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format
(00 – 23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01
– 12).
“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal number
(01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-
hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal
number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as
decimal number.
“%%” = Percent sign.
FACTORY_OPT — 0 0-65535 Factory option flags. Add values to
combine flags.
1 = enable dilution factor
2 = display units in concentration
field
4 = zero/span valves installed
8 = low span valve installed
16 = IZS and zero/span valves
installed
32 = enable software-controlled
maintenance mode
64 = display temperature in
converter warning message
128 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
256 = enable simultaneous display
of all gas concentrations
512 = enable manifold tempera-
ture control
1
Optional Equipment

240 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements, Revision C.8

Table A-2: M200E Warning Messages, Revision C.8

Name Message Text Description

WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.
WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased.
WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or
erased.
WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by SFLOW_SET
variable.
WOZONEFLOW OZONE FLOW Ozone flow outside of warning limits specified by OFLOW_SET
WARNING variable.
WOZONEGEN OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that
automatically clears itself. It clears itself when the ozone
generator is turned on.
WRCELLPRESS RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure outside of warning limits specified by
RCELL_PRESS_SET variable.
WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by
BOX_SET variable.
WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
RCELL_SET variable.
4
WMANIFOLDTEMP MANIFOLD TEMP Bypass or dilution manifold temperature outside of warning limits
WARN specified by MANIFOLD_SET variable.
WIZSTEMP IZS TEMP WARNING IZS temperature outside of warning limits specified by IZS_SET
variable.
WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING Converter temperature outside of warning limits specified by
CONV_SET variable.
WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits specified by PMT_SET
variable.
WAUTOZERO AZERO WRN XXX.X MV Auto-zero reading above limit specified by AZERO_LIMIT
variable. Value shown in message indicates auto-zero reading at
time warning was displayed.
WHVPS HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits
specified by HVPS_SET variable.
WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set
to ON.
WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set
to ON.
WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up.
WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.
WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.
WARNING
1
Optional equipment only

044100110 Rev A 241

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Table A-3: M200E Test Measurements, Revision C.8

TEST Message Text Valid Data Range Description

Function
RANGE RANGE=500.0 PPB 50-20000 ppb Analog output range in single or auto-
range modes.
RANGE1 RANGE1=500.0 PPB 3 50-20000 ppb D/A #1 range in independent range mode.
3
RANGE2 RANGE2=500.0 PPB 50-20000 ppb D/A #2 range in independent range mode.
3
RANGE3 RANGE3=500.0 PPB 50-20000 ppb D/A #3 range in independent range mode.
NOX STB NOX STB=0.5 PPB ≤ 1 ppb with zero air Concentration stability (standard deviation
based on STABIL_FREQ and
STABIL_SAMPLES)
SAMPLE FL SAMPLE FL= 500 500 ± 50 cm³/min Sample flow rate
CC/M
OZONE FL Ozone fl= 80 CC/M 80 ± 15 cm³/min FLow rate of ozone generator supply air
PMT PMT= 000 MV 0-5000 mV for PMT response
0-20000 ppb
NORM PMT NORM PMT=800.0 MV 0-5000 mV for Normalized PMT response
0-20000 ppb
AZERO AZERO= 40 MV -20 to 150 V Auto-zero value, used to normalize PMT
HVPS HVPS=700 V 400-900 ° C High voltage power supply voltage of the
PMT.
RCELL TEMP RCELL TEMP= 50.0 C 50 ± 1 ° C Reaction cell temperature
BOX TEMP BOX TEMP= 30.0 C ~9 to ~45° C Box temperature; is about 5° C higher
than ambient temperature
PMT TEMP PMT TEMP= 7.0 C 7±2°C PMT temperature, cooled with thermo-
electric cooler
MF TEMP1 MF TEMP=50.8 C 50 ± 1 ° C Manifold temperature (optional)
1
IZS TEMP IZS TEMP= 50.0 C 50 ± 1 ° C Internal zero/span option temperature
MOLY TEMP MOLY TEMP= 315 C 315 ± 5 ° C NO2 converter temperature
RCEL RCEL= 5.0 IN-HG-A <10 in-Hg-A Reaction cell (=vacuum) pressure
pressure
SAMP SAMP= 29.0 IN-HG-A Ambient - ~1 in-Hg-A Sample pressure, usually about 1 less than
pressure ambient, atmospheric pressure.
NOX SLOPE NOX SLOPE= 0.000 1.0 ± 0.3 Slope of linear fit for NOX response,
computed during calibration
NOX OFF NOX OFF= 0.0 MV -50 to 150 mV Offset of linear fit for NOX response,
computed during calibration.
NO SLOPE NO SLOPE= 0.000 1.0 ± 0.3 Slope of linear fit for NO response,
computed during calibration
NO OFFS NO OFFS= 0.0 MV -50 to 150 mV Offset of linear fit for NO response,
computed during calibration.
Time of Day TIME=15:11:24 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 Current instrument time (24-hour format)

242 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A-4: M200E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision C.8

Table A-4: M200E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision C.8

Signal Name Bit or Channel Description

Number
Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9-16 = bits 0-7, default I/O address 322 hex
0-7 Spare
Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST 0 1 = electrical test on
0 = off
OPTIC_TEST 1 1 = optic test on
0 = off
PREAMP_RANGE_HI 2 1 = select high preamp range
0 = select low range
O3GEN_STATUS 3 0 = ozone generator on
1 = off
4-5 Spare
I2C_RESET 6 1 = reset I2C peripherals
0 = normal
I2C_DRV_RST 7 0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal
Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration
EXT_SPAN_CAL 1 0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration
2-5 Spare
6-7 Always 1
Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, default I/O address 325 hex
0-5 Spare
6-7 Always 1
Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, default I/O address 321 hex
0-7 Spare
Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9-12 = bits 0-3, default I/O address 325 hex
0-3 Spare
Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1-12 = bits 4-7, default I/O address 325 hex
4-7 Spare
A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition
ST_CONC_VALID 1 0 = conc. valid
1 = hold off or other conditions
ST_HIGH_RANGE 2 0 = high auto-range in use
1 = low auto-range

044100110 Rev A 243

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

Signal Name Bit or Channel Description

Number
ST_ZERO_CAL 3 0 = in zero calibration
1 = not in zero
ST_SPAN_CAL 4 0 = in span calibration
1 = not in span
ST_DIAG_MODE 5 0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
6-7 Spare
B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, default I/O address 324 hex
0-7 Spare
Front panel I C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
2

MAINT_MODE 5 (input) 0 = maintenance mode

1 = normal mode
LANG2_SELECT 6 (input) 0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
SAMPLE_LED 8 (output) 0 = sample LED on
1 = off
CAL_LED 9 (output) 0 = cal. LED on
1 = off
FAULT_LED 10 (output) 0 = fault LED on
1 = off
AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG 0 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds
to keep relay board active
RCELL_HEATER 1 0 = reaction cell heater on
1 = off
CONV_HEATER 2 0 = converter heater on
1 = off
2
MANIFOLD_HEATER 3 0 = bypass or dilution manifold heater on
1 = off
IZS_HEATER 4 0 = IZS heater on
1 = off
5 Spare
SPAN_VALVE 6 0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in
CAL_VALVE 7 0 = let cal. gas in
1 = let sample gas in
AUTO_ZERO_VALVE 8 0 = let zero air in
1 = let sample gas in
NOX_VALVE 9 0 = let NOX gas into reaction cell
1 = let NO gas into reaction cell
10-15 Spare
Rear board primary MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 32A hex
PMT_SIGNAL 0 PMT detector

244 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Signal Name Bit or Channel Description

Number
HVPS_VOLTAGE 1 HV power supply output
PMT_TEMP 2 PMT temperature
3 Spare
4 Temperature MUX
5 Spare
6 Spare
SAMPLE_PRESSURE 7 Sample pressure
RCELL_PRESSURE 8 Reaction cell pressure
REF_4096_MV 9 4.096V reference from MAX6241
OZONE_FLOW 10 Ozone flow rate
TEST_INPUT_11 11 Diagnostic test input
CONV_TEMP 12 Converter temperature
TEST_INPUT_13 13 Diagnostic test input
14 DAC loopback MUX
REF_GND 15 Ground reference
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 326 hex
BOX_TEMP 0 Internal box temperature
RCELL_TEMP 1 Reaction cell temperature
IZS_TEMP 2 IZS temperature
3 Spare
4 Spare
TEMP_INPUT_5 5 Diagnostic temperature input
TEMP_INPUT_6 6 Diagnostic temperature input
2
MANIFOLD_TEMP 7 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 327 hex
DAC_CHAN_0 0 DAC channel 0 loopback
DAC_CHAN_1 1 DAC channel 1 loopback
DAC_CHAN_2 2 DAC channel 2 loopback
DAC_CHAN_3 3 DAC channel 3 loopback
Rear board analog outputs, default I/O address 327 hex
CONC_OUT_1 0 Concentration output #1 (NOX)
CONC_OUT_2 1 Concentration output #2 (NO)
CONC_OUT_3 2 Concentration output #3 (NO2)
TEST_OUTPUT 3 Test measurement output
1
Hessen protocol.
2
Factory option.

044100110 Rev A 245

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

APPENDIX A-5: M200E Trigger Events and iDAS Functions, Revision C.8
Table A-5: M200E DAS Trigger Events, Revision C.8

Trigger Name Description

Events that can be accessed through the front panel
ATIMER Automatic timer expired
EXITZR Exit zero calibration mode
EXITHS Exit high span calibration mode
EXITMP Exit multi-point calibration mode
SLPCHG Slope and offset recalculated
Events that can be accessed through the remote interface
EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode
AZEROW Auto-zero warning
OFLOWW Ozone flow warning
RPRESW Reaction cell pressure warning
RTEMPW Reaction cell temperature warning
1
MFTMPW Bypass or dilution manifold temperature warning
1
IZTMPW IZS temperature warning
CTEMPW Converter temperature warning
PTEMPW PMT temperature warning
SFLOWW Sample flow warning
BTEMPW Box temperature warning
HVPSW HV power supply warning

Table A-6: M200E iDAS Functions, Revision C.8

Name Description Units

PMTDET PMT detector reading mV
NXSLP1 NOX slope for range #1 —
NXSLP2 NOX slope for range #2 —
NOSLP1 NO slope for range #1 —
NOSLP2 NO slope for range #2 —
NXOFS1 NOX offset for range #1 mV
NXOFS2 NOX offset for range #2 mV
NOOFS1 NO offset for range #1 mV
NOOFS2 NO offset for range #2 mV
2
NXZSC1 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibra- ppb
tion, just before computing new slope and offset
2
NXZSC2 NOX concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibra- ppb
tion, just before computing new slope and offset
NOZSC1 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, ppb 2
just before computing new slope and offset

246 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

Name Description Units

NOZSC2 NO concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, ppb 2
just before computing new slope and offset
N2ZSC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, ppb 2
just before computing new slope and offset
N2ZSC2 NO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, ppb 2
just before computing new slope and offset
NXCNC1 NOX concentration for range #1 ppb 2
NXCNC2 NOX concentration for range #2 ppb 2
NOCNC1 NO concentration for range #1 ppb 2
NOCNC2 NO concentration for range #2 ppb 2
N2CNC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 ppb 2
N2CNC2 NO2 concentration for range #2 ppb 2
STABIL Concentration stability ppb 2
AZERO Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV
O3FLOW Ozone flow rate cm³/min
RCPRES Reaction cell pressure in-Hg-A
RCTEMP Reaction cell temperature °C
1
MFTEMP Bypass or dilution manifold temperature °C
1
IZTEMP IZS block temperature °C
CNVEF1 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 —
CNVEF2 Converter efficiency factor for range #2 —
CNVTMP Converter temperature °C
PMTTMP PMT temperature °C
SMPFLW Sample flow rate cm³/min
SMPPRS Sample pressure in-Hg-A
BOXTMP Internal box temperature °C
HVPS High voltage power supply output V
REFGND Ground reference (REF_GND) mV
RF4096 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV
TEST11 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV
TEST13 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV
TEMP5 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C
TEMP6 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C
1
Factory option.
2
Standard instrument units.

044100110 Rev A 247

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision C.8

Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators, Revision C.8

Command Additional Command Syntax Description

Display help screen and this list of
? [ID]
commands
LOGON [ID] password Establish connection to instrument
LOGOFF [ID] Terminate connection to instrument
SET ALL|name|hexmask Display test(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print test(s) to screen
T [ID]
name Print single test
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Disable test(s)
SET ALL|name|hexmask Display warning(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print warning(s)
W [ID]
name Clear single warning
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Clear warning(s)
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2] Enter calibration mode
ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence
C [ID] COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN Compute new slope/offset
EXIT Exit calibration mode
ABORT Abort calibration sequence
LIST Print all I/O signals
name[=value] Examine or set I/O signal
LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests
ENTER name Execute diagnostic test
EXIT Exit diagnostic test
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode] Reset instrument
D [ID] PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT] Print iDAS configuration
RECORDS ["name"] Print number of iDAS records
REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number]
[FROM=<start date>][TO=<end
date>][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print DAS Print iDAS records
records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)
[HH:MM:SS]
CANCEL Halt printing iDAS records
LIST Print setup variables
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]] Modify variable
name="value" Modify enumerated variable
V [ID]
CONFIG Print instrument configuration
MAINT ON|OFF Enter/exit maintenance mode
MODE Print current instrument mode
DASBEGIN [<data channel definitions>]
Upload iDAS configuration
DASEND
CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single iDAS channel
CHANNELDELETE ["name"] Delete iDAS channels

248 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A

The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in
[brackets] are optional designators. The following key assignments also apply.

Terminal Key Assignments

ESC Abort line
CR (ENTER) Execute command
Ctrl-C Switch to computer mode
Computer Mode Key Assignments
LF (line feed) Execute command
Ctrl-T Switch to terminal mode

044100110 Rev A 249

APPENDIX A Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

250 044100110 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX B

APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables

NOTE
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne-API
may result in non-compliance with European standard EN 61010-1.

The following listings contain spare parts for individual ordering as well as recommended
stocking levels for operation of multiple analyzers to minimize downtime for any one
analyzer unit.

The expendables (chemicals, filters, O-rings etc) are not included in the spare parts listing,
neither are optional analyzer components as listed in Chapter 5.

Table B-1: M200E Individual Spare Parts List

Part Number Description Notes

000940100 CD, ORIFICE, 0.003” GREEN Flow Control Orifice, 40 cm³/min, high
concentration sample flow
000940400 CD, ORIFICE, 0.004” BLUE Flow Control Orifice, 80 cm³/min, standard
ozone flow
000940500 CD, ORIFICE, 0.007” ORANGE Flow Control Orifice, 250 cm³/min, optional
sample and/or ozone flow
000940600 CD, ORIFICE, 0.010” BROWN Flow Control Orifice, 500 cm³/min, standard
sample flow
002270000 GASKET, WINDOW Gasket for reaction cell window
002730000 CD, FILTER, 665NM Reaction cell optical glass filter
003290000 THERMISTOR, BASIC Thermistor for reaction cell. Also used in IZS
option, bypass manifold and O2 sensor.
009070000 COOLER, T.E Thermo-electric PMT cooler
010150101 ASSY, MOLY CONVERTER WELDED NO2 converter cartridge, guts only without
CARTRIDGE heater and thermocouple
011930000 CD, PMT, NOX, M200AR928 Photo multiplier tube (PMT)
013140000 ASSY, COOLER FAN, M200A 92 mm PMT cooling fan under PMT housing
014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX PMT socket and high voltage power supply
including LED and thermistor housing.
016290000 WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM Replacement glass window for sample filter
024710000 ASSY, TUBING, TU0000001, 6FT Clear FEP tubing, 1/8” OD, ~1.8 m
024720000 ASSY, TUBING, TU0000002, 6FT Black FEP tubing, 1/8” OD, ~1.8 m
024750000 ASSY, TUBING, TU0000009, 6FT Clear PVC tubing, 1/4” OD, ~1.8 m
037860000 ORING, TEFLON, RETAINING RING, Sample filter retaining ring
47MM
040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES 60 mm main chassis fan on rear panel
040300100 ASSY, 115V CONFIG PLUG, M200E Power configuration plug for 115 V AC
040300200 ASSY, 230V CONFIG PLUG, M200E Power configuration plug for 230 V AC

044100120 Rev A 251

APPENDIX B Model 200E Instruction Manual

Part Number Description Notes

040690100 PCA, E SERIES MTHRD W/MICROFITS, Analyzer Motherboard
AMBIENT
040900000 ORIFICE HOLDER, M200E REACTION Orifice holder only; does not include fitting, O-
CELL rings or any orifice assembly parts
041710000 CPU, CONFIGURATION, "E" SERIES CPU board including EEPROM. Needs
043890100 disk-on-chip with software
043890100 DOC, w/SOFTWARE, M200E Disk-on-chip with all required software, needed
for 041710000 CPU board.
042580000 PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V- Front panel keyboard and display board.
DETECT Requires separate display DS0000009
044190000 ASSY, OZONE FILTER UNIT Cartridge includes all fittings, chemical and
mounting screws
044470001 044470001 MOD, O3 FILTER FT 294 with pressed-in sintered filter. O3 filter
FITTING, FT294, M200E requires two
045500100 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 4 MIL Complete assembly to replace critical orifice, O-
rings, sintered filter, spring and fitting FT10 for
the ozone supply gas. Nominal 80 cm³/min
045500300 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 10 MIL As previous, except for the sample gas.
Nominal 500 cm³/min
045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL As previous, except for the optional bypass
manifold or high ozone flow. Nominal 250
cm³/min
045500400 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL Same as previous, 40 cm³/min flow
045500500 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, no orifice Same as previous, without orifice
DS0000009 DISPLAY Vacuum fluorescence display. Mounts on
042580000 keyboard PCA.
FL0000001 FILTER, SS Filter for flow control assembly (All Versions)
FM0000004 FLOWMETER Ozone supply air flow meter
FT0000010 CONNECTOR-ORING, SS, 1/8" Fitting to cap orifice holder
FT0000190 NUT, DELRIN, 1/4-28, 1/8 TUBE Replacement nut for FT294, O3 filter fitting
FT0000267 BURKERT FERRULE TOOL For O3 filter assembly fittings
FT0000303 FERRULE, 1/4-28, 1/8 TUBE, FOR Replacement ferrule for FT294, O3 filter fitting
FT294
HE0000017 HEATER, 12W/120V (50W/240V) CE Reaction cell heater cartridge. Also used in IZS
APPROVED option, bypass manifold and O2 sensor.
HW0000020 SPRING Spring for flow control assembly
HW0000036 TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL) Teflon tape for NPT threaded fittings
IC0000208 IC QUAD DARLINGTON POWER Valve driver chip on relay board
DRIVER UDN2540B
KIT000115 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, Ozone air or sample air dryer only, without
M200A/ E bracket
OR0000001 ORING, 2-006VT O-ring for flow control assemblies (2 per assy)
OR0000002 ORING, 2-023V O-ring seals ends of reaction cell (2 required)
OR0000034 ORING, 2-011V FT10 O-ring for FT 10 (one per fitting)
OR0000039 ORING, 2-012V O-ring for orifice holder (one per fitting)

252 044100120 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX B

Part Number Description Notes

OR0000044 ORING, 2-125V O-ring seals reaction cell to PMT housing
PS0000029 EOS SWITCHING PS, +5V, +/-15V, 5 V and ±15V power supply for all electronics
40W
PS0000031 EOS SWITCHING PS, 12V, 60W 12 V Power supply for PMT cooler and valves
RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, GORDOS PREFERRED Power relays for heater circuits. M200E needs
two, IZS, bypass manifold and O2 sensor
options one more each
SW0000025 PWR SWITCH/CIRCUIT BREAKER, VDE Power switch on front panel
CE 6.75A
VA0000007 VALVE, 3-WAY SS, 12VDC Valve for NO/NOX and AutoZero as well as both
IZS option valves
WR0000008 POWER CORD, 10A Main power cord

Table B-2: M200E Recommended Spare Part Stocking Levels

PART NO. DESCRIPTION Number of analyzers

1 2- 5 6-10 11-20 21-30
010150100 Subassy, Moly Con Cartridge 1 1
1
011310000 Assy, Dryer, NOX 1 2 3 4
011930000 PMT, NOX 1 1
014080100 Assy, HVPS, SOX/NOX 1 1
014610000 Replacement Cooler Assembly 1 2 3 3
039550200 PCA, Relay Card, M100E/M200E, w/Relays 1 1 2
040010000 Assy, Fan Rear Panel, E Series 1 1 2 4 4
040030800 PCA, Press Sensor (2X), Flow, E Series 1 2 3
040420200 Assy, O3 Brick, M200EH, High Output 1
040690100 E Series Mother Board 1 2
041710000 CPU, Configuration "E" Series 1 1
041800200 PCA, PMT Preamp, M200E/EH 1 1
042580000 PCA, Keyboard, E- Series, W/V-Detect 1 1
044470001 1/4" NPT TO 1/4-28 FEMALE ADAPTER U500 1 1 2 4
044610000 Assy, Valves, Moly Hicon, M200E/EH 1 2
045500100 4 Mil Orifice Holder (O3 stream) 1 1 2 2 4
045500300 10 Mil Orifice Holder (sample stream) 1 1 2 2 4
DS0000009 Display 1 1
FM0000004 Flow meter for O3 flow 1 2 3
FT0000267 BURKERT FERRULE TOOL for 044470001 fitting. 1 2 4 8 16
FT0000303 FERRULE, 1/4-28, 1/8 TUBE, FOR 044470001 2 2 4 6 10
HE0000017 Heater, 12V, 120W(50V, 240W) CE approved 1 1 2 2 3
OR0000034 O-Ring, 2-011V 2 5 10
OR0000044 O-Ring, 2-125V 2 5 10

044100120 Rev A 253

APPENDIX B Model 200E Instruction Manual

PART NO. DESCRIPTION Number of analyzers

1 2- 5 6-10 11-20 21-30
OR0000045 O-Ring, 2-226V 2 5 10
PS0000029 EOS, Switching PS +5V, +/-15V, 40W 1 1 1 2
PS0000031 EOS Switching PS, 12V, 60W 1 1 1 2
2
PU0000005 Pump, Thomas 607, 115V/60Hz (PU 6 for 230/50) 1
RL0000015 Power Relay DPDT for heated zones 1 1 1 2 3
VA0000007 Valve (NO/NOX, AutoZero, IZS, Zero/Span) 1 2 4
1 nd
Combination Dryer is 04150000, 2 dryer is KIT 115.

Table B-3: M200E Expendables List

Part Number Description Notes Qty1

002270100 GASKET, WINDOW (12 PACK) 12 gaskets for reaction cell optical 1
filter
005960000 AKIT, EXP KIT, ACTIVATED Black activated charcoal for zero air 50 g
CHARCOAL, 2.5 KG scrubber (~50 refills)
005970000 AKIT, EXP KIT, PURAFIL, 2.5 KG Pink Purafil chemisorbant for zero air 70 g
scrubber cartridge (~35 refills)
009690200 AKIT,TFE FLTR ELEM’S, 47MM, (100) 100 filters for 47 mm, 1µm sample 1
filter
009690300 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM'S, 47MM, (25) 25 filters for 47 mm, 1µm sample 1
filter
046040000 AKIT, CH-43, (300 g) Refill for ozone air filter cartridge 1
(~30 refills)
FL0000001 FILTER, SS Sintered filters for orifice assemblies 1
HW0000020 SPRING Spring for all orifice assemblies 1
OR0000001 ORING, 2-006VT Viton O-rings for all orifice assemblies 2
1
Quantity needed for one replacement

Expendables kits:

Part Number Description Notes Qty2

014030000 AKIT, M200A EXP KIT-IZS Expendables kit for IZS option
This kit contains the following items
005960000 AKIT, EXP KIT, ACTIVATED Black activated charcoal for zero air 2.5 kg
CHARCOAL, 2.5 KG scrubber (~50 refills)
005970000 AKIT, EXP KIT, PURAFIL, 2.5 KG Pink Purafil chemisorbant for zero air 2.5 kg
scrubber cartridge (~35 refills)
FL0000001 FILTER, SS Sintered stainless steel filter 2
FL0000003 FILTER, DFU Particle filter between scrubber and 1
analyzer
OR0000001 ORING, 2-006VT O-ring to seal critical orifice 4
2
Quantity included in one kit.

254 044100120 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX B

Part Number Description Notes Qty2

046060000 AKIT, ORIFICE EXPENDABLES, Expendables kit for one orifice
M200Ex assembly
This kit contains the following items
FL0000001 FILTER, SS Sintered stainless steel filter 1
HW0000020 SPRING Spring to hold assembly in place 1
OR0000001 ORING, 2-006VT O-ring to seal critical orifice 2
2
Quantity included in one kit.

044100120 Rev A 255

APPENDIX B Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

256 044100120 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX C

APPENDIX C: Repair Questionnaire - M200E

Company: _________________ Contact Name: _________ ________________________
Phone Number: _____________ Fax Number: ___________ Email: __________________
Site Address: _______________ _____________________ ________________________
Can we connect to the instrument? If so, provide IP address or modem: ________________
Model 200E Serial Number: ____ _____________________ Firmware revision: _________

The serial number can be found on the back of the instrument, the firmware revision is displayed in the upper left corner of the
display when pressing SETUP on the front panel (Example: C.3).

1. List all front panel error/warning messages: __________ ________________________

__________________________ _____________________ ________________________
2. Please complete the following table: (Depending on options installed, not all test
parameters shown below may be available in your instrument)
Recorded
Parameter Recorded Value Acceptable Value Parameter Acceptable Value
Value
RANGE ppb/ppm 50 ppb - 20 ppm PMT TEMP °C 7±2
NOX STB ppb/ppm ≤ 1 ppb with zero air IZS TEMP °C 50 ± 1
Sample FL cm³/min 500 ± 50 MOLY TEMP °C 315 ± 5
Ozone FL cm³/min 80 ± 15 RCEL pressure in-Hg-A <10
PMT signal with
mV -20 to 150 SAMP pressure in-Hg-A Ambient - ~1
zero air
PMT signal at mV 0-5000
NO SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3
span gas conc ppb/ppm 0-20000 ppb
NORM PMT at mV 0-5000
NO OFFS mV -50 to 150
span gas conc ppb/ppm 0-20000 ppb
AZERO mV -20 to 150 NOX SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3
HVPS V 400-900 NOX OFF mV -50 to 150
RCELL TEMP °C 50 ± 1 ETEST PMT mV 2000 ± 1000
BOX TEMP °C Ambient + ~5 OTEST PMT mV 2000 ± 1000

3. Has the analyzer been checked for leaks? Yes No ; for proper flows? Yes No

4. What are the failure symptoms? ____________________ ________________________

____________________________ ________________________ ___ Continue on back if necessary

5. Which tests have you done trying to solve the problem? _ ________________________

__________________________ _____________________ __ Continue on back if necessary

6. If possible, fax a portion of a strip chart or email a data file to customer service: 6565
Nancy Ridge Drive, San Diego, CA 92121. Phone: +1 858 657 9800 or 1-800 324 5190.
Fax: +1 858 657 9816. Email: [email protected].

You can access and submit an online version of this form at

http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/p-fm200E.asp

(04503) 044100102 Rev A 257

APPENDIX C Model 200E Instruction Manual

Notes and further information:

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

258 (04503) 044100130 Rev A

Model 200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX D

APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics

Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics

# Document # Document Title Number

of pages
1 04574 Document, M200E Detailed Pneumatic Diagrams for all configura- 4
tions (similar to Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12)
2 04504 Document, M200E Electronic Interconnect Diagram 1
3 04496 Document, M200E Electronic Interconnect Listing 2
4 01669 PCA 016680300, Ozone generator board 1
5 01840 PCA Thermo-electric cooler board 1
6 03632 PCA 03631, 0-20mA Driver 1
7 03956 PCA 039550200, Relay Board 3
8 04070 PCA 04069, Motherboard, E-series 8
9 04259 PCA 04258, Keyboard & Display Driver 1
10 04354 PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface 1
11 04395 PCA 4394, Ethernet board (optional equipment) 1
12 04501 PCA 041800200, PMT pre-amplifier board 3
Total number of pages as Z-folds 27

044100141 Rev A 259

APPENDIX D Model 200E Instruction Manual

USER NOTES:

260 044100141 Rev A

 Orifice assemblies consist of:
O-ring #OR1
Orifice 00094xxxx
O-ring #OR1
Filter #FL1
To vent or Spring # HW20

charcoal FT17
1/8NPT Instrument chassis
scrubber 1/4tube

Exhaust to pump
FT12
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
1/8NPT AutoZero exit
aaa
aaa
1/4” Valve States:
External aaa
aaa
aaa

Vacuum manifold
xxxx=0600
Pump FT12 NO / NOx - OFF in NO mode, ON in NOx mode
1/8NPT Vacuum pressure
1/4” Auto Zero - OFF in measure mode, ON in AutoZero mode
Sample / Cal - OFF in sample mode, ON in calibration mode
FT12
1/8NPT O3 scrubber / sample exit Zero / Span - OFF for zero gas, ON for span gas
Filter 1/4”
FL3 Valve Fitting Assignments:
Port 1 - normally closed

Outside chassis
Inside chassis
Port 2 - common
Port 3 - normally open
FT17
1/8NPT Nafion dryer purge
1/4tube

1/4” Tygon

FT156
1/4” SS O3 scrubber 1/4” SS 1/4” FEP black
Rear panel fitting #1 (top): SAMPLE IN P/N 042240001
#FT134
1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union 1/8” FEP
1/4” FEP

Auto Zero
Rear panel fitting #2: EXHAUST OUT 1/4” Tygon valve VA7
#FT38
1/4” to 1/4” bulkhead union
1
NO2 converter / 3 1/8” FEP black

O3 scrubber housing 2 O3generator

O3 generator
#0168105 (low)
040420200
#01681xx(high)
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
1/8” NPT Tee
aaaaaaaaaa Filter
FT114
FL3

2 1/8” Tee
NO2 converter 1/8”
FT31
P/N 04102 SS 1 3

Flow control assembly

NO / NOx 1/8” FEP
valve VA7 black

00176-1800
Nafion

xxxx=0400
dryer
1/8” SS
O3 air

1/8” FEP

1/4” FEP
O3 filter
1/4” Tygon 1/8” FEP
black

04090 / OR34
Orifice holder
FT10 / OR34
1/4” Tygon Fittings 04447,
FT297, Ft298

Fittings
2 x each
Fitting
Flow &

S3: O3 flow
S2:
pressure aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
FT63
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa
Vacuum pressure
sensor

Reaction cell

1/4” Tygon
Sample pressure xxxx=0600 xxxx=0100
S1:
board
04151
NO + O3

FT17
1/4”
1/4” Tygon

hv
Detector
1/8” FEP

Sample
Filter
1/8” FEP

04574A: M200E pneumatic flow diagram, base configuration.

 Orifice assemblies consist of:
O-ring #OR1
Orifice 00094xxxx
O-ring #OR1
Filter #FL1
To vent or Spring # HW20

charcoal FT17
1/8NPT Instrument chassis
scrubber 1/4tube

Exhaust to pump
FT12
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
1/8NPT AutoZero exit
aaa
aaa
1/4” Valve States:
External aaa
aaa
aaa

Vacuum manifold
xxxx=0600
Pump FT12 NO / NOx - OFF in NO mode, ON in NOx mode
1/8NPT Vacuum pressure
1/4” Auto Zero - OFF in measure mode, ON in AutoZero mode
Sample / Cal - OFF in sample mode, ON in calibration mode
FT12
1/8NPT O3 scrubber / sample exit Zero / Span - OFF for zero gas, ON for span gas
Filter 1/4”
FL3 Valve Fitting Assignments:
Port 1 - normally closed

Outside chassis
Inside chassis
Port 2 - common
Port 3 - normally open
FT17
1/8NPT Nafion dryer purge
1/4tube

1/4” Tygon

FT156
1/4” SS O3 scrubber 1/4” SS 1/4” FEP black
Rear panel fitting #1 (top): SAMPLE IN P/N 042240001
#FT134
1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union 1/8” FEP
1/4” FEP

Auto Zero
Rear panel fitting #2: EXHAUST OUT 1/4” Tygon valve VA7
#FT38
1/4” to 1/4” bulkhead union
1
NO2 converter / 3 1/8” FEP black
Rear panel fitting #3: SPAN GAS IN
#FT134
1/8” FEP
O3 scrubber housing 2 O3generator
O3 generator
1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union #0168105 (low)
040420200
#01681xx(high)
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
1/8” NPT Tee
aaaaaaaaaa Filter
FT114
FL3

2 1/8” Tee
Rear panel fitting #5: ZERO AIR IN NO2 converter 1/8”
FT31
#FT134
P/N 04102 SS 1 3

Flow control assembly

1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union
NO / NOx
1/8” FEP

1/8” FEP
valve VA7 black

00176-1800
Nafion

xxxx=0400
#FL3
Filter

dryer
1/8” SS
O3 air

1/8” FEP

1/4” FEP
O3 filter
1/4” Tygon 1/8” FEP
black

04090 / OR34
Orifice holder
FT10 / OR34
1/4” Tygon Fittings 04447,
FT297, Ft298

Fittings
Zero air scrubber 2 x each
#00433 Zero/Span Sample/Cal
valve valve
Fitting
Flow &

S3: O3 flow
FT63
1/8” FEP

S2:
pressure aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa

2 3 Vacuum pressure
sensor

Reaction cell

1/4” Tygon
Sample pressure xxxx=0600 xxxx=0100
board
3 2 S1:
Option: Zero/Span valves 04234
Option: Zero air scrubber 00433

04151
NO + O3
1 1

FT17
1/4”
(includes filter and tubing)

1/4” Tygon

hv
Detector
1/8” FEP
(includes fittings)

Sample
Filter
1/8” FEP

04574A: M200E pneumatic flow diagram with zero / span valves and external zero air scrubber.
 Orifice assemblies consist of:
O-ring #OR1
Orifice 00094xxxx
O-ring #OR1
Filter #FL1
To vent or Spring # HW20

charcoal FT17
1/8NPT Instrument chassis
scrubber 1/4tube

Exhaust to pump
FT12
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
1/8NPT AutoZero exit
aaa
aaa
1/4” Valve States:
External aaa
aaa
aaa

Vacuum manifold
xxxx=0600
Pump FT12 NO / NOx - OFF in NO mode, ON in NOx mode
1/8NPT Vacuum pressure
1/4” Auto Zero - OFF in measure mode, ON in AutoZero mode
Sample / Cal - OFF in sample mode, ON in calibration mode
FT12
1/8NPT O3 scrubber / sample exit Zero / Span - OFF for zero gas, ON for span gas
Filter 1/4”
FL3 Valve Fitting Assignments:
aaa
aaa
aaa
FT 8
IZS PermTube exit Port 1 - normally closed

Outside chassis
aaa
aaa 1/8NPT

Inside chassis
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa 1/8” Port 2 - common
xxxx=0400
Port 3 - normally open
FT17
1/8NPT Nafion dryer purge
1/4tube

1/4” Tygon

FT156
1/4” SS O3 scrubber 1/4” SS 1/4” FEP black
Rear panel fitting #1 (top): SAMPLE IN P/N 042240001
#FT134
1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union 1/8” FEP
1/4” FEP

Auto Zero
Rear panel fitting #2: EXHAUST OUT 1/4” Tygon valve VA7
#FT38
1/4” to 1/4” bulkhead union
1
NO2 converter / 3 1/8” FEP black

O3 scrubber housing 2 O3generator

O3 generator
#0168105 (low)
040420200
#01681xx(high)
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
1/8” NPT Tee
aaaaaaaaaa Filter
FT114
FL3

2 1/8” Tee
Rear panel fitting #5: ZERO AIR IN NO2 converter 1/8”
FT31
#FT134
P/N 04102 SS 1 3

Flow control assembly

1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union
NO / NOx
1/8” FEP

1/8” FEP
valve VA7 black

00176-1800
Nafion

xxxx=0400
#FL3
Filter

dryer
1/8” SS
O3 air

1/8” FEP

1/4” FEP
O3 filter
1/4” Tygon 1/8” FEP
black
Option: IZS with valves and zero air scrubber 04231

04090 / OR34
Orifice holder
FT10 / OR34
1/4” Tygon Fittings 04447,
FT297, Ft298

Fittings
Zero air scrubber 2 x each
#00433 Zero/Span Sample/Cal
valve valve
Fitting
Flow &

S3: O3 flow
S2:
pressure aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
FT63
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa

2 3 Vacuum pressure
sensor

Reaction cell

1/4” Tygon
Sample pressure xxxx=0600 xxxx=0100
1/8” Tee board
FT31 3 2 S1:
04151
NO + O3
1 1

FT17
1/4”
1/4” Tygon

hv
1/8” FEP Detector
1/8” FEP

Span gas 1/8” FEP

Sample
IZS 1/8” FEP
Filter
Permeation Source 1/8” Tee
FT31

04574A: M200E pneumatic flow diagram with IZS option.

 Orifice assemblies consist of:
O-ring #OR1
Orifice 00094xxxx
O-ring #OR1
Filter #FL1
To vent or Spring # HW20

charcoal FT17
1/8NPT Instrument chassis
scrubber 1/4tube

Exhaust to pump
FT12
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
1/8NPT AutoZero exit
aaa
aaa
1/4” Valve States:
External aaa
aaa
aaa

Vacuum manifold
xxxx=0600
Pump FT12 NO / NOx - OFF in NO mode, ON in NOx mode
1/8NPT Vacuum pressure
1/4” Auto Zero - OFF in measure mode, ON in AutoZero mode
Sample / Cal - OFF in sample mode, ON in calibration mode
FT12
1/8NPT O3 scrubber / sample exit Zero / Span - OFF for zero gas, ON for span gas
Filter 1/4”
FL3 Valve Fitting Assignments:
aaa
aaa
aaa
FT 8
IZS PermTube exit Port 1 - normally closed

Outside chassis
aaa
aaa 1/8NPT

Inside chassis
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa 1/8” Port 2 - common
xxxx=0400
Port 3 - normally open
FT17
1/8NPT Nafion dryer purge
1/4tube

1/4” Tygon

FT156
1/4” SS O3 scrubber 1/4” SS 1/4” FEP black
Rear panel fitting #1 (top): SAMPLE IN P/N 042240001
#FT134
1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union 1/8” FEP
1/4” FEP

Auto Zero
Rear panel fitting #2: EXHAUST OUT 1/4” Tygon valve VA7
#FT38
1/4” to 1/4” bulkhead union
1
NO2 converter / 3 1/8” FEP black
Rear panel fitting #3: SPAN GAS IN
#FT134
1/8” FEP
O3 scrubber housing 2 O3generator
O3 generator
1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union #0168105 (low)
040420200
#01681xx(high)
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
1/8” NPT Tee
aaaaaaaaaa Filter
FT114
FL3

2 1/8” Tee
Rear panel fitting #5: ZERO AIR IN NO2 converter 1/8”
FT31
#FT134
P/N 04102 SS 1 3

Flow control assembly

1/4” to 1/8” bulkhead red. union
NO / NOx
1/8” FEP

1/8” FEP
valve VA7 black

00176-1800
Nafion

xxxx=0400
#FL3
Filter

dryer
1/8” SS
O3 air

1/8” FEP

1/4” FEP
O3 filter
1/4” Tygon 1/8” FEP
black
Option: IZS with valves and zero air scrubber 04231

04090 / OR34
Orifice holder
FT10 / OR34
1/4” Tygon Fittings 04447,
FT297, Ft298

Fittings
Zero air scrubber Option: sample gas dryer KIT000115 2 x each
#00433 Zero/Span Sample/Cal
valve valve Flow control Fitting
Flow &

S3: O3 flow
S2:
pressure assembly 0017618 aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
FT63
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa

2 3 Vacuum pressure
sensor xxxx=0400

Reaction cell

1/4” Tygon
Sample pressure aaa
aaa xxxx=0600 xxxx=0100
1/8” Tee board aaa
aaa
aaa

FT31 3 2 S1:
04151
Nafion
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa

NO + O3
1 1

FT17
dryer

1/4”
1/4” Tygon
sample

hv
gas
1/8” FEP Detector
1/8” FEP

Span gas 1/8” FEP

1/4” Tygon / dryer purge

Sample
IZS 1/8” FEP
Filter
Permeation Source 1/8” Tee
FT31

04574A: M200E pneumatic flow diagram with all options.

 1 2 3 4 5 6

P9
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
P16

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A3 P? CN0000055

J15-10
PCA 01840 TEC BOARD

J15-9
J15-8
J15-7
J15-6
J15-5
J15-4
J15-3
J15-2
J15-1
TEC COOLER FAN
A2 PCA 04501 PREAMPLIFIER A5 IZS W/VALVES or ZERO/SPAN VALVES
A6

AG-FL
V+-FL
FLW1

FLW2
PRS2

PRS1
ETST J2-1

+12V

+15V
EGND

+5V
+12RET
CHGND

AGND

AGND

DGND
-15V
ETST

THERMIST_A
THERMIST_B
OTST J2-2

115VHTR_A
115VHTR_B
OTST
J2-3
J2-4

VLV1+

VLV2+
VLV1-

VLV2-
PRNG J2-5 P3 CN0000053 CN0000373 P15 POWER
D PRB D

ANALOG SIGNALS
TPMT J2-6 J106-1

6
5
4
3
2
1
TPMT 1 IRST I2C-B
HVPS J2-7 IC_DGN J106-2
HV 2 GND

I2C_RESET
PMT+ J2-8 POWER J106-3
PMT 3 VCC

J1-6
J1-5
J1-4
J1-3
J1-2
J1-1
J2-9 J106-4 I2C

J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5

J2-1
J2-2

J3-1
J3-2
+15V 4 EGND
J2-10 IC_SDA J106-5

PWR
GND

GND
VCC
SDA
-15V 5 SDA

SCL
N/U

N/A
PMT- J2-11 IC_SCL J106-6
AGND 6 SCL
J2-12 P7 IC_INT J106-7

O3Flow
+V

GND

flow2
SampPress
RcellPress
DGND 7 INT'
J2-13 J1 CN0000183 J106-8

J1-1
J1-2
+5V 8 NGND
J2-14 MINIFIT-6 P8 P?

J107-6
J107-5
J107-4
J107-3
J107-2
J107-1
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3

1
2
3
4
5

1
2

1
2
J2-15 CN0000376 P13 P25 CN0000322

6
5
4
3
2
1
J2-16 CN0000051 ETST J108-1
1 DO0

IZHA
IZHB
IZTA
1
2

IZTB
P1 OTST J108-2

SM+
TV+

SM-
ZS+
TV-

ZS-
2 DO1
PRNG J108-3

GND_TE

IC2-SDA
3 DO2

IC2-RST
IC2-SCL

IC2-GN
03GEN J108-4

V+_TE
A4 4 DO3
J108-5
PCA 04003 PRESSURE/FLOW BOARD 5
J108-6
A7 REACTION CELL 6
A1 J108-7
7 N/A
J108-8
8 N/A
J108-9 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

HTR2A

HTR1A

TSW-A
HTR2B

HTR1B

TSW-B
9 DI0
A12NONOX/AZERO VALVES J108-10
10 DI1
P9 J108-11
11 DI2
P17 OBT- J1-1 P11 J108-12
1 THERMISTER- 12 DI3
J1-10 OBHA J1-2 J1-1 AZ+ J108-13
JGND 10 2 115VHEATER_A VLV1+ 1 13 DI4
J1-9 OBT+ J1-3 J1-2 AZ- J108-14

J1-6
J1-5
J1-4
J1-3
J1-2
J1-1
9 3 THERMISTER+ VLV1- 2 14
J1-8 TH-A OBHB J1-4 J108-15
TH-B
DISP-RET 8 4 115VHEATER_B 15
J1-7 IC_INT J2-1 NN+ J108-16
KYBD_INT 7 VLV2+ 2 16
J1-6 IC_SCL CN0000052 A11 J2-2 NN-
SCL 6 VLV2- 1

6
5
4
3
2
1
J1-5 IC_SDA P5 BYPASS MANIFOLD P?
SDA 5
J1-4 CN0000053 M200EH/EM ONLY P28
P1

P2

EGND 4
J1-3 PMT+ J109-1

RH2A

RH1A
VCC 3 1 AI0

RH2B

RH1B

RTS2
RTS1
J1-2 IC_DGN PMT- J109-2
DGND 2 2 AGND
J1-1 A9 NO2 CONVERTER HVPS J109-3
RTHA

RTHB

+5DISP 1 3 AI1
J109-4
4 AGND
CN0000055 TPMT J109-5
5 AI2
J109-6 ANALOG INPUT A
6 AGND

THERMO+
O2+ J109-7

THERMO-
7 AI3
O2- J109-8

PWR-A
PWR-B
PWR-C
8 AGND
C O2TMP J109-9 C
9 AI4
J109-10
A8 PCA 01669 O3 GENERATOR BOARD 10 AGND
J109-11
11 N/A
J109-12
PCA 04258 KEYBOARD / DISPLAY DRIVER

12 N/A

J1-1
J1-2
J1-3

P1
P2
CN0000374
CN0000181
P26 P29
115VAC A
115VAC B

MTH1
MTG1
MTH2
MTG2
1
2
3
PRS1 J110-1
O3GEN

1
J110-2
+15V
GND

2
PRS2 J110-3

CONV-HEATER-COMMON

V+_TE
AG-FL
V+-FL

GND_TE
PCA 039550200 RELAY BOARD 3
J110-4
4
CN0000219 FLW1 J110-5

IDG
IDV
P27 A10 5
J18-1 J110-6 ANALOG INPUT B

CN0000052
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6

1
2
3
4
1 + 6
J18-2 THCOUPL1 (K TYPE) P10 FLW2 J110-7

CONV-HTR-A
CONV-HTR-B
2 - 7
J110-8

J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J17-4
8

FET1
P4 J13-2 MTH1 J110-9

10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
1
2
3
4
5
6

CN0000053 J19-1 J13-1 MTG1 J110-10

+ 10
J19-2 THCOUPL2 P18 CN0000055 MTH2 J110-11
- 11

J12-10
110V line configuration (K TYPE, BTM) J14-2 MTG2 J110-12

J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J12-6
J12-7
J12-8
J12-9
TH1

TH2
AGND

AGND
12

FET2
CN0000114 P35 J14-1
BRGND JP2-1 CN0000374
1 TS0
BR15V JP2-2 P37 CN0000352
2 NEU0

RELAY JUMPER
JP2-3 THERMIST OUT J3-5 IC2-GN CN0000375 P41
3 TS1 JGND 5
JP2-4 J3-4 IC2-RST RTHA J27-1
4 NEU1 4 1 TH1
A13 O2 SENSOR P14 JP2-5 P23 CN0000055 J3-3 RTHB J27-2

I2C
5 TS2 INT' 3 2 TV+
J1-16 JP2-6 J20-1 IZHA J3-2 IC2-SDA IZTA J27-3

10
FBFAIL 16 6 NEU2 RL3 1 SDA 2 3 TH2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN0000053 P6
J1-15 JP2-7 J20-2 IZHB J3-1 IC2-SCL IZTB J27-4

RELAY B
TP2 15 7 LD0 NEUT 2 SCL 1 4 TV+
J1-14 O2TMP JP2-8 J20-3 OBHA OBT- J27-5
TTMP10 14 8 CMN0 RL4 3 5 TH3

P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
J1-13 JP2-9 J20-4 OBHB J6-10 OBT+ J27-6

P38
TST 13 9 LD1 NEUT 4 10 6 TV+
J1-12 JP2-10 J20-5 J6-9 J27-7
TTMP 12 10 CMN1 5 9 7 TC4
J1-11 JP2-11 J20-6 J6-8 HS+ J27-8

IPG
IPV
RSCCW 11 11 LD2 6 8 8 TH4
J1-10 O2+ JP2-12 J6-7 HS- J27-9

VALVE B
O2OUT+ 10 12 CMN2 7 9 TH5

TV-
TV+
J1-9 O2- J6-6 LS+ J27-10
O2OUT- 9 6 10 TV+
J1-8 J6-5 LS- J27-11

CN0000054
RSCW 8 5 11 TH6

POWER (6 Pls)
J1-7 RH1B CR3 J2-1 J6-4 ZM+ J27-12 THERMISTER INPUTS

10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RSW 7 1 CMN0 4 12 TV+
J1-6 O2VCC RH1A DBLCRIMP P36 J2-2 J6-3 ZM- J27-13
+5V 6 2 LD0 3 13 AGND
J1-5 O2DGND RTS1 J2-3 P22 CN0000055 J6-2 SS+ J27-14
B DGND 5 3 TS0 2 14 AGND B
P19 J1-4 RTS2 J2-4 CN0000055 P20 J6-1 SS-
N/A 4 4 RLY0 1
J2-10 J1-3 RH2A J2-5

10
JGND 10 RZW 3 5 NEU0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J2-9 J1-2 RH2B J2-6 J5-10

RELAY A
9 RZCW 2 6 CMN1
J2-8 IDG J1-1 J2-7 J5-9

SPARE POWER
PP+
DISP-RET 8 RZCCW 1 7 LD1

PP-
J2-7 J2-8 O2DGND J5-8
KYBD_INT 7 8 TS1
J2-6 CN0000376 J2-9 O2VCC J5-7 TRIPLE GAS MANIFOLD
SCL 6 9 RLY1 PCA 04069 MOTHERBOARD
J2-5 J2-10 P12R J5-6 A14
SDA 5 10 NEU1

P12V
P12R
J2-4 J2-11 P12V J5-5

PDG

PAG
P+V
P5V

P-V
EGND 4 11 CMN2
J2-3 IPV J2-12 RELAY J5-4
VCC 3 12 LD2
J2-2 IPG J2-13 J5-3
DGND 2 13 TS2 Relay Power
J2-1 IDV J2-14 J5-2
+5DISP 1 A15 INTERNAL PUMP (not on 200E) 14 RLY2 Connector Pinouts:
J2-15 J5-1 P39

10
15 NEU2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN0000055 J2-16 AC-IN VALVE A CN0000054
16 pin - Signal
P21 CN0000055
CN0000115 HS+ J1-8

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V
1 - DGND 1 VLV4-

V0-

V1-

V2-

V3-
P30 HS- J1-7
2 - +5V 2 VLV4+
SN4 P2 LS+ J1-6

J7-10
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J7-6
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
1 NEUTRAL 3 - AGND 3 VLV3-
DBLCRIMP LS- J1-5
CR4 4 - +15V 4 VLV3+
CN0000010 ZM+ J1-4
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4

J4-1
J4-2
J4-3
J4-4
J4-5
J4-6
J4-7
J4-8
5 - AGND 5 VLV2-
SL4 CN0000055 P24 ZM- J1-3
6 - -15V 6 VLV2+
P31 DBLCRIMP SN4 SS+ J1-2

10
7 - +12RET 7 VLV1-

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SL4 P1 CN0000052P12 P40 CN0000054 SS- J1-1
1 LINE CR8 SN3 8 - +12V 8 VLV1+
1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SL3
9 - EGND F1 CHASSIS FAN
CN0000010
10 - CGND
EG3
SM+

NN+
AZ+
SM-

NN-
ZS+

AZ-
ZS-

P2 P50 P1-1
+V
BRGND
1 1
BR15V P1-2
2 2 -V
CN0000051 CN0000194

LINE CN0000010 P32 P34

1 1
NEU CN0000010 A18
1 2
1 3
SN

A P33 A
DBLCRIMP

EG2 EGND CN0000010

EG1

EG1
SN2
SL2
SN
SL

DBLCRIMP

S1
EG2

POWER SWITCH
CR6

P42 SP1 SL3 POWER ENTRY MODULE

SN2
SL2

A16 PS 31 POWER SUPPLY SINGLE CR5 A17 PS 29 POWER SUPPLY TRIPLE

P44 SPLICE P46 P49
1 CR7 BRAID TO CHASSIS
J2-6 P+V J2-6 DBLCRIMP
1 6 6 +15V
CN0000010? SPLICE J2-5 P-V J2-5 DBLCRIMP CR10
5 5 -15V
P43 CN0000010? P12R J2-4 J1-3 P47 PAG J2-4 J1-3 P48 EG3 CR11
4 +12V RETURN LINE 3 DBLCRIMP 4 AGND LINE 3
P45 SP2 J2-3 J1-2 PDG J2-3 J2-2
1 3 EGND 2 3 DGND EGND 2
SL J2-2 J1-1 J2-2 J1-1 SN3
EGND

1 2 NEUTRAL 1 2 +5V NEUTRAL 1

CN0000010? P12V J2-1 P5V J2-1
1 +12V 1 +5V
CN0000010? AMP-3 AMP-3 CR9
LINE AMP-6 AMP-6? DBLCRIMP
NEU
04504 REV A, M200E INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM, 03-FEB-03
1 2 3 4 5 6
04496A Interconnect Listing, M200E 1 of 2

CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO

Cable Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin
Part #

03649 CBL, AC Power, E-series

AC Line Power Entry CN0000073 L Power Switch SW0000025 L
AC Neutral Power Entry CN0000073 N Power Switch SW0000025 N
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Shield SW0000025
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Chassis 042190000
AC Line Switched Power Switch CN0000073 L Int. Pump/O2 sensor/Spare/ L
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch CN0000073 N Int. Pump/O2 sensor/Spare/ N
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Int. Pump/O2 sensor/Spare/
AC Line Switched Power Switch CN0000073 L PS2 (+12) PS0000031 SK2 3
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch CN0000073 N PS2 (+12) PS0000031 SK2 1
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 PS2 (+12) PS0000031 SK2 2
AC Line Switched Power Switch CN0000073 L PS1 (+5, ±15) PS0000029 SK2 3
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch CN0000073 N PS1 (+5, ±15) PS0000029 SK2 1
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 PS1 (+5, ±15) PS0000029 SK2 2
AC Line Switched Power Switch CN0000073 L Relay Board 039550200 J1 1
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch CN0000073 N Relay Board 039550200 J1 3
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Relay Board 039550200 J1 2

03829 CBL, DC power to motherboard, E-series

DGND Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 1 Motherboard 040690100 P15 1
+5V Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 2 Motherboard 040690100 P15 2
AGND Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 3 Motherboard 040690100 P15 3
+15V Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 4 Motherboard 040690100 P15 4
AGND Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 5 Motherboard 040690100 P15 5
-15V Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 6 Motherboard 040690100 P15 6
+12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 7 Motherboard 040690100 P15 7
+12V Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 8 Motherboard 040690100 P15 8
Egnd Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 9 Motherboard 040690100 P15 9
Chassis Gnd Relay Board 039550200 P14/P7 10 Motherboard 040690100 P15 10

04021 CBL, Preamp, O2 sensor, O3 generator, fan, relay board, motherboard, M200E
DGND Relay Board 039550200 P12 1 Ethernet board 043940000 P102 1
+5V Relay Board 039550200 P12 2 Ethernet board 043940000 P102 2
+15V Relay Board 039550200 P12 3 Ozone generator 040420100 P1 4
AGND Relay Board 039550200 P12 4 Ozone generator 040420100 P1 5
+12V Relay Board 039550200 P12 7 PMT cooling fan 013140000 P1 1
+12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P12 8 PMT cooling fan 013140000 P1 2
O3GEN enable signal Ozone generator 040420100 P1 6 Motherboard 040690100 P108 15
ETEST Motherboard 040690100 P108 8 Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 1
OTEST Motherboard 040690100 P108 16 Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 2
PHYSICAL RANGE Motherboard 040690100 P108 7 Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 4
PMT TEMP Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 5 Motherboard 040690100 P109 4
HVPS Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 6 Motherboard 040690100 P109 5
PMT SIGNAL+ Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 7 Motherboard 040690100 P109 6
AGND Preamplifier board 041800200 P7 S Motherboard 040690100 P109 11
AGND Motherboard 040690100 P109 9 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 9
O2 SIGNAL - Motherboard 040690100 P109 7 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 10
O2 SIGNAL + Motherboard 040690100 P109 1 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1
DGND O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 5 Relay Board 039550200 P5 1
+5V O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 6 Relay Board 039550200 P5 2

04022 CBL, DC Power, fan, keyboard, TEC, sensor board, M200E

TEC +12V TEC board 018390100 P1 1 Relay Board 039550200 P10 7
TEC +12V RET TEC board 018390100 P1 2 Relay Board 039550200 P10 8
DGND Relay Board 039550200 P10 1 Keyboard 042580000 P1 8
+5V Relay Board 039550200 P10 2 Keyboard 042580000 P1 1
DGND Keyboard 042580000 P1 2 Relay Board 039550200 P10 1
+5V Keyboard 042580000 P1 3 Relay Board 039550200 P10 2
TEC +12V Relay Board 039550200 P10 7 Chassis fan 040010000 P1 1
TEC +12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P10 8 Chassis fan 040010000 P1 2
P/Flow Sensor AGND Relay Board 039550200 P10 3 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 3
P/Flow Sensor +15V Relay Board 039550200 P10 4 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 6
Pressure signal 1 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 2 Motherboard 040690100 P110 6
Pressure signal 2 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 4 Motherboard 040690100 P110 5
Flow signal P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 1 Motherboard 040690100 P110 3
Shield P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 Motherboard 040690100 P110 12
Shield Motherboard 040690100 P110 9 Relay Board 039550200 P17
Thermocouple signal 1 Motherboard 040690100 P110 2 Relay Board 039550200 P17 1
TC 1 signal DGND Motherboard 040690100 P110 8 Relay Board 039550200 P17 2
Thermocouple signal 2 Motherboard 040690100 P110 1 Relay Board 039550200 P17 3
TC 2 signal DGND Motherboard 040690100 P110 7 Relay Board 039550200 P17 4

04023 CBL, I2C, relay board to motherboard, E-series

I2C Serial Clock Motherboard 040690100 P107 3 Relay Board 039550200 P3 1
I2C Serial Data Motherboard 040690100 P107 5 Relay Board 039550200 P3 2
I2C Reset Motherboard 040690100 P107 2 Relay Board 039550200 P3 4
I2C Shield Motherboard 040690100 P107 6 Relay Board 039550200 P3 5

04024 CBL, Nox, zero/span, IZS valves, M200E

Zero/Span valve +12V Relay Board 039550200 P4 1 Zero/Span valve VA0000007 P1 1
Zero/Span valve +12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P4 2 Zero/Span valve VA0000007 P1 2
Sample valve +12V Relay Board 039550200 P4 3 Sample valve VA0000007 P1 1
Sample valve +12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P4 4 Sample valve VA0000007 P1 2
AutoZero valve +12V Relay Board 039550200 P4 5 AutoZero valve VA0000007 P1 1
AutoZero valve +12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P4 6 AutoZero valve VA0000007 P1 2
NONOx valve +12V Relay Board 039550200 P4 7 NONOx valve VA0000007 P1 1
NONOx valve +12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P4 8 NONOx valve VA0000007 P1 2

04406, Revision A Page 1 of 2

04496A Interconnect Listing, M200E 2 of 2

CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO

Cable Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin
Part #

04026 CBL, IZS & O2 sensor heaters/thermistors; reaction cell & manifold thermistors, M200E
Rcell thermistor A Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 1 Motherboard 040690100 P27 7
Rcell thermistor B Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 2 Motherboard 040690100 P27 14
IZS thermistor A Motherboard 040690100 P27 6 IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 1
IZS thermistor B Motherboard 040690100 P27 13 IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 2
IZS heater L IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 4 Relay Board 039550200 P20 1
IZS heater N IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 5 Relay Board 039550200 P20 2
Shield IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 Relay Board 039550200 P20 5
O2 sensor heater Relay Board 039550200 P20 3 O2 sensor therm./heater 044530000 P1 4
O2 sensor heater Relay Board 039550200 P20 4 O2 sensor therm./heater 044530000 P1 2
Shield Relay Board 039550200 P20 6 O2 sensor therm./heater 044530000 P1
O2 sensor thermistor A O2 sensor therm./heater 044530000 P1 3 Motherboard 040690100 P27 4
O2 sensor thermistor B O2 sensor therm./heater 044530000 P1 1 Motherboard 040690100 P27 11
Byp/dil. man. thermistor A Motherboard 040690100 P27 1 Manifold thermistor 044540000 P1 1
Byp/dil. man. thermistor B Motherboard 040690100 P27 8 Manifold thermistor 044540000 P1 2

04027 CBL, NO2 converter, reaction cell & manifold heaters, M200E
Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 1 Relay Board 039550200 P2 11
Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 2 Relay Board 039550200 P2 12
Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Relay Board 039550200 P2 11 Manifold heater 2 044340000 P1 1
Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Relay Board 039550200 P2 15 Manifold heater 2 044340000 P1 2
Moly heater A Relay Board 039550200 P2 11 Moly heater A 039700100 P1 1
Moly heater C Relay Board 039550200 P2 15 Moly heater C 039700100 P1 2
Moly heater B Relay Board 039550200 P2 11 Moly heater B 039700100 P1 3
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board 039550200 P2 13 Relay Board 039550200 P2 14
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board 039550200 P2 8 Relay Board 039550200 P2 9
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 039550200 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 1B 040400000 P1 4
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 039550200 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 2B 040400000 P1 6
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 039550200 P2 2 Reaction cell heater 1A 040400000 P1 3
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 039550200 P2 3 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 P1 1
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 039550200 P2 4 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 P1 2
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 039550200 P2 5 Reaction cell heater 2A 040400000 P1 5

04105 CBL, Keyboard, display to motherboard, E-series

Kbd Interrupt Keyboard 037950000 J2 7 Motherboard 040690100 J106 1
DGND Keyboard 037950000 J2 2 Motherboard 040690100 J106 8
SDA Keyboard 037950000 J2 5 Motherboard 040690100 J106 2
SCL Keyboard 037950000 J2 6 Motherboard 040690100 J106 6
Shld Keyboard 037950000 J2 10 Motherboard 040690100 J106 5

04176 CBL, DC power to relay board, E-series

DGND Relay Board 039550200 P8 1 Power Supply Triple PS0000029 J1 3
+5V Relay Board 039550200 P8 2 Power Supply Triple PS0000029 J1 1
+15V Relay Board 039550200 P8 4 Power Supply Triple PS0000029 J1 6
AGND Relay Board 039550200 P8 5 Power Supply Triple PS0000029 J1 4
-15V Relay Board 039550200 P8 6 Power Supply Triple PS0000029 J1 5
+12V RET Relay Board 039550200 P8 7 Power Supply Single PS0000031 J1 3
+12V Relay Board 039550200 P8 8 Power Supply Single PS0000031 J1 1

04211 CBL, Serial data, motherboard to CPU, E-series

RXD(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 3 Motherboard 040690100 J12 14
RTS(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 4 Motherboard 040690100 J12 13
TXD(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 5 Motherboard 040690100 J12 12
CTS(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 6 Motherboard 040690100 J12 11
GND(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 9 Motherboard 040690100 J12 10
RXD(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 3 Motherboard 040690100 J12 9
RTS(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 4 Motherboard 040690100 J12 8
TXD(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 5 Motherboard 040690100 J12 7
CTS(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 6 Motherboard 040690100 J12 6
GND(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 9 Motherboard 040690100 J12 5
NET+ CPU board CP0000026 CN5 2 Motherboard 040690100 J12 7
NET- CPU board CP0000026 CN5 4 Motherboard 040690100 J12 6
GND CPU board CP0000026 CN5 6 Motherboard 040690100 J12 5
Shield CPU board CP0000026 CN5 Motherboard 040690100 J12 2

04339 CBL, CPU to Ethernet (optional), E-series

Ethernet DCD CPU board CP0000026 CN4 1 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 6
Ethernet DSR CPU board CP0000026 CN4 2 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 4
Ethernet RXD CPU board CP0000026 CN4 3 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 3
Ethernet RTS CPU board CP0000026 CN4 4 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 10
Ethernet TXD CPU board CP0000026 CN4 5 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 8
Ethernet CTS CPU board CP0000026 CN4 6 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 5
Ethernet DTR CPU board CP0000026 CN4 7 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 9
Ethernet GND CPU board CP0000026 CN4 8 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 16
Ground CPU board CP0000026 CN4 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 2

04433 CBL, preamplifier to relay board, M200E

Preamplifier DGND Relay Board 039550200 P9 1 Preamplifier board 041800200 P6 3
Preamplifier +5V Relay Board 039550200 P9 2 Preamplifier board 041800200 P6 2
Preamplifier AGND Relay Board 039550200 P9 3 Preamplifier board 041800200 P6 1
Preamplifier +15V Relay Board 039550200 P9 4 Preamplifier board 041800200 P6 4
Preamplifier -15V Relay Board 039550200 P9 6 Preamplifier board 041800200 P6 6

04437 CBL, preamplifier to TEC, M200E

Preamp TEC drive VREF Preamplifier board 041800200 J2 1 TEC board 018390100 J3 1
Preamp TEC drive CTRL Preamplifier board 041800200 J2 2 TEC board 018390100 J3 2
Preamp TEC drive AGND Preamplifier board 041800200 J2 3 TEC board 018390100 J3 3

04406, Revision A Page 2 of 2

 1 2 3 4 5 6

V
E
R
S
IO
A
N
T
B
E
L
016680000 - CE MARK VERSION
STD PROD. VERSION UP TO 10/99
016680100 - NON CE MARK (OBSOLETE)
+15V +15V 016680200 - SUB PS 17 SWITCHER FOR LINEAR SUPPLY
+15V DELETE COMPONENTS
T1, D1, D2, C9, C11, PTC1, PTC2, U2
D ADD COMPONENTS D
PS1
016680300 - LOW OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ
REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER
+15V
REPLACE R4 WITH RS297 127KOHM
016680400 - HI OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ
REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER
REPLACE R4 WITH RS13 11 KOHM
+

1
2
3
4
10 15
SD VIN
16 13
VREF C_B
2 12 +
INV+ C_A
9 14
COMP E_B
6 11
RT E_A
7 3
CT OSC
1 5
INV- -SEN
4 8
+SEN GND
C C

6
+
5
4
3
2
1

+15V

1 8 1 3
IN OUT

GND
2 7
3 6 +

2
B B
4 5

The information herein is the APPROVA LS DATE G

E
N
O
Z
N
_
A property of API and is A
submitted in strictest con- DRAWN
fidence for reference only. DRIVER
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is CH ECKED SIZ E D R A W ING NO. REVISION
prohibited. This document or B 01669 F
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD. SH EET
without proper authorization. 12-Oct-1999 1 of 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

D D

1
2
+15 +15

7
+15

2 2
5 5
1 1

+15

6
+15
1
2

C 1 2 C
5
7 +15 +15
6
4

10

10
3 4 2
1 1 2 3 4 12 12
3
5 6 3 8 5 67 8 8
2
8

11 11
1
9
11

9
1
10
7

32
8

B B
13

4
14
12
67

+15 +15 +15 +15

+ +
5

The information herein is the APPROVALS DATE H

T
E
R
M
O
EL
E
C
T
A property of API and is A
submitted in strictest con- DRAW N
fidence for reference only. COOLER_CONTROL
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is CH ECKED SIZ E DRAW ING NO. REVISION
prohibited. This document or B 01840 B
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD. SH EET
without proper authorization. 14-Jul-1999 1 of 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

D D

ISO_+15V
C6 +12V U3

ISO_-15V
15 16 ISO_+15V
VREF +V
C4 12 1
SENSE SR
0.1 1000PF 11

9
U4 VRADJ
13
SSENSE
4 14
VIN(10) GATEDRV Q1

4
TESTPOINT
+VS1 TP1 U2 7 MOSFETP
TESTPOINT +VS2 OFFADJ
2 3 6
TP2 VREFIN OFFADJ
6 5 8
VIN(5V) SPAN
3 10
VOUT R1 R2 OPA277 4MA
15 VIN 7 2 9 IOUT+
D1 GND 16MA
4.75K 9.76K
1N914
XTR110

7
1

8
GND C5
TP6 220PF
J1
IOUT-
IOUT- VIN-
1 2
C IOUT+
3 4
VIN+ C

ISO_+15V
5 6 -VS1 GND1 -VS2
GND2 ISO124
7 8 C7

2
16

10
8
HEADER 4X2
+12V -12V
+15V
0.1 -12V

ISO_-15V
+15V

U1
C1 1 14
0.47 VS SIN
ISO+15 2
0V
TP3

ISO_+15V 5
0V
ISO_GND 6
+VOUT
B TP5 C2 7 8 B
-VOUT SOUT
ISO_GND 0.47
DCP010515
C3
0.47
ISO_-15V

VIN- JP1
TP4
ISO-15 JUMPER2

Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.

Date Rev. Change Description Engineer
The information herein is the APPROVALS DATE PCA 03631, Isolated 0-20ma, E Series
A 8/9/00 A INITIAL RELEASE (FROM 03039) KL property of API and is A
submitted in strictest con- DRAWN
fidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is CHECKED SIZE DRAWING NO. REVISION
prohibited. This document or B
any information contained
03632 A
in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD. SHEET
without proper authorization. 19-Jul-2002 1 of 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6
General Trace Width Requirements
1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil
2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils
J1 3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils
1 AC_Line 4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil isolation/creepage distance
2 AC_Neutral around them
3 5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.
4 6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.
D 4 PIN RELAY0 D
VCC RELAY1
RN1
R1 R2 330
2.2K 2.2K RELAY0 RELAY1 RELAY2
JP2
K1 K2 K3 Heater Config Jumper J2 16 PIN
1 2 1 2 1 2 RELAY2 COMMON0 1
LOAD0

10
11
12
2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
JP1 I2C_Vcc TS0 RELAY0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I2C_Vcc 3 4 3 4 3 4 RELAY0 3
1 2 +- +- +- 4
3 4 TS0 COMMON1 5
5 6 TS1 LOAD1 6
7 8 SLD-RLY SLD-RLY SLD-RLY 7
TS2 TS1 8 RELAY1
HEADER 4X2 RELAY1 9
10

A
COMMON2 11
I2C_Vcc D1 LOAD2 12
WDOG D2 D3 D4 D7 D8 D9 D10 AC_Neutral TS2 RELAY2
24

13

KA
RED RELAY2
U1 14
C1 YEL YEL YEL GRN GRN GRN GRN 15
16
Vdd

C 0.1 21 4 RL0 RL1 RL2 VA0 VA1 VA2 VA3 C

K
2 A0 P00 5
3 A1 P01 6
1 A2 P02 7
J3 INT P03 8 IO3
22 P04 9 IO4
1 23 SCL P05 10 U2A
2 SDA P06 11
3 P07 13 1 2
4 P10 14
5 P11 15 IO10
CON5 P12 16 IO11 SN74HC04
P13 17 IO12
P14 18 IO13 VCC U2B
P15 19 IO14 Q1 VCC
P16 20 IO15 3 4
P17
Vss

11
R3 +12V J4
PCF8575 20K R5 U5
10K 16 1 1 VALVE0
12

IN 4 OUT4 2

VCC
U4 IRF7205 I2C_Vcc U2C 15 IN 3 K 2 3
14 ENABLE OUT 3 3 4 VALVE1
5 6 10 IN 2 OUT 2 6 5
B VCC 1 VBATT RESET 16 9 IN 1 K 7 6 VALVE2 B

GND
GND
GND
GND
2 VOUT RESET' 15 OUT 1 8 7
3 VCC WDO' 14 JP4 8 VALVE3
4 GND CD IN' 13 1 U2D
5 12 C3 R6 UDN2540B(16)
6 BATT_ONCD OUT' 11 1 2 10K 9 8 8 PIN

13
12
5
4
7 LOW LINE' WDI 10 3 VLV_ENAB
8 OSC IN PFO' 9
OSC SEL PFI
K

WTCDG OVR
U2E
1

1
+
JP3 R4 C5
AK

MAX693 D17 1M + C4 10/16 11 10 +

1 2
2 1

2 1
C2 RLS4148 10/16 C6
HEADER 1X2 0.001 2000/25
A

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 VCC

2

2
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12RT +12V

14
1

1
DC PWR IN KEYBRD MTHR BRD SYNC DEMOD SPARE U2F REV AUTH DATE
J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 B CAC 10/3/02 CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX
1 DGND 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 VCC 2 2 2 2 2 2 13 12
3 AGND 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 +15V 4 4 4 4 4 4
A 5 AGND 5 5 5 5 5 5 A
-15V 6 6 6 6 6 6
7

6 +12RET 7 7 7 7 7 7
7 Title
8 +12V 8 8 8 8 8 8 M100E/M200E Relay PCB SCHEMATIC
9 EGND 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 CHS_GND 10 10 10 10 10 10 Size Number Revision
03956 B
CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH B
CON10THROUGH Date: 13-Jan-2003 Sheet1 of 3
APPLIES TO PCB 03954
File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\03956B.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
Te
T Te
T
 1 2 3 4 5 6

R7
+15V
2.55K VDD_TC

ZR1 C15
C7
D +15V 0.1 D
0.1 5.6V

A
J15 C16 ZR3

KA
0.1

7
8

8
- 2 LTC1050 R21 10V
U8 U7A 20k
+ 1 3 3 J17
6 1 1

K
TYPE J 2 2 2
J TC Connector 3
OPA2277 -15V 4

4
1
5

4
J18 MICROFIT-4

CW
- R15
2 R11
11K C17
+ 1

CW
R9 249K

CW
R19

CCW
TYPE k JP5 W W 1
K TC Connector 1K R13
1 2
332K R17 10K
JUMPER
C8 5K

CCW
0.1
C C

K
VEE_TC ZR2 C9

AK
5.6V 0.1

A
R8
2.55K
VDD_TC

C10
0.1

A
-15V
ZR4

KA
7
8

LTC1050
U9 U7B 20k 10V
B 3 5 B
6 7 R22

K
2 6
J16 OPA2277
-
4
1
5

2
+ 1 R16
R12
11K

CW
TYPE J
2

249K C20
J TC Connector U10 R10 1 uF
3 JP6 R18 R20
TOUT
Vin

1K R14 10K
1 2
676K
J 8 JUMPER 5K
C14 7
0.1 K
R- 5 C11
Gnd

LT1025 0.1 C12

0.1
4

A A
VEE_TC
Title
TYPE K 100E/200E/400E RELAY PCB SCHEMATIC
J19
- 2 Size Number Revision
03956 B
+ 1 B
K TC Connector Date: 13-Jan-2003 Sheet3 of 3
File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\03956B.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
Te Te
 1 2 3 4 5 6

AC_Line
J20
RELAY3 1
RN2 RELAY4 2 Aux Relay Connector
D 3 D
330 4
5
6
RELAY3 RELAY4 MOLEX6

1 K4 K5

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 2 1 2 AC_Neutral
I2C_Vcc
I2C_Vcc 3 +- 4 3 +- 4

SLD-RLY SLD-RLY

A
D5 D6 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
YEL YEL GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN

KA
RL3 RL4 VA4 VA5 VA6 VA7 TR0 TR1
C C

K
IO3
IO4
IO10 VCC
IO11
IO12 U3A +12V

11
J6
IO13 1 2 U6 1
16 IN 4 OUT4 1 2 Valve4

VCC
15 IN 3 K 2 3
SN74HC04 VLV_ENAB 14 ENABLE OUT 3 3 4 Valve5
10 IN 2 OUT 2 6 5
U3D 9 7 Valve6
IN 1 K 6

GND
GND
GND
GND
OUT 1 8 7
9 8 8 Valve7
9
UDN2540B(16) 10

13
12
5
4
U3B
U3E CON10
IO14 3 4
11 10
B B
VCC U3C
14

U3F 5 6
IO15 13 12
J13
+12V 1
C13 2
7

0.1 MINIFIT-2

Q2
IRL3303
Use 50 mil traces
J14
+12V 1
2
MINIFIT-2

A Q3 A
IRL3303
Title
100E/200E/400E RELAY PCB SCHEMATIC
Use 40 mil traces
Size Number Revision
03956 B
+12RET B
Date: 13-Jan-2003 Sheet2 of 3
File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\03956B.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
Te
T Te
T
 1 2 3 4 5 6
U2
74HC154 U6A
J101A 23 1 1 1
A Y0 DIGIO0 OC
PC104 22 2 3 11
B Y1 CLK
32 21 3 DIGIO1 IOW 2 J108
GND C Y2
31 A0 20 4 D0 9 12 DO0 DI6
A0 D Y3 DIGIO2 D1 Q1 1
30 A1 5 74HC32 D1 8 13 DO1 DI4
A1 Y4 DIGIO3 D2 Q2 2
29 A2 6 D2 7 14 DO2 DI2
A2 Y5 DIGIO4 D3 Q3 3
28 A3 7 D3 6 15 DO3 DI0
A3 Y6 TEMP D4 Q4 4
27 A4 8 D4 5 16 DO4 DO6
A4 Y7 DACV D5 Q5 5
26 A5 VCC 9 D5 4 17 DO5 DO4
A5 Y8 WRDAC D6 Q6 6
25 A6 10 D6 3 18 DO6 DO2
D A6 TP44 Y9 VFPROG D7 Q7 7 D
J102 24 A7 11 D7 2 19 DO7 DO0
A7 Y10 CHGAIN D8 Q8 8

10
23 A8 13 TP2 DI0 DI7

5
1 A8 Y11 VFREAD 9
22 A9 14 0X32C U7 74HC574 U8 DI1 DI5
2 A9 Y12 10
21 A10 15 74HC541 DI2 DI3

C
3 A10 Y13 11

1
20 A11 VCC C38 18 16 1 RN16 DI3 DI1
4 A11 G1 Y14 G1 12

1
19 A12 19 17 0X32F IOR 19 47Kx8 DI4 DO7
5 A12 0.15 uF, ceramic G2 Y15 G2 13
18 A13 DI5 DO5
6 A13 14
17 A14 VCC D0 18 2 DI6 DO3
7 A14 Y1 A1 15

1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
16 A15 D1 17 3 DI7 DO1

0X32E
0X32D
8 A15 Y2 A2 16
15 R59 U1 ENAB2 U4B 74HC74 D2 16 4
9 A16 Y3 A3
14 47k, 5% 74HC688 10 9 D3 15 5 MICROFIT-16
10 A17 PRE Q Y4 A4
13 11 D4 14 6
11 A18 CLK Y5 A5
12 20 D0 12 8 D5 13 7
12 A19 VCC D Q Y6 A6
11 AEN 3 13 D6 12 8
13 AEN B0 CLR Y7 A7
10 18 D7 11 9
14 IOCHRDY B7 Y8 A8
9 D0 5 U51D
15 D0 B1
8 D1 16 19 12
16 D1 B6 P=Q I2C_RESET DS5
7 D2 7 U4A 11 VCC

1
17 D2 B2 ADDR=0x360 (DEFAULT) TC1 R24
6 D3 14 4 5 13 1 2
18 D3 B5 PRE Q
5 D4 9 ADDR = 0x320 (JP1 INSTALLED) 3 2.2K, 5%
19 D4 B3 CLK
4 D5 12 D1 2 6 74HC08 TP56
20 D5 B4 D Q VCC
3 D6 2 1 VCC LED, RED, smt 1206
21 D6 A0 CLR
2 D7 17 Pins 1&2 shorted on PCA R4

6
22 D7 A7
1 4 JP7 74HC74 X3 1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic C39 2.2K, 5%
23 IOCHECK A1
C 15 AEN 1 C
24 A6 1 I2C_DRV_RST R3
6 1 JITO-2-DC5F-10OHM J107
25 A2 EN 2
13 IOEN 4 2.2K, 5% DGND
26 A5 3 1
8 R38 SDA
27 A3 2
11 HEADER3-DEFAULTED-1 IOW 1 2.2K, 5% U10 VCC
28 A4 3
10 3 U51B PCF8584 SCL
29 GND 4

3
R25 2 4 SYSCLK 1 I2C_RESET
30 CLK 5
NOT INSTALLED 6 4
31 D[0..7] IACK 6
JP1 5 INT 5 20
32 74HC32 INT VCC
2 1 A0 6 INLINE-6
33 U50A A0
74HC08 19 J106
34 RESET
IDC-HEADER KBINT
35 1
17 SDA
36 CS 2
U50B U5A IOR 16 3
37 I2C_DRV_RST RD SCL VCC 3
A12 4 U50C 74HC74 IOW 18
38 WR 4
6 9 4 5 2
39 PRE Q SDA 5
A13 5 8 3 D0 7 SCL
40 CLK DB0 6
10 2 6 D1 8
D Q DB1 7
PC104CD 64 74HC08 1 D2 9 DGND
GND CLR DB2 8
63 74HC08 U6C D3 11
GND DB3
J101B 62 U50D 9 D4 12 MICROFIT-8
OSC DB4
PC104 61 A14 12 8 VCC D5 13
+5V VCC DB5 JP6
60 11 10 D6 14 10 2 1
BALE DB6 VSS
59 A15 13 D7 15 IDC-HEADER
TC DB7
58 74HC32 47k, 5%
B DACK2 U39 B
57 74HC08 U3
IRQ3 R5
56 LTC699CS8

1
2
IRQ4 JP2
55 1 2 4 2 INT
IRQ5
54
IRQ6 shorted - sldr side

VCC
VCC
53
IRQ7 C3
52 1 2 74AHC1GU04
SYSCLK
51 6 7
REFRESH JP3 IDC-HEADER WDI RESET
50 0.15 uF, ceramic
DRQ1 I2C_RESET
49

GND
GND
GND
DACK1
48
DRQ3 SHDN
47
DACK3
46 IOR
IOR IOR SHDN
45 IOW
IOW IOW

3
4
8
44 U5B
SMEMR
43 U51A 10 9
SMEMW PRE Q
42 1 U6D 11
(KEY) CLK
IRQ12 41 3 IOEN 12 12 8 SHDAC
+12V +12V D Q SHDAC
IRQ10 40 2 11 13
ENDXFR CLR
shorted - sldr side

JP5 39 13
2

JP4 -12V
38 74HC08 74HC74
DRQ2
37 74HC32
-5V
36
IRQ9
35 R61
+5V
34
RESETDRV 47k, 5%
33
GND
1

A A
KBINT
Title
Notes:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000
IDC-HEADER
1) This schematic is for PCA #04069
Size Number Revision
2) This schematic is for PCB 04068
04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 1of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6
J1010
DB9 FEMALE

Com2 - RS232-B/RS485
1
RX1
2
TX1
3
4
RS-GND1
5
6
RTS1
7
CTS1
8

1
2
3
4
D DS1 DS2 9 D
2 1 1 2 TV1

1
2
3
4
TV ARRAY
SMDA15LCC

2
LED, RED, smt 1206 LED, GRN, smt 1206

8
7
6
5
R111
TX for Com1 RX for Com1
-15V

1 2

8
7
6
5
R11 R12 10k, 1%
4.9K, 5% 4.9K, 5%
J1013

1
J12 DCE side of switch is side towards pin 1, 1 1
NC
RX0 2 2
1 RXD

Com1 - RS232-A
RTS0 3 3
2 TXD
TX0 4
3 NC
CTS0 4 5
4 GND
RS-GND0 5 6
5 NC
RX1 6 7
6 RTS
RTS1 8
7 CTS
TX1 7 9
8 NC
CTS1 8

1
2
3
4
9
RS-GND1 9 DB9M
10
DTE
11

1
2
3
4
TV ARRAY 10
12
11
13

8
7
6
5
C 12 C
14 VCC
TV2
SMDA15LCC

8
7
6
5
INLINE-12 R1 R2 R13 R14 SW1001
2.2K, 5%VCC
2.2K, 5% SW PUSHBUTTON-4PDT
NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED
R10
DS4 DS3
2 1 1 2 NOT INSTALLED

LED, GRN, smt 1206 LED, RED, smt 1206

TX for Com2 RX for Com2

1
MT6 MT7 MT8 MT9

MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE

1
TP13 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17 TP18
B VCC +12V +12VRET +15V -15V B
MT1 MT2 MT3 MT4 MT5
1

MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE

J15
8
+12V
AUX DC POWER IN 7
+12RET
1
DGND
4
+15V
6 VCC
-15V
3 U51C
AGND
2 9
+5V
5 8
AGND
9 10 10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
EGND
10 C1 + + C2
CHASGND
74HC08
MOLEX-10 10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM

A A

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000

Size Number Revision

04069 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 2of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6
C6 ISOLATED 0-20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS ANALOG VOLTAGE & CURRENT OUTPUTS
+15V
TP21
-15V +15V 10000 pF C7 C15 C20
0.15 uF, ceramic J19 C21 10000 pF 10000 pF 10000 pF
U29A
2 1

8
2 1 FE BEAD

1
DAC RANGE & OFFSET PROGRAM 4 3 L1
4 3
40K 3 + OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL 6 5 L2
6 5
R15 1 8 7 L3
8 7 L4
2 -
VREF J1020
IDC-8

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1
1
D C4 C5 C13 C19 0 D
R63 J21 TV3 TV4 2
0G

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1
10k, 1% 2 1 TV ARRAY TV ARRAY 10000 pF 10000 pF 10000 pF 10000 pF 3
2 1 1
C8 4 3 SMDA15LCC 4
TC2 4 3 1G

5
6
7
8

5
6
7
8
C53 6 5 L5 5
-15V 6 5 2
8 7 L6 6
8 7 2G
U20B 0.15 uF, ceramic U29B 0.15 uF, ceramic L7 7
3

5
6
7
8

5
6
7
8
4 IDC-8 SMDA15LCC 8

8
DACV L15
DACV 3G
6 U30
IOW 5 74HC574 5 + J23 FE BEAD TERMBLOCK-8
IOW
1 7 2 1 J22
OC 2 1
74HC32 11 6 - 4 3 1
CLK 4 3 1
6 5 DAC3V 2
6 5 2
D0 2 19 CSDACA 8 7 3
D1 Q1 CSDACA 8 7 3
D1 3 18 CSRANGE1 4
D2 Q2 4

4
D2 4 17 CSDACB OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL IDC-8 5
D3 Q3 CSDACB 5
D3 5 16 CSRANGE2 6
D4 Q4 6
D4 6 15 7
D5 Q5 DAC0 7
U20C D5 7 14 8
D6 Q6 DAC1 8
9 D6 8 13 9
D7 Q7 DAC2 9
8 CLK D7 9 12 10
D8 Q8 DAC3 10
10
WRDAC
MICROFIT-10 0.15 uF, ceramic
74HC32
+15V 0.15 uF, ceramic C9
C C10 C
D[0..7] +15V
U36A
TP26

4
U35A
TP27

4
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
3 +
3 + 1
1

1 2 -

1
2 - DAC0V R16
DAC0V
DUAL DAC A1 DUAL DAC A2 DAC 2
U31 U32 U33 U34

11
4 5 23 22 R17 4 5 23 22 18.7K
DOUT VOA A1 W1 DOUT VOA A1 W1

11
CSDACA 3 6 24 CSDACB 3 6 24
CS GND B1 CS GND B1 DAC2V
D0 2 7 21 TP28 D0 2 7 21 TP29
DIN VCC AGND1 DIN VCC AGND1
CLK 1 8 18.7K CLK 1 8
CLK VOB CLK VOB -15V
R18
SOCKET U31
DAC, 12 BIT 11 DAC, 12 BIT 11 U36B +15V 10k, 1%
CS CS
1

1
12 R19 12 C11

4
D0 D0
SDI SOCKET U33 SDI
CLK 14 U35B +15V CLK 14
CLK CLK 0.15 uF, ceramic
13 10k, 1% C12 13 5 +
4

SDO SDO
7
4 5 + -15V 0.15 uF, ceramic 4 6 -
W2 W2
2 7 2
B2 B2
3 1 6 - 3 1
A2 AGND2 A2 AGND2
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

11
15 15 -15V OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
B RS RS B
10 SHDAC 10 OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
SHDAC SHDN SHDN
11

-15V U36C +15V

16 16

4
VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC
C14 C16 0.15 uF, ceramic 10 +
9 0.15 uF, ceramic C17 9 8
DGND DGND DAC3V
+15V R20 9 -
C18 U35C 0.15 uF, ceramic
DAC1 DAC3
4

0.15 uF, ceramic 18.7K

OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

11
19 18 10 + 19 18 -15V
A3 W3 A3 W3
20 8 DAC1V 20
B3 DAC1V B3
17 TP32 9 - 17 TP33 R21
AGND3 AGND3
R22 U36D +15V 10k, 1%

4
1

1
11

8 18.7K -15V 8 12 +
W4 W4
6 6 14
B4 B4
7 5 7 5 13 -
A4 AGND4 A4 AGND4
R23
U35D +15V 10k, 1%
POT, DIGITAL POT, DIGITAL
4

11
-15V
12 + OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
14
A 13 - A

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000
11

-15V
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD Size Number Revision
04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 3 of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

10
5
+15V
RN14 +15V

C
100Kx8 -15V +15V R43 100

10
J109 ANALOG INPUTS

5
CH7 C55
1 RN15
CH6 C40 C41

C
D 2 D
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
CH4 100Kx8 0.15 uF, ceramic 0.15 uF, ceramic +
3
CH3 10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
4
CH2

7
5 U52
CH1
6 R45 induces an

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
CH1 19 28 3 + OP-AMP, PRECISION
7 IN 1 OUT offset in analog
CH2 20 C42 6
8 IN 2 TC7 signal to give a
CH3 21 1 0.15 uF, ceramic 2 - 1M, 1%, 1206 CHIP
9 IN 3 +VSS 'live 0' for sensors
CH4 22 R45
10 IN 4 with 0 or slightly
23 27 U53
11 IN 5 -VSS negative output
CH6 24 C43 -15V VCC
12 IN 6

20
19
CH7 25 12 0.15 uF, ceramic

3
2
1
IN 7 GND
MICROFIT-12 CH8 26 C44 U54
IN 8
CH9 11 13
IN 9 VREF

+VS

REF
NC

NC

NC
10 2 C45
IN 10 NC
CH11 9 3 C46 .022 uF, 50V 4 18 +
IN 11 NC OP OUT COMP+
CH12 8 18 0.15 uF, ceramic 5 17 10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
IN 12 ENB VCC OP- COMP-
CH13 7 14 U55 VCC 6 16 R46
IN 13 A3 OP+ AGND
J110 CH14 6 15 DG444DY 7 15 1.1K, 5%
IN 14 A2 5VI GND
5 16 3 2 8 14

OPT10V
IN 15 A1 S1 D1 10VI FOUT
CH14 4 17 14 15 100 R47
1 IN 16 A0 S2 D2

CLK
COS
-VS
CH13 11 10 VCC

8VI
2 S3 D3 PLACE C54 AS
CH12 6 7
3 TP3 S4 D4 CLOSE AS
CH11 1 1 12 R48 200
4 IN1 VCC POSSIBLE TO
CH9 AGND AN MUX +15V 16 4 V/F CONVERTER
5 IN2 -VS X1. LEADS AS

10
11
12
13
9
C CH8 9 5 X2 C54 C
6 IN3 GND SHORT AS
8 13 JITO-2-DCA5AE-4.8MHZ
7 IN4 +VS POSSIBLE
C47 U56 0.15 uF, ceramic
8 (BYPASS CAP)
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic C48

6
9
8 1

8
10 NC NC
7 2 +15V C49 1
11 NC VIN
6 3 TP48 1 X1
12 VOUT NR R47 and R48 reduce the gain PLACE 100
5 4 1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic -15V 0.15 uF, ceramic 4 MB100H-4.8MHZ
TRIM GND for analog inputs by 1%, so OHM
R49 5
that we can read slightly RESISTOR AS
MICROFIT-12 100
TEMPMUX TP1 above full scale, to prevent CLOS AS

1
1 VOLTAGE REF
overflow of ADC reading POSSIBLE TO

3
VREF -15V
X1 AND X2

4
VREF
D6 100
RN17 VCC D2 R9
100Kx8
DACMUX TC6 10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
TP49 1 10 C50 TP57

44
43
42
41
40
2 5
+

6
5
4
3
2
1
U58 3
74HC574 4
1

1
DB2
DB6

ICLK
RDLS

VFCLK
GND
GND
GND
GND

GND
GND
1 6
SHDN OE TC8
11 7
CLK
8 D4 7 39
DB4 GND
D0 2 19 9 VCC 8 38
B D1 Q1 C RDMBYTE GND B
D1 3 18 D3 9 37 VCC
D2 Q2 DB3 GND
D2 4 17 10 36
D3 Q3 GND GND
D3 5 16 11 U57 35
D4 Q4 GND FREQ
U59A D4 6 15 C51 12 34
D5 Q5 VCC VCC
1 D5 7 14 0.15 uF, ceramic 13 33
CHGAIN D6 Q6 GND GND
3 D6 8 13 14 32
D7 Q7 GND GND
2 D7 9 12 SEL60 D0 15 Quicklogic CPLD 31
IOW D8 Q8 DB0 GND
D5 16 30 SEL60 C52
DB5 SEL60 0.15 uF, ceramic
74HC32 D7 17 29
DB7 GND

RDMSB

START
RESET

READ
GND
GND
D[0..7]

DB1
IOR

SA
SB
SC
TP50 U60 TP51 TP52 TP53 TP54 TP55

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
U59B 74HC574
4 1
VFPROG OE
6 11 D1
CLK
1

1
IOW 5
IOR
D0 2 19 SA
D1 Q1
74HC32 D1 3 18 SB
D2 Q2 VFREAD
D2 4 17 SC
D3 Q3
D3 5 16 START
D4 Q4
D4 6 15 RESET
D5 Q5
D5 7 14 MSB
A D6 Q6 A
D6 8 13 MID
D7 Q7
D7 9 12 LSB
D8 Q8
Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000

Size Number Revision

04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 4 of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

+15V +5VANA
U23
1 5
BYPASS CAPS IN OUT
3 4

GND
MUST BE WITHIN ON/OFF NC
1/2" OF THE
+ C60
REGULATOR 10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
LP2981IM5
D INPUT/OUTPUT D
PINS

2
C29
1 uF

D[0..7]

+5VANA
VCC +15V XT1
U48 J27
MAX382CWN
1
9 THERMISTER
TEMPMUX OUT 2
14
+VSS 3
15 5 THERMISTER1
GND IN 1 4
4 6 THERMISTER2
V- IN 2 5
3 7 THERMISTER3
ENB IN 3 6
2 8 THERMISTER4
D0
A0 IN 4 7
17 13 THERMISTER5
D1
A1 IN 5 8
16 12 THERMISTER6
D2
A2 IN 6 9
C 18 11 THERMISTER7 THERMISTER6 C
SHDN RS IN 7 10
1 10 THERMISTER8 THERMISTER5
WR IN 8 11
12
13
U59D 14

10
12

2
3
4
6
7
8
9
TEMP
11 MICROFIT-14
13 RN20
IOW 10Kx9, 2%
74HC32

C
1
B B

+15V-15V

RN18 1Kx4
U49
2 3 1 8
DACMUX D1 S1 DAC0V
DAC0V
15 14 2 7
D2 S2 DAC1V
DAC1V
10K 10 11 3 6
D3 S3 DAC2V
DAC2V
C36 0.15 uF, ceramic 7 6 4 5
R34 D4 S4 DAC3V
DAC3V
12 1 1 8
VCC VCC IN1 DAC0
4 16 2 7
-VS IN2 DAC1
5 9 3 6
GND IN3 DAC2
13 8 4 5
+VS IN4 DAC3
C37 0.15 uF, ceramic
DG444DY 10Kx4
RN21

A A

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000

Size Number Revision

04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 5of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

CONTROL INPUTS

VCC

10
5

10
5
RN3 TP7

C
D 510x8 RN2 D
U11

C
15Kx8

1
U12 1
G1 DIGIO0

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
PS2702-4 19
G2 IOR

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
J1004 1 16 2 18 D0
A1 Y1
3 17 D1
L19 A2 Y2
2 15 4 16 D2
1 L20 A3 Y3
3 14 5 15 D3
2 L21 A4 Y4
6 14 D4
3 A5 Y5
4 13 7 13 D5
EXTERNAL 4 A6 Y6
CONTROL 5 12 8 12 D6
IN
5 L22 FE BEAD 9
A7 Y7
11 D7
A 6 A8 Y8
6 11
7 L8 7 10 74HC541
8 D[0..7]
9
8 9
10 L9

C23
C35

C57
TERMBLOCK-10 10000 pF

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7
EXT_+5V_OUT
C34

C56

C22

10000 pF R27 R28 R29 R31 R32 R33

C R26 R30 C
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100

C101

C103
C97

C99
330 pF, 50V 330 pF, 50V
U13

C100

C102
C96

C98
PS2702-4
330 pF, 50V
1 16 330 pF, 50V

L23 2 15
L24 3 14
L26
4 13
L25 FE BEAD 5 12
Place these termination resistors at the end of each data
line. Each data line
6 11
should be laid out as a daisy-chain, the signal passing
7 10
from one IC to the next.
C59

C62

8 9
10000 pF
VCC
C58

C61

B 10000 pF B

10
5
RN4 U14

C
15Kx8
8
7
6
5

RN1 1
G1 DIGIO4
19 IOR
G2

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
510x4
2 18 D0
A1 Y1
3 17 D1
A2 Y2
U15 4 16 D2
A3 Y3
1
2
3
4

J1006 PS2702-4 5 15 D3
A4 Y4
6 14 D4
A5 Y5
1 16 7 13 D5
1 A6 Y6
8 12 D6
EXTERNAL 2 L28 A7 Y7
CONTROL 2 15 9 11 D7
3 L29 A8 Y8
IN 3 14
B 4
L30 D[0..7]
5
L27 4 13 74HC541
6
5 12
7
L11
8
L10 6 11
9
7 10
A 10 FE BEAD A
TERMBLOCK-10
C25

C66

8 9
C64

10000 pF EXT_+5V_OUT Title

Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000
C24

C63

C65

Size Number Revision

10000 pF 04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 6of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

VCC

10
DIGITAL OUTPUTS

5
RN10

C
D 510x8 D

U22 PS2702-4 C80

1 16 C82

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
TP19 10000 pF
SHDN 2 15 C79 C81
SHDN
U24 3 14
U6B 74HC574 10000 pF

1
4 1 4 13
DIGIO2 OE L43
6 11 5 12
CLK
IOW 5 L44
D0 2 19 6 11 L45
D1 Q1
74HC32 D1 3 18 7 10
D2 Q2
D2 4 17
D3 5
D3 Q3
16 8 9 L46 FE BEAD
D4 Q4 J1017
D4 6 15
D5 Q5 1
D5 7 14
D6 Q6 2
D6 8 13 A STATUS OUTPUTS
D7 Q7 3
D7 9 12 U25 PS2702-4
D8 Q8 L48 4
1 16
5
D[0..7] L49 6
2 15 L50
7
3 14
8
4 13 L47 FE BEAD 9
C 10 C
5 12
11
12
6 11
7 10 C84 C86 TERMBLOCK-12
10000 pF
8 9 L12
C83 C85
FE BEAD
C26
10000 pF

C27
RESETTABLE FUSE, 0.3A, 60V
VCC
D6 F1 L13

10
5
VCC
FE BEAD
RN12
C

510x8 DIODE, SCHOTTKY EXT_+5V_OUT

U26 PS2702-4
1 16
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

B SHDN 2 15 B
U27 3 14
U20D 74HC574 C90
12 1 4 13
DIGIO3 OE L52 10000 pF
11 11 5 12 C88
CLK L53
IOW 13 B STATUS OUTPUTS
IOW L54
D0 2 19 6 11
D1 Q1 C89 10000 pF
74HC32 D1 3 18 7 10 C87
D2 Q2
D2 4 17 J1018
D3 5
D3 Q3
16 8 9 L51 FE BEAD
D4 Q4
D4 6 15 1
D5 Q5 1
D5 7 14 2
D6 Q6 2
D6 8 13 3
D7 Q7 3
D7 9 12 U28 PS2702-4 4
D8 Q8 L56 4
1 16 5
L57 5
6
L58 6
2 15 7
7
3 14 8
8
9
4 13 L55 FE BEAD 10
RET
GND
5 12
C28 C92 TERMBLOCK-10
6 11 C94
7 10 10000 pF
C91 C93
A 8 9 L14 10000 pF A

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000

Size Number Revision

04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 7of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

VCC

10
DIGITAL OUTPUTS

5
RN7

C
510x8

U16 PS2702-4
SHDN 1 16

C68
SHDN

C70
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
U17
D 10000 pF D
U59C 74HC574 2 15
9 1 3 14

C67

C69
DIGIO0 OE
8 11
CLK 10000 pF
IOW 10 4 13
D0 2 19 5 12 L32
D1 Q1 L33
74HC32 D1 3 18
D2 Q2 L34
D2 4 17 6 11
D3 Q3
D3 5 16 7 10
D4 Q4
D4 6 15
D5 7
D5 Q5
14 8 9 L31 FE BEAD
D6 Q6 J1008
D6 8 13
D7 Q7 1
D7 9 12
D8 Q8 2
3
U18 PS2702-4
D[0..7] L36 4
1 16 CONTROL OUTPUTS
L37 5
L38 6
2 15
7
3 14
8
4 13 L35 FE BEAD 9
10
5 12
11
12
6 11 CO_EXT_RET
13
7 10
14
C C
8 9 TERMBLOCK-14
L59 FE BEAD
VCC

C72

C74
EXTERNAL CONNECTOR

10
10000 pF SOLDER SIDE

C95

C71

C73
RN5

C
510x8
10000 pF
10000 pF
U19 PS2702-4

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
1 16

SHDN 2 15
U21 3 14
U20A 74HC574
1 1 4 13
DIGIO4 OE L40
3 11 5 12
CLK L41
2
IOW L42
D0 2 19 6 11
D1 Q1
74HC32 D1 3 18 7 10
D2 Q2
D2 4 17
D3 Q3 L39 FE BEAD

C76

C78
D3 5 16 8 9
D4 Q4 10000 pF
D4 6 15
B D5 Q5 +12V B
D5 7 14 D2
D6 Q6

C75

C77
D6 8 13 K1 RELAY SPDT
D7 Q7
D7 9 12 2 4
D8 Q8
DIODE, SCHOTTKY 5 1
3 10000 pF J1009
Q1
1
R58
+12V 2
D3
3
RELAY SPDT
4
2.2K, 5% K2 5 EXTERNAL
SO2222 DIODE, SCHOTTKY 2 4 REAR PANEL
6
5 1 ALARM OUTPUTS
7
3 RELAY SPDT
8
Q2 K3 9
R6 2 4
+12V 10
D4 5 1
11
3
12
2.2K, 5%
SO2222 DIODE, SCHOTTKY Q3 TERMBLOCK-12
+12V
D5 RELAY SPDT
K4
2 4
R7 2.2K, 5% DIODE, SCHOTTKY 5 1
SO2222 3
Q4
A R8 A

Title
2.2K, 5% Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA #040690000
SO2222
+12VRET
Size Number Revision
04070 B
Orcad B
Date: 25-Feb-2002 Sheet 8of 8
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04068CC\PROTEL\04068B.DDB
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

ON JP5:
+15V PMT TEMPERATURE FEEDBACK
FOR 100E/200E : SHORT PINS 2 &5
+12V_REF
ONLY.
+15V JP2
R28
FOR 200EU: SHORT PIN 1 TO PIN 4,
10K, POT +15V TH1
D1 R18 1
1 FSV TJP1A
6.2V ZENER 10K TJP2A 2
2 OPTIC TEST PMT TEMP CONFIG JUMPER
3

8
D R8 6.2V 4 D
150K
5
3 2 U2A
6
R27 499 1
3
LF353
R35 R15 R6 +12V_REF
TO TEC BOARD
+ 1.0K 55K 100K

4
J2
C26 TP3
C23 C1 +12V_REF 0.1 uF *
1 VREF

8
100 pF
2 COOLER CONTROL
2

N/I U3B
S R41 3 AGND
R2 R16 6
Q3 3 51.1K 100K 300K 7 3 PIN INLINE
12

3 G
J176 5
TJP1A
THERMISTOR+ LF353
1

D TP24
*

4
+15V
RT1 R7
10K +5V_SYS
J3 9 C6 R1
-15V TP23
PREAMP1 R32 10K
C 8 * C
LED+ 499 0.1 uF D2
7

8
LED+ 11DQ05
6 THERMISTOR+
5 2 U3A R9
2

4
HVPS U13 1 PMT_TEMP
3
R23 3
2 +15V 1 2.0K
Ec

b 4 2 OPTIC_TEST LF353
1 4.99K R10
INLINE-9-RA R37

4
Q2 8.09K
3

74AHC1GU04 3.3K
PN2222
TJP2A

TP18 TP17 TP25 TP19 TP22 TP21 TP20

* * * * * * *
Signal Connector
J6
ETEST
OPTIC_TEST 1 ELEC TEST
2 OPTIC TEST
3 PREAMP RNG BIT2
HIGAIN
4 PREAMP RNG BIT1
B PMT_TEMP B
5 PMT TEMP
HVPS VPMT 6 HVPS VOLTAGE
7 PMT SIGNAL
8
MICROFIT-8

J5
*
TP11
1
L2 2
+15V 3
4.7 uH 4
5
C21 6
+ Power Connector
C49 7
8
100uF 0.68 uF
9
TP15 TP14 TP13 10
*
TP16 * * *
MINIFIT-10
L1
-15V
4.7 uH +5V_SYS
A C16 A
+
C46 Title
4.7uF, 16v 0.68 uF 100E/200E PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic

Size Number Revision

04181 C
B
Date: 13-Jan-2003 Sheet 1 of 3
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04179cc\Source\04179c.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

D VPMT D

TP9
5

U5
U4 *
8 ETEST 4 2 ETEST
GND

IN 4
6 7
NC4 COM4 ETEST
9
ETEST_SIGNAL IN 3
11 NC3 COM3 10 74AHC1GU04
16 ETEST
IN2
PREAMP1 14 15 PREAMP2 U17
NC2 COM2 HIGAIN
+15V 1
V(L)

IN1
V+

3 2 4 2 HIGAIN
V-

NC1 COM1
2

C31 HIGAIN -15V

0.68 uF DG444DY DEFAULT = SHORTED
74AHC1GU04
13
12
4

4
+15V -15V
+5V_SYS JP1 U9A
C29 3
0.68 uF 1
2
-15V
LF353
C C

8
R11 100M +15V

C4 0.001 uF
TP1
*
8

C2 100 pF U16B
6
7
5 R29 R5
1000M 50k, POT
N/I, SHORTED
R12 R46 100
R48
4

1K +15V
LF353, OPAMP R50
N/I
+15V C28 10uF/25V JP4
TP8
+

* N/I, DEFAULT = SHORTED

R44 C48
GUARD RING PREAMP2
25.5K PMTGND 0.1 uF
TP7
7

8
J1 C5 0.68 uF
1

2
R3 *
B 2 U1 B
PMT Signal Connector 1 PREAMP1 U2B
6 6
2 4.99K
3 7
COAX R17 R36 5
OPA124
10 Ohm LF353, OPAMP
4

VREF 250K
8

TP2

4
+

1KHZ C3 *
PMTGND C2710uF/25V 1 1 uF, FILM U11
-15V
R43 R4 C11 0.01 uF
10K 2 R13 1 8
100 FB BUFOUT C47
N/I, POT 2 7
AGND OUT
3 6 0.68 uF
TP6 -2.5V V- V+ +12V_REF
C30 0.68 uF 4 5
SPAN ADJUST

* 3 DIV RATIO C OSC

1
PMTGND C9
-15V LTC1062CN8 3900 pF, FILM
ETEST_SIGNAL
R51 JP5
R38 N/I N/I
3
N/I
R19
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
2
10K, POT
1. CAPACITANCE IS IN MICROFARADS.
A This schematic applies to PCA #04180-0100 A
1 ELECT. TEST
2. RESISTORS ARE 1%, 1/4W.
PMTGND Title
3. RESISTANCE IS IN OHMS. M100E/200E PMT Preamp PCA Schematic

4. THIS CIRCUIT MUST BE USED Size Number Revision

AS A MATCHED PAIR WITH THE 04181 C
B
TEC CONTROL CIRCUIT
Date: 13-Jan-2003 Sheet 2 of 3
File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04179cc\Source\04179c.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6

HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY

C45 100pF

TP4
*
VREF
D +15V D
R33 4.99K R40

D3
C7 1.0K (1.15K?)
+15V 0.68 uF C32
10uF/25V
6.2V ZENER
+5V_LOCAL
C25 R42 R20
0.1 uF 4.99K 4.99K

1
HVPS
U16A
2 8

Vcc
R47 Iout RN1
1 9 9 C
D7
1

3 3 10 8
4.99K Vrf(-) D6
11 7
C20 LF353, OPAMP D5
2 12 6
K A

D7 R49 Vrf(+) D4
+ C22 13 4

4
1.0K C33 D3
10uF/25V 0.68 uF D2 14 3
16V 0.68 uF 4 15 2 5
COMP D1
16 1 10

GND
2

C24 D0 +5V_LOCAL
7 100Kx8
0.1 uF Vee
-15V U6
C -15V DAC0808 C

6
8

U9B
6
7
5

LF535
4

6
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
S1 S2
B B

+12V_REF
+5V_LOCAL
TP5 TP10
*

5
U8 * U14
3 1 1 5
GND

+15V IN OUT IN OUT

3 4
GND

ON/OFF NC
LM78L12ACZ(3) D6
+ C34 + C15 LP2981IM5 + C50 11DQ05
2

10uF/25V
2

10uF/25V 10uF/25V

C42 C14
0.68 uF 10uF/25V
2

TP12
*
1 3
-2.5V
A A
VR1
LM336Z-2.5 Title
R24 M100E/200E PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic
2k
Size Number Revision
B 040181 C

-15V Date: 13-Jan-2003 Sheet 3 of 3

File: N:\PCBMGR\UNREL\04179cc\Source\04179c.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC
M1 M2
VCC

20
U1
19

Vcc
D_A RN3
M3 M4 S8 1 18 DS1 GRN
Y1 D_B
2 17 1 10
Y2 D_C
3 16 2 9 MAINT_LED_V+
Y3 D_D DS2
S7
4 15 YEL 3 8
D Y4 D_E D
5 VCC 4 7
M6 M5 Y5
6 13 5 6
OSC AVL DS3
C1
7 RED
KBM
12 KEYBOARD, LED & HORN 220

24
S6 X1
.1uF + C6 14 11
OE X2 U2
9

Vdd
X3

Vss
10uF 8 KBD_A0 21 4 DS4
X4 A0 P00
M7 S5
KBD_A1 2 5
A1 P01
KBD_A2 3 6 +

10
74C923 A2 P02 DS5
1 7
INT P03
8
P04
S4 SCL 22 9 MAINT_SW
SCL P05
SDA 23 10 LANG_SELCT DS6
SDA P06
11
M9 M8 P07
13 GRN LED
P10
S3 PCF8575 P11 14 YEL LED
RI-1000 ONLY
15 RED LED
P12
16 LED 4
P13 Layout Instructions:
17 LED 5
M10 MF3 VCC P14
VCC 18 LED 6 A1
S2
R2 P15 1. Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have
U3A 19 HORN
1.0K P16 SONALERT 10 mil traces if possible.
4 20 SPR_I/O_0
PRE P17 2. Please run traces on both and backside but

Vss
3 5
RN1
CLK Q where possible fill one side with GND.
MF4 2 6
C S1
4.7K
D Q 3. Minimum width for +5_DISP, DISP_PWR, C
1

12
C7
CLR DISP_RET is 40 mil, except to test points.
4. Minimum width for VCC, GND, Vdd, Vss is
MM74HC74A
2
3
4
5
6
300pF
30 mil, except to test points
S9
VCC

RI-1000 ONLY

16
U4
VCC J3 TO/FRM DISPLAY

Vdd
OPT. MAINT SWITCH DISP_DA_A0 1 4
S12 AO P0 2 1
U3B DISP_DA_A1 2 5
A1 P1 4 3
10 DISP_DA_A2 3 6
PRE A2 P2 6 5
11 9 KYBRD_INT 7
VCC CLK Q P3 8 7
J4 T8201 1 12 8 SCL 14 9 DISP_WR
RN5 D Q SCL P4 10 9
MAINT SW MAINT_SW 13 SDA 15 10 DISP_BUSY
1 4.7K CLR SDA P5 12 11
MAINT SW RET 11
2 P6 14 13
MAINT LED V+ MAINT_LED_V+ MM74HC74A 12
3 PCF8574 P7 16 15
MAINT LED MAINT_LED

10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
LANG SW LANG_SELCT KBD_A0 DISPLAY DATA 13
5 INT
LANG SW RET KBD_A1

Vss
6
SPR I/O_0 SPR_I/O_0 KBD_A2 DISP_DA_A0 JP2 I2C TERMINATION
7
SPR I/O RET DISP_CN_A0 DISP_DA_A1 SCL DISP_PWR

8
8 1 2 DISP_RET
SPR I/O_1 SPR_I/O_1 DISP_CN_A1 DISP_DA_A2 SDA +5_DISP
9 3 4
B SPR I/O RET DISP_CN_A2 B
10 DISP_PWR_EN must VCC
SPR I/O_2 SPR_I/O_2
11 be high for display to Q1
SPR I/O RET

1
12 DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR I2C TO PARALLEL be powered. +5_DISP
OPT. LANG. SWITCH JP1 DECODERS: VCC C17 1 6
13 RN2 D
ADRS SLCTS 4.7K
2 5
14 S13 KEYBOARD (KBD_A0 - A2) 1500uF 3 4
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17

111 G S
DISPLAY CONTROL

16
3M-2514-6002UB SI3443DV

2
3
4
5
6
DISPL CONTROL (DISP_CN_A0 -A1) U5
011
10
12
14
16
18

Vdd
JP5
2
4
6
8

DISP_CN_A0 1 4 DISP_WR
GND VCC +5_DISP SDA KYBRD INT AO P0 DISP_PWR_OVR
DISP_CN_A1 2 5 DISP_BUSY
A1 P1
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 DISP_CN_A2 3 6 DISP_PWR_EN
SDA KYBRD_INT NOTES: A2 P2
7 MAINT_LED
1
VCC +5_DISP 1. This schematic is based on P3 MCP120T 2
SCL 14 9
SCL P4 1 3 MMBT3904
DISP_PWR DISP_RET BUSY SCL R3 the PWB PN, 03974 and SDA 15
SDA P5
10 Vdd RST
applies to PCA PN, 03975 11 U6 Q2

Vss
TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 R4 P6 R20
4.7K 12
DISP_BUSY SCL P7
DISP_PWR DISP_RET 4.7K 1K

2
13
INT
4.85V DTCT

Vss
+5_DISP
VCC
(U1) (U2) (U4) (U45
1 6 SCL 1 6 SCL DISP_RET PCF8574 SPR_I/O_1

8
+5_DISP +5_DISP
2 7 KYBRD_INT 2 7 KYBRD_INT SPR_I/O_2
3 8 3 8 C11 C12 C10 + C14 C4 C9 C8 + C13 C2 C3 C5 C15 C16
VCC DISP_RET VCC DISP_RET
A 4 9 4 9 A
SDA 5 10 SDA 5 10 220pF 220pF 220pF 100uF .1uF 220pF 220pF 10uF .1uF .1uF .1uF .1uF .1uF
Title
J1 JP3 J2 JP4 Schematic for PCA #04258 and PCB #04257, Keyboard/Display Interface for E series
DISP_RET
Size Number Revision
04259
B a
Date: 21-Mar-2002 Sheet of
File: N:\YHWork\M300B\keyboard\04257a\04259A.ddb
Drawn By:
1 2 3 4 5 6
 R2
1.1K
S1 VR2
LM4040CIZ
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

C2
1.0UF

TP4 TP5 TP3 TP1

S1_OUT S2_OUT S3_OUT GND
S2 J1

ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

MINIFIT6

TP2 R1
S3 10V_REF 499
VR1
FLOW SENSOR

C1
1.0UF

LM4040CIZ

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING PCA'S:

PCA# S1 (PRESSURE) S2 (PRESSURE) S3 (FLOW)
04003-0100 INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED
04003-0400 INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED
04003-0800 INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED

The information herein is the APPROVALS DATE PCA SCH, PRESS/FLOW

property of API and is
submitted in strictest con- DRAWN
fidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is CHECKED SIZE DRAWING NO. REVISION
prohibited. This document or B
any information contained
04354 A
in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD. SHEET
without proper authorization. 3-Jun-2002 1 of 1
 A B C D
+5V +5V
IC102:A IC102:D IC103:A C106 Y102 C107 +5V
74AC00D 74AC00D 1 +5V +5V 15pF +5V +5V C101 C102
+5V IC101 +5V 1 12 3 74ACT32 IC105 15pF S
3 11 2 C118 9 9 2 5 6 8 9 9
100nF S 100nF
74ACT138 2 13 IC103:D S CS8900A-CQ 7 20.0 MHz 8 9 2 6 9 5 0 5 R110
16 74ACT32 100nF 4K99
A15 1
VCC
15
13
33 X X D D D D A A A 77 R111
A16 2
A Y0
14 IC102:B 11
34 IOCS1 6 T T V V V V V V V SLEEP 4K99
1 A17 3
B
C
Y1
Y2
13 74AC00D 12
IC103:B 36 MEMCS1 6
SBHE
A
L
A
L
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D TEST
76 +5V +5V 1
12 4 49
Y3
11 6 4 74ACT32 63 REFRESH 1 2 1 2 3 4 2 1 3
+5V C103 C128
6
Y4
10 5 6 64
AEN R112 DS101 S
A18 4
G1 Y5
9 5
IOCHRDY
499R 100nF 100nF
A19 5 G2 Y6
7 IC103:C 61 100 ACT,
G3 Y7 IOR LANLED
8 62
GND IC102:C 9 74ACT32 29 IOW
74AC00D 8 28 MEMR R113 DS102
MEMW
9 10 499R LINK
8
+5V IC104 2
ELCS LINKLED/ HC0
99
MT1
10 C104 C0561AD-L
7
CHIPSEL
11
14 22pF 1 31 13
DMARQ2 MT2
NC PL101:14 42
VCC S -BHE
18 15
DMARQ1
13 X1 LANDRQ DMARQ0
NC PL101:13 ALE
41 12
DMACK2 BSTATUS/ HC1
78
14
+5V C105 Y101 16 DMACK1
18.432MHz 17 DMACK0 R114
22pF 75 CSOUT
4K99 C109
1 RESET
+5V PL101:1 15
43
X2 RES
93 100nF
+5V PL101:15 44
CLKO A19
50 A19 60
SA19 T101
39 A18 59
52
A18
8 A17 58
SA18 TG43-1406N
2 +5V 68
-WR
-RD
A17
A16
45 A16 54
SA17
SA16
J101 2
49 A15 53 92 1 1:1 16 6
2 A15 SA15 RXD- RX-
GND PL101:2 16
14
-UCS A14
47 52
SA14
(5) GND PL101:16 R101 +5V R102
21
-LCS A13
51 51
SA13 R115
48 50 2 15
4.99K 4.99K S A12
53 48
SA12
100R
A11 SA11
40 56 47
URTINT A10 SA10
12 65 54 46 91 3 14 3
STATUS PL101:12 -LMSEL A9
38 45
SA9 RXD+ RX+
IC106 +5V +5V A8
37 44
SA8 R116
+5V MAX237 +5V A7
33 43
SA7
24R3 1: 2
A6 SA6
46 42 88 6 11 2
A5 SA5 TXD- TX-
9 36 41
C119 10
VCC
13 R103 R104 A4
35 40
SA4
100nF S C1+ C2+
499 499 S A3 SA3 C108
1uF 16V 1uF 16V

34 39 7 10
C120 A2
19 38
SA2 R117 68pF
C123 C122

S S S A1 SA1
1uF 16V A0
57 37
SA0 24R3
12 14 87 8 9 1
C1- C2- TXD+ TX+
11 15 25 18 4
V+ V- D15 SD15 NC1
27 10 19 5
C121 DS103 DS104 28
NC1 D14
11 20
SD14
7
NC2
S S TXD RXD 29
NC2 D13
23 21
SD13
84 C110 8
NC3
1uF 16V 32
NC3 D12
13 24
SD12 DO-
100nF 9
NC4
NC4 D11 SD11 S1
66 16 25 83 10
DB-9 PIN NUMBERS IN PARENS. NC5 D10 SD10 DO+ S2
RS-232 TTL 17 26
3 (2) TXD PL101:3
3 2
TO1 TI1
7 26
TXD1
D9
D8
22 27
SD09
SD08 CI-
82 3
4 3 6 63 9 74
(6) DTR PL101:4 5 1
TO2 TI2
18 58
-DTR1 D7
24 73
SD7
81
(8) RTS PL101:5 6 24
TO3 TI3
19 60
-RTS1 D6
2 72
SD6 CI+
(1) DCD PL101:6 7 20
TO4 TI4
21 20
-DCD1 D5
3 71
SD5
80 +5V +5V +5V +5V
RI PL101:7 TO5 TI5 -RI1 D4
4 68
SD4 DI-
D3 SD3
(3) RXD PL101:8
8 4
RI1 RO1
5 30
RXD1 D2
5 67
SD2 DI+
79 C111 C112 C113 C114
9 23 22 15 6 66 S
(4) DSR PL101:9 10 16
RI2 RO2
17 59
-DSR1 D1
7 65
SD1 100nF S 100nF S 100nF 100nF
(7) CTS PL101:10 RI3 RO3
12
-CTS1 D0 SD0
-RES
RESET PL101:11
11 8
GND +5V R106 61
HLDA
35
INTRQ3
D D
EECS
3
62 30 D V D D V D A A A A A 4
4.99K 55
HOLD
31
INTRQ2 V S V V S V V V V V V EESK
5 +5V +5V +5V +5V
GND INTRQ1 S S S S S S S S S S S EEDATAOUT
67 64 32 S 1 S S 3 S S S S S S 6
GND LANINT INTRQ0 EEDATAIN
+5V +5V 1 A 2 3 A 4 0 1 2 3 4
C115 C116 C117 C127
8 1 2 5 5 7 1 8 8 9 9
S 100nF S 100nF S 100nF 100nF
+5V IC107 +5V 0 3 5 7 0 9 6 4 6
PL102-1 R105 TL7705
C129 S
4.99K 7
SENSE VCC
8 R108 R109
10uF 16V 2 5 10.0K 10.0K
RESIN RESET TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION
4 PL102-2 4
3 6 INSTRUMENTATION INC.
CT RESET NOTES:
1 4 Title
REF GND R107 1 THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO PWB 04393 REV. A. ETHERNET INTERFACE SCHEMATIC
C124 C125 C126 10.0K 2 ALL RESISTANCES IN OHMS, 1%
S S 100nF S Size Number Rev
1uF 16V 1uF 16V 3 PARTS DENOTED "S" ON SECONDARY SIDE OF PCA B 04395 A
Date Thu Jul 25 2002 Drawn by
Filename SLAN.S03 Sheet 1 of 1

A B C D